AUTOMATIC

SCREW MACHINES
 AUTOMATIC
SCREW MACHINES
 AUTOMATIC
SCREW MACHINES
A TREATISE ON THE CONSTRUCTION, DE-
SIGN, AND OPERATION OF AUTOMATIC SCREW
MACHINES AND THEIR TOOL EQUIPMENT

BY
DOUGLAS T. HAMILTON
ASSOCIATE EDITOR OF MACHINERY
"
AUTHOR OF AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE," " SHRAPNEL
SHELL MANUFACTURE," " MACHINE FORGING," " BOLT,
NUT, AND RIVET FORGING," ETC.

AND

FRANKLIN D. JONES
ASSOCIATE EDITOR OF MACHINERY
"
AUTHOR OF TURNING AND BORING," " PLANING AND MILLING,"
"
GAGING TOOLS AND METHODS," ETC.

FIRST EDITION

NEW YORK
THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS
LONDON: THE MACHINERY PUBLISHING CO., LTD.

1916
 COPYRIGHT, 1916
BY
THE INDUSTRIAL PRESS
NEW YORK

Composition and Electrotyping by THE PLIMPTON PRESS, Norwood, Mass

 PREFACE
THE class of automatic machine tools commonly known as
screw machines represents one of the most important develop-
ments in the machine tool field, and includes ingenious mecha-
nisms which may be studied with profit by all who are interested
in mechanical movements and modern methods of manu-
facture. This book deals with five distinct branches of auto-
matic screw machine practice. It covers the design and
construction of different well-known types of single- and mul-
tiple-spindle machines, the tool equipment used for various
classes of work, the methods of adjusting or setting-up machines
made by different manufacturers, the design of screw machine

cams, and the application of machines of this type to both

typical and unusual operations. The descriptions of machines
are confined principally to the important fundamental features
of the design, and deal especially with those mechanisms
which control parts that must operate automatically and in
accordance with the nature of the work being produced.
The machines illustrated were selected as representative types,
each embodying important developments in screw machine
design.
While designers have incorporated many ingenious ideas
equipment and auxiliary
in automatic screw machines, the tool
attachments used in conjunction with these machines are not
lacking either in cleverness of design, or effectiveness in in-
creasing the efficiency and range of machine tools of this class,
to include an endless variety of work. The various types of
tools used for turning, boring, recessing, threading, knurling,
etc.,are described, and the methods of applying these tools
are illustrated by practical examples. Different attachments
are also described, such as are commonly used for slotting

392309
vi PREFACE

screw-heads, milling, cross-drilling, and automatically feeding

separate castings or forgings to the machine from a magazine.
Information on the adjustment and setting-up of screw ma-
chines is given to supplement the general descriptions and
show just what changes are necessary when a machine must
be arranged for producing different parts. In dealing with
the subject of cam design, the exact method of laying out a
set of cams for a given operation has been described in detail,
in order to clearly indicate the fundamental principles
involved.
This treatise is intended especially for the users of screw
machines and the designers of tools and auxiliary equipment,
and, in order tomake it of greater practical value to the men
responsible for the economical operation of these machines
and the production of parts which conform to required stand-
ards of accuracy, many different classes of work and a large
variety of standard and special tools have been described in
detail. The cooperation of screw machine manufacturers in

supplying illustrations and data is much appreciated.

THE AUTHORS.
NEW YORK, September, 1916
 CONTENTS
CHAPTER I

SCREW MACHINE CLASSIFICATION AND

DEVELOPMENT PAGES

Origin of the Term "Screw Machine" Distinction

between Automatic and Semi-automatic Machines Gen-
eral Features of Automatic Screw Machines Classification
.

of Automatic Screw Machines Development of Single-

and Multiple-spindle Types General Application of Auto-
matic Screw Machines Advantages of Single- and Mul-
tiple-spindle Designs i-io

CHAPTER II

SINGLE-SPINDLE AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINES

Brown & Sharpe Automatic Screw Machine Cleve-
land Automatic Screw Machine Gridley Single-spindle
Automatic Turret Lathe Chicago Automatic Screw
Machine 11-38

CHAPTER III

MULTIPLE-SPINDLE AUTOMATIC SCREW

MACHINES
Acme Four-spindle Automatic Screw Machine Daven-
port Five-spindleAutomatic Screw Machine Hayden
Five-spindle Automatic Screw Machine Gridley Four-
spindle Automatic Screw Machine New Britain Six-
spindle Automatic Screw Machine 39-83

CHAPTER IV
AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINE TOOL
EQUIPMENT
Circular Forming and Cutting-off Tools Tool-holders
foi Flat Forming Tools Box-tools Methods of Apply-
ing Box-tool Cutters Work Supports for Box-tools
Viii CONTENTS

Hollow Mills Centering and Facing Tools Drills and

Drill-holders Counterboring Tools Reamers and Reamer-
holders Swing Tools for Turning and Recessing Shaving
Tools Dies for Screw Machine Work Die-holders
Taps for Screw Machines Knurling Tools 84-147

CHAPTER V
ADJUSTING OR SETTING-UP AUTOMATIC
SCREW MACHINES
Setting-up the Brown & Sharpe Machine Adjustments
on the Cleveland Automatic Method of Setting-up the
Acme Multiple-spindle Machine Setting-up the Daven-
port Multiple-spindle Automatic 148-196

CHAPTER VI

ATTACHMENTS FOR AUTOMATIC SCREW

MACHINES
Screw Slotting Attachment Slotting and Slabbing
Attachment Index Drilling Attachment Cross-drilling
Attachments Turret Drilling Attachment Burring At-
tachment Tap and Die Revolving Attachment Accel-
erated Reaming Attachment Drilling and Milling Attach-
ment Vertical-spindle Milling Attachment End-milling
or Slotting Attachment Attachment for Forming Squares
and Hexagons Attachment for Robbing Worms and
Spiral Gears Magazine Feeding Attachments 197-223

CHAPTER VII

DESIGNING SCREW MACHINE CAMS

Effect of Cutting Speed on Cam Design General
Method of Designing Cams Laying Out Cams for a Spe-
cific Operation Development of Cam Lobe for Control-
ling Movement Threading Die
of Allowance for Tool
Clearance Use Cam-lever Templets
of Laying Out
Cams for Recessing Cam Rise for Drilling Designing
Cams for Deep-hole Drilling 224-257
 CONTENTS IX

CHAPTER VIII
OPERATIONS ON SINGLE- AND MULTIPLE-
SPINDLE SCREW MACHINES
Examples of Forming Operations Recessing Drill-

ing and Counterboring from Cross-slide Making Watch

Parts in Screw Machine Examples of Work on the Cleve-
land Automatic Operations on Acme Multiple-spindle
Machine Use of Screw Machine for Producing and
Assembling Parts Thread Rolling in the Screw Machine
- Different of Tools for Thread Rolling
Types Cutting
Helical Gears in Screw Machine Speeds and Feeds for
Screw Machine Operation 258-335
 AUTOMATIC SCREW
MACHINES
CHAPTER I

SCREW MACHINE CLASSIFICATION AND DEVELOPMENT

MACHINE toolswhich are either automatic or semi-auto-

matic in their operation have replaced many hand-operated
tools, especially wherever large numbers of duplicate machine

parts are required. There are many different classes of auto-

matic machine tools used at the present time, but the most
important class or group is that which originated from the
lathe and in which are included the machines designed primarily
for turning and boring operations. In this general class there
are several distinct types which have their own particular
field and also many different designs.

The machines which are dealt with in this treatise are

commonly known as automatic screw machines because the work
for which they were originally designed was the making of
screws. This field, however, was soon enlarged to include the

making of all kinds of small nuts, washers, pins, collars, etc.,

and, at the present time, machines of this class are capable of

a great variety of operations, not only on parts which are
turned from bars of stock, but on separate castings or forgings
when magazine feeding attachments are employed. It is
"
evident, therefore, that the term screw machine" as applied
to modern machines of this a misnomer, because the
type is

making of screws constitutes only a small part of screw machine

production. While the smaller machines are naturally adapted
tomaking various kinds of standard and special screws, in
many shops and factories they are used almost exclusively on
" "
other classes of work. The term screw machine is even less
2 CLASSIFICATION AND DEVELOPMENT

accurate or descriptive when applied to the large automatic

machines now used extensively for general bar and chuck
work, in direct competition with the semi-automatic and hand-
operated turret lathes; in fact, some manufacturers of such
machines do not list them as screw machines, but as automatic
machines, automatic turret lathes, or simply as "automatics."
of the Term
" Automatic." The term "auto-
Application
matic," as applied to various classes of machine tools, does not
always have the same meaning, and a machine which one
manufacturer classifies as automatic would be considered semi-
automatic by another manufacturer. For instance, some
machines which are designed to perform a certain cycle of
operations, but are not capable of presenting unfinished parts
to be operated upon to the tools, may be referred to as auto-
matic machines. While such a machine is automatic or self-

moving, in that it controls the movements of the cutting tools,

the attention of an operator is required when each part is com-
pleted, so that such a machine is really semi-automatic.
There are other types of machines, such as the automatic
screw machines, which not only control all the movements of
the cutting tools, but are equipped with work-feeding mecha-
nisms so that, when one part has been finished, other dupli-
cate parts may be produced automatically. The operation of
such a machine is continuous until it needs to be supplied with
raw material, which may either be in the form of bar stock,
or separate castings or forgings, when a magazine feeding
attachment is used. A
machine of this type is automatic in
the sense that repeatedly performs all of the necessary
it

operations, which include ejecting the finished work and

presenting a new piece or length of stock to the tool.
From the foregoing, it will be seen that the term "auto-
matic" is a relative one as applied to machine tools generally.
The early designs of lathes, after they had been equipped with
self-feeding mechanisms, were automatic to the extent of
feeding the turning tool. As automatic feeds became the
rule rather than the exception, and as additional automatic
features were incorporated in the designs of many machines,
 GENERAL FEATURES 3
" automatic" was
the use of the term no longer justified in
the case of a machine which simply had a feeding mechanism.
According to present usage, the term "automatic" is generally
applied to machine tools in which practically all of the move-
ments are self-actuating, although, as previously mentioned,
the extent of the automatic operation varies considerably on
different machines which are classified as automatic types.
When a machine is capable of automatically producing dupli-
cate parts repeatedly, it is universally referred to as auto-

matic, whereas, simply performs a complete cycle of

if it

machining operations, but requires the attention of an

operator each time a part is finished, it may be 'considered
automatic by some, and semi-automatic by others. In some
"
cases, a machine of the latter class is termed automatic,"
while one that capable of continuous operation is known
is

as "fully automatic." In American shop parlance, the term

"automatic" is often used as a noun to indicate any kind of
automatic turning machine, especially a screw machine or
automatic chucking and turning machine of the turret lathe
class.

General Features of Automatic Screw Machines. Charac-

teristic features of automatic screw machines in general are
means for automatically locating successive tools in the cor-
rect working position, the automatic changing of feeds and
speeds to secure economical operation, and the presenting of
new stock to the tools for a similar series of operations. These
various movements, which are entirely automatic, are obtained
principally from cams which are rotated at predetermined
speeds and are so formed and set, relative to one another,
that the parts of the machine which they control all operate
at the proper time and at suitable feeds or speeds.
There are two general methods of presenting new stock or
raw material to the tools so that the machine can produce
duplicate parts automatically. In most cases, the stock is
in the form of a bar which is large enough in diameter to allow
for making parts of the required size. This bar is held in the
hollow rotating spindle of the machine and, as soon as the tools
4 CLASSIFICATION AND DEVELOPMENT

have finished one part, the bar is automatically pushed forward

far enough for making another piece. After the bar is fed
forward, it is held firmly by a suitable chuck in the end of the

spindle and the different tools advance in the proper order,

perform their respective machining operations, and then recede.
When the finished piece has been cut from the bar, the latter
is again pushed forward against a stop which regulates the
distance that it projects beyond the chuck, and the cycle of

operations is repeated until the entire bar has been used and
changed into the finished product. The attendant, who is
able to care for quite a number of machines, then inserts
a new bar.
While most of the parts produced in automatic screw
machines are made from bar stock, many castings and drop-
forgings may also be finished in machines of this class. When
each part is a separate unit, some auxiliary feeding mechanism
must be employed for automatically inserting the rough pieces
into the chuck, preparatory to the machining operations.
These magazine feeding mechanisms or attachments are loaded
or filled with the parts that require machining and are so de-

signed and adjusted that a rough piece is transferred from

the magazine to the spindle chuck, after the tools have com-

pleted their work and the part finished previously has been
ejected. These magazine feeding attachments vary in design,
according to the shape of the work and the nature of the
machining operation. Magazine attachments are used for that
class of work which cannot be produced profitably from bar

stock, either because of irregularity of shape or the amount of

material which would have to be removed.
Classification of Automatic Screw Machines. There are
two general classes of automatic screw machines, known as
single-spindle and multiple-spindle types, respectively. The
single-spindle machines operate on one part at a time, as there
is only one work-holding spindle. For instance, when operat-
ing on a bar of stock, the tools perform whatever turning,
drilling, reaming, counterboring, threading, or other operations

may be necessary, and then the finished piece is cut off; hence,
 SCREW MACHINE DEVELOPMENT 5

the time required to complete a part on a single-spindle ma-

chine is equal to the total time necessary for all of the separate

operations, which includes the time for withdrawing the tools

at the completion of the various cuts, indexing the turret which
holds the tools, and presenting the succeeding tools to the
work.
Themultiple-spindle machine is designed to operate on
several parts at the same time. Thus, if a four-spindle machine
isturning parts from bar stock, each spindle holds and rotates
a bar which is operated upon by one or more tools, and the
spindle carrier or head indexes or turns one-fourth revolu-
tion as the tools at the four positions or stations recede after

completing their work. With this arrangement, each bar is

successively located in front of the different tools and a part

is finished at each indexing. It is evident, therefore, that a

multiple-spindle machine is practically several machines con-

tained in one unit, and the total time required to complete
a part is equal to the time necessary for the longest single

operation plus the time for the idle movements. In some

cases, the time may be reduced considerably by dividing the
longest operation into two operations. For instance, when
a comparatively long length needs to be turned, instead of
using one box-tool, the cut is often divided between two tools
held in the first and second positions. The drilling of a rather
deep hole is frequently divided in the same way, by using two
or three drills located in different positions.

Development of Single-spindle Machine. The screw

machine was developed to a state of practical usefulness
principally by Christopher M. Spencer. With the intro-
duction of the original Spencer automatic screw machine
"
began the extensive use of automatics"
in the early eighties
as an important factor in modern machine-shop practice.
"
This machine was simply a small turret lathe or screw ma-
chine" fitted with a modified form of the Parkhurst wire or
rod feed; but the various motions usually operated by hand
were controlled instead from various cams on a single cam-
shaft, extending under the machine for its whole length.
6 CLASSIFICATION AND DEVELOPMENT

Changes and length of cut were made by changes in

in feed

simple strap cams. .The time taken for the idle movements
was shortened by giving a quick movement to the camshaft,
automatically changing to the slow feeding movement when
the cutting tools approached the work. Machines of practi-
cally the original design are still in successful use.
The first automatic screw machine to depart from the
Spencer type was the one built by the Brown & Sharpe Manu-
facturing Co. This machine employs disk cams, which are
usually special for the particular piece being made. Unlike
the Spencer machine, these cams have a rotating motion at
a uniform speed, all the idle movements being operated by
intermittent clutch connections with a fast-running controll-
ing shaft. The machine is noted for its accuracy and for the
quickness of its motions and is familiar to all screw-machine

specialists. As is the case with most of the modern machines,

it may be fitted with various automatic attachments for milling,
cross-milling, screw slotting, etc.
The automatic field has been greatly extended by the de-
velopment of the heavier class of automatic machines, such as
the Gridley, Cleveland, and Chicago, which have made it

possible to produce comparatively large work that formerly

could only be done on an engine lathe or that type of turret
lathe designed for handling bar stock.

Development of Multiple-spindle Machine. While the

machines previously referred to have led in widening the .

field of the "automatic," there has been another line of

development which has greatly increased production in those

classes of work for which screw machines were first used.
This is the multiple-spindle automatic screw machine which
was originated by Reinhold-Hackewessell and E. C. Henn.
The first successful design was built by the National Acme
Mfg. Co. In this machine, the turret is dispensed with, and
its place is taken by a tool-holder which feeds tools forward
to operate on bars of stock held in four opposing work-spindles.
"
It is a drum or carrier containing these spindles which in-
7

dexes/ instead of the tool-holder or turret. After the tool-

 GENERAL APPLICATION 7

holder has concluded its working stroke and retired, the

work -spindle carrier or head is revolved, bringing each bar of
stock to the next tool in rotation. The final tool position pro-
vides for a cut-off blade, and a complete piece is finished and
cut off at each indexing. One or more forming slides also
operate at the different spindle positions if necessary. With
this type of machine, all the cutting tools are working on each

feeding stroke, as each has a bar of stock presented to it,

whereas, with a single-spindle machine, the various tools of
the turret operate successively on a single bar of stock.
Among other well-known designs of multiple-spindle
machines may be mentioned the Davenport, Gridley, New
Britain, and the Hayden machines. These various designs,
which will be described later, each possess distinctive features
and represent ingenious examples of modern machine-tool
development.
General Application of Automatic Screw Machines. Auto-
matic screw machines are used for such a variety of operations
that only a general outline of the work for which they are
adapted can be given. As previously mentioned, machines
of this class are designed primarily for producing parts from
bars of stock, although by the addition of auxiliary attach-
ments they may also be used for machining separate forgings
or castings.- The work done on a screw machine usually
involves such operations as turning, drilling, reaming, boring,
recessing, counterboring, and threading. In order to avoid a
secondary operation on another machine, attachments are
also used which enable special operations to be performed.
For instance, if a screw or pin requires a hole drilled through
the head in a cross-wise direction, a cross-drilling attachment
is used. There are also attachments for cutting the slots in
screw-heads after the screws have been turned and threaded
by the regular mechanism and tool equipment of the machine,
and other ingenious attachments have been designed to in-
crease the range of automatic screw machines and make it

possible to completely finish parts on them

in one series of

operations. These attachments are separate units and are

8 CLASSIFICATION AND DEVELOPMENT

applied to the machine in such a way that they operate in

conjunction with the regular tools.
The extent of the tool equipment and its cost naturally

depends upon the nature of the work. For many operations,

only standard tools, such as box- tools, reamers, dies, etc., are

necessary. Frequently an additional special tool is needed,

such as a forming tool for turning the head of a pin or screw
to an irregular shape, and sometimes several special tools are

necessary. The cost of the tool equipment for producing a

certain part is often an important item. When a very large
number of duplicate parts are required,
expense for special
tools is of less
importance than when a relatively small number
of pieces are to be made. In many cases, it is difficult to de-
cide whether an automatic screw machine should be used,
or some other machine, such as a semi-automatic turret lathe
or a hand-operated turret lathe or screw machine. It is im-

portant to consider the number of parts required and the rela-

tion between the higher rate of production obtained with the
automatic machine, the relative cost of tools for each machine,
and the time necessary for adjusting or setting up the ma-
chine. A
general idea of the different points that should be
considered in determining the conditions favorable to the use
of automatic screw machines may be obtained by studying
the various machines, tools, attachments, and operations re-
ferred to in the following chapters.

Advantages Single- and Multiple-spindle Designs.

of -
The difference in the rate of production between the single- and

multiple-spindle types of screw machines varies considerably

on different classes of work. When comparing the two types,
there are two important points to be considered; i. The rela-
tive rates of production for the general class of work required.
2. The degree of accuracy necessary in connection with the
finished product. In general, multiple-spindle machines are
greatly superior so far as rate of production is concerned, but
as a general rule they are not capable of such extremely accu-
rate results as well-designed and carefully constructed single-

spindle machines. While well-built multiple-spindle machines

 GENERAL APPLICATION 9

will produce very accurate work, it is generally considered

impracticable in a commercial machine to secure the same
degree of accuracy as with a single-spindle design, assuming
that each type of machine is constructed in accordance with
approved methods. It is more difficult to secure accurate
indexing with multiple-spindle machines than with the single-
spindle types, because of the greater mechanical difficulties
of constructing a machine having several spindles which are

equally spaced and equi-distant from the axis of the spindle

carrier. In order to overcome any slight inaccuracies which
may exist, ingenious methods of locating the spindle carriers
have been devised and the degree of accuracy obtainable on
high-grade machines of multiple-spindle design, is sufficient
for all except the most exacting work.
Each type of machine has its own field, although it is impos-
sible to draw a definite line which indicates just where one

type is superior to the other. The rate of production is not

always in favor of the multiple-spindle design. For instance,
when turning small brass parts, etc., a very fast spindle speed
is required to secure an efficient cutting speed, and a light
single-spindlemachine is especially adapted to fast speeds,
whereas, with the multiple-spindle type, it is not practicable
to operate the spindles so rapidly, because of the geared drive
to each spindle; consequently, for a given rate of feed, the
tools on a high-speed, single-spindle machine cut faster and
also withdraw and index with great rapidity. With a mul-
tiple-spindle machine, the indexing movements are somewhat
slower because all work spindles, the spindle carrier,
of the
and the bars of stock must be indexed, and, owing to their
combined weight, there is considerable inertia to overcome
when the indexing movement is started and it is also necessary
to arrest the movement of the spindle head without injurious

shocks; hence a slower indexing movement is necessary.

When turning brass or small steel parts, especially when there
are no long operations, such as turning long surfaces or drilling

deep holes, and the idle time represents a comparatively large

percentage of the total time, the importance of rapid move-
10 CLASSIFICATION AND DEVELOPMENT

ments is apparent, and while the single-spindle machine must

index for locating each turret tool, whereas with the
multiple-
spindle machine a part is completed for each indexing move-
ment, this handicap is overcome on some classes of work.
When there are long turning or drilling operations, or in case
considerable material must be removed by forming tools, the
multiple-spindle design has a decided advantage as compared
with the single-spindle type, because the tools all operate
together and the time for the longest operation can be reduced
one-half by using two tools simultaneously.
The advantages of each type, as outlined in the foregoing,
are subject to wide variations, owing to differences in the de-

sign, the size of the machines, and the nature of the work.
For instance, some multiple-spindle machines are designed
especially for small work and index very rapidly, one well-
known make requiring only one second for the indexing move-
ment, during which time the chucks are opened, the stock fed
forward against a stop, the chucks closed, and the feed-tube
drawn back ready for the next feeding movement. The maxi-
mum capacity of this machine is for ^-inch round stock.
Mul-
tiple-spindle machines of larger sizes require more time for

indexing. The single-spindle type covers a much wider range

of work as to size, some machines being adapted to the turning
of small watch and clock parts, whereas others are capable of
handling bars of stock 6 or 7 inches in diameter; in fact, one
single-spindle machine (the Cleveland Automatic) has a
maximum capacity of 7! inches.
 CHAPTER II

SINGLE-SPINDLE AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINES

AUTOMATIC screw machines, in common with all machines

of the self-acting type, are naturally more complicated than
those types which require a certain amount of hand-manipula-
tion, and, in order to understand the methods of adjusting
and using such machines, it is essential to know just how the
automatic action is obtained. While the automatic screw
machines made by different manufacturers all differ in regard
to details of design, the general principleupon which machines
of the same class operate is practically the same in each case.
The different methods of controlling the various movements and
adjustments for the tools, however, differ considerably on some
machines, and a study of these important features will prove of
value to anyone desiring a knowledge of screw-machine con-
struction and operation. In this chapter, representative types
of single-spindle automatic screw machines are described.
Other machines of the multiple-spindle design are referred to
in the following chapter.
Brown & Sharpe Automatic Screw Machines. The auto-
matic screw machine shown in Fig. i is made by the Brown &
Sharpe Mfg. Co. and is intended for comparatively small
work. The bar of stock to be operated upon is inserted through
the hollow spindle of the machine. This spindle is driven from
an overhead countershaft by means of open and cross belts
operating on the friction pulleys A and B. When one pulley
is engaged by the clutch, a forward movement for turning

operations is obtained, and a reverse movement for backing

off a die when threading is secured when the other pulley is

engaged. For ordinary operations, the necessary tools are

held in the turret / and on front and rear cross-slides at E.
ii
12 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

J L

F
 BROWN & SHARPE SCREW MACHINE 13

There are six holes in the turret and all or part of these holes

may contain tools, the number depending, of course, upon the

extent of the operations. A stop for regulating the distance
that the stock is fed through the spindle after each finished part
is severed from the bar is held in the turret and, in addition,
4

such tools as a hollow a box-tool, a threading die, etc.

mill,
In case a forming operation is necessary, the forming tool is
held on one cross-slide and the cutting-off tool on the other.
All feeds and other movements of the machine, except the
rotation of the spindle, are derived from the feed-shaft O3

(Fig. 2) at the rear of the machine, which, in turn, is driven by

a belt from an overhead countershaft operating on pulley C.
All of the operations are timed or regulated from camshafts
on the front and end of the bed. These shafts are driven from
the constant-speed feed-shaft 3 at the rear, through a worm-
wheel and change-gears H
located at the end of the bed. By
means these change-gears, the duration of the cycle of
of

operations, or the length of time required to make one piece,

is positively regulated. The operations of feeding the stock,
reversing the spindle, and indexing the turret are regulated
by trip dogs or carriers on the camshaft D at the front of the
machine, the adjustment of the dogs serving to accurately
time the successive operations. These dogs operate levers
which extend through the machine bed to the rear shaft Oa,
where they connect with and operate positive clutches at the
right time. The tripping of a lever by a dog engages the cor-
responding clutch, thus causing gears or a face-cam to revolve
with the feed-shaft 3 In this way, motion is obtained for
.

performing a certain operation, and then the clutch auto-

matically releases. If more work is to be done than can.be per-
formed by a single operation, such as feeding extra lengths
of stock or passing empty holes in the turret, several dogs or
a special dog can be used so that the same operation is

performed several times in rapid succession.

The turret-slide and cross-slides are fed to the work by the
action of diskcams and levers, each slide having a separate
cam or three cams in all. One, two, or sometimes three pieces
SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS
 BROWN & SHARPE SCREW MACHINE 15

of work are completed in one revolution of a cam so that the

various movements of one of the slides, in making a particular
piece, are laid out as curves around the cam; the curves for
one piece include the whole circumference, whereas for two or
three pieces they are repeated. Special cams are required
for each job, and these must be laid out in accordance with the
nature of the work, as described in Chapter VII.
Stock-feeding and Chuck-operating Mechanism. The
stock is automatically advanced through the spindle after
successive parts have been formed and cut off in the machine
shown in Fig. i, by means of a feed-tube extending through
the spindle. This feed-tube has spring-feeding fingers that are
located at the rear of the collet chuck. The tube may be
withdrawn and the fingers readily changed for different sizes
of stock. The motion for feeding the stock is derived from
cam E 2 (Fig. i). This cam actuates a
through a lever slide

that engages a block that may be adjusted by crank (Fig. 2) N

for varying the feeding movement. The feed-tube is connected
to the slide by means of a latch that may be raised, thus allow-
ing the feed to remain idle or the tube to be withdrawn.
The opening and closing of the collet is controlled by another
cam surface on cam E 2. The action of this cam is controlled

by dogs on drum K
which serve to engage or disengage a clutch
through which the cam is rotated. When the chuck is closed
upon the stock, the feeding fingers are withdrawn preparatory
to the next forward feeding movement. The feeding mecha-
nism derives its motion from the rear shaft 3 (Fig. 2) through
spur gearing at F2 .

Operation of the Cross-slides. The front and rear cross-

slides are independent and may be used together or separately.
They are operated by disk or plate cams C/ 2 and F2 mounted
on the front camshaft D, Fig. i. The front cross-slide is oper-
ated by segment lever Wz, Fig. 3, the teeth of which mesh with
rack F 2. This rack is threaded on one end and has an adjust-
ing nut A 3 which is used for changing the position of the cross-
slide relative to the center of the spindle. The rear cross-slide
is operated through a double lever or segment gear B 3) which
i6 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

connects with a rack, as the illustration shows. The cross-

slides are made to travel to exactly the same point by set-screws
3, which come into contact with stops Z)3 The cross-slide .

tools are circular in form and are attached to suitable holders

by screw 1 3.

Operation of the Turret-slide. The turret 7, Fig. i,

which carries the end-working tools, is mounted in a vertical

Mfahtnery

Fig. 3. Partial Section of No. Machine showing Mechanism for Operating

Cross-slides

plane so that it rotates about a horizontal axis. This position

allows the tools to work closely in between the cross-slide
tools with a minimum of overhang, and the idle tools do not
interfere with the cross-slide. The turret-slide is mounted
directly on the machine bed and the turret is rotated or in-
dexed to bring the different tools into the working position,
by means of hardened roll C4 (Fig. 4) attached to disk D 4-

This roll engages radial grooves in the disk E 4 . The disk D

 BROWN & SHARPE SCREW MACHINE
is driven from the rear driving shaft through spur and helical
gearing, and makes six revolutions for every revolution of the
turret.
The turret is locked in position by the hardened taper
plug / 4 which is operated by latch L 4, controlled by a cam MI

ftl J
"" I ' I ^V -^
-Jj'"-,i ji| -i |
[

Cli----^f | nri__~|ipj'~ril I n LJJ J n\l

REAR DRIVING SHAFT

Machinery

Fig. 4. Plan and Rear Elevation of Turret-slide and its Operating Mechanism

on the end The slide G carrying the turret re-

of shaft _V 4 .

ceives its forward movement through a "lead cam" which

transmits motion through the segment lever O 4 The shaft .

carrying the lead cam is driven from the rear driving shaft
through worm and spur gearing. The turret-slide is returned
by a coil spring S 4 The rapid return and advance of the
.

turret-slide and the indexing of the turret are controlled in-

l8 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

dependency of the lead cam by a crank TF 4 which is connected

eccentrically to the turret revolving shaft F 4 This crank
.

indexes the turret while the roll on the bell crank lever O 4 is
passing from the highest point of the lead cam to the starting
point of the lobe for the next cut. Crank W
\ is driven from
the rear driving shaft by a positive clutch, the latter being
operated by tripping levers and dogs on drum /, Fig. i.
Automatic Spindle Speed Changes. The speed changes
for the spindle aremade by shifting a belt on cone-pulleys
forming part of the overhead works. For each change so
obtained on the two larger machines, two spindle speeds are
available, one of which is fast and one slow. The change is
made automatically and is controlled by an adjustable trip
dog. This automatic change of speed is of especial value in
threading, one speed being employed for turning and a slower
speed for cutting the thread.
Operation of the Deflector. In order to separate the chips
and from the finished parts which are cut off from the bar,
oil

a deflector is used. This deflector is located on the end of a

lever that is actuated by a cam-block mounted on the drum K,

Fig. i. Before the finished part is severed, this cam-block

causes the deflector to move under the chute of the machine
so that, when the work falls, it strikes the deflector and enters
a suitable receptacle, instead of falling into the pan containing
the chips.
Reversal of Spindle for Threading. The reversal of the
spindle for backing off a die or removing a tap from a hole
is obtained by means of a clutch mechanism, located between
the two belt pulleys A and B, which revolve in opposite direc-
tions. The clutch bodies, which are conical, are forced into
conical seats in the pulleys by a sliding collar located between
the clutch bodies on the spindle. This collar is operated by
a lever and cam beneath the spindle. On the No. oo machine,
the spindle is reversed by means of a spring plunger F, Fig. 2,
and on the Nos. o and 2 machines, by a cam A 2 The spring .

plunger F, when released, instantly engages the cone of the

clutch with pulley A, thus rotating the spindle backward.
CLEVELAND AUTOMATIC
20 SINGLE- SPINDLE DESIGNS

To run forward, the clutch is shifted by the cam A 2 to engage

,

pulley B, which revolves in the opposite direction. This cam

A 2 is actuated by clutch B 2 which is operated by a lever that
is controlled by a dog held on drum L on the front camshaft.
Several sets of trip dogs can be used on the drum or carrier
for reversing the spindle, when more than one thread is desired
on a piece. The carrier for controlling the reverse movement
may be disconnected by pulling out a knob, thus allowing it
to remain idle when work is to be done which does not require

threading.
The Cleveland Automatic Machine. The automatic screw
machines which were originally designed for making small
screws and later for miscellaneous small parts have led to the
development of automatic machines capable of turning an
endless variety of comparatively large and heavy parts. One
of the Cleveland automatic machines is shown in Figs. 5 and 6.
This particular machine will operate on bar stock 3! inches
in diameter, and similar designs are built in various sizes,
.

one of which has a chuck capacity of yf inches.

In addition to the full automatic type shown in Figs. 5 and
"
6, which is known as Model A," the Cleveland automatic
is also built in several other types. The "full automatic"
machine is provided with a turret having five holes, on sizes
from f to 2\ inches, inclusive, and six holes on the machines
of greater capacities. The next type of machine is the plain
automatic, known as "Model B." This machine has no
turret, but is provided with one tool spindle which can be
used for holding a box-tool, drill, or similar tools. The range
of this machine can be greatly increased by the addition of

simple attachments on the cross-slides and tool spindle. The

Model C machine is of the full automatic type and is halfway
between Models A
and B. It is provided with only three
holes in the turret and resembles Model B in construction.
"
The type of machine known as Model D " is similar to Model
A, but is built to handle castings, forgings, etc., and is semi-
automatic in its operation. The double-spindle, plain auto-
matic is a modification of the plain machine and is provided
CLEVELAND AUTOMATIC 21
22 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

with two opposing work-spindles located in a parallel line and

with the chuck mechanism of both heads acting simultane-
ously. This machine is particularly adapted for finishing both
ends of a piece of work, thus obviating the necessity of a second
operation to complete the part.
Spindle Driving Mechanism. The work-spindle A of the
machine shown in Figs. 5 and 6 is driven from the overhead
countershaft by means of two pulleys, B and C, which trans-
mit motion to the spindle through gearing. Between the pul-
leys B and C there is a loose or idler pulley. The outer pulleys
B and C may both be rotated in one direction, thus giving two
speeds, or one may be given a reverse movement for threading
operations. The from one pulley
shifting of the driving belt
to another is effected by a belt shifter V. The shifting device
is operated by means of cam which are
fingers 7i (see Fig. 8)
carried on the rear shaft E
and are adjustable. As the shaft
rotates, these fingers alternately come into contact* with spring-
operated plungers which are depressed and serve to withdraw
a wedge from a slot in a plate located below the shifting device.
When the wedge is withdrawn from one slot in the plate, the
shifter is thrown so that the wedge engages the next slot,
thus shifting the belt or belts, as the case may be. There are
different combinations of these shifter arms for various types
of belt drives.

Chuck-operating Mechanism. The chuck FI, Fig. 7, is

of the push type and is held in the cap GI screwed onto the
nose of the work-spindle. It is operated by a sleeve HI that
receives motion from the arm D (see also Fig. 9). A detail
of this arm is shown in Fig. 10, which illustrates its adjustable
features. This arm provided with adjustable cams m n,
is t

and o. The cam m is the chuck-opening cam, n the safety cam,

and o the chuck-closing cam which is cast integral with the
arm D. Cams m and n are on one casting and are adjustable
on the arm D, being held in the desired position by three clamp-
ing screws fitting in elongated slots. There are also additional
tapped holes in the arm allowing for further adjustment.
When smooth stock is being held in the chuck, the adjust-
CLEVELAND AUTOMATIC
 CLEVELAND AUTOMATIC

able cams m and n are set tightly up against cam o, thus giving
a quick closing and opening action to the chuck and allow-
ing a short space of time for feeding the stock. When rough
bar stock is being handled, and for magazine work, it is neces-
sary to keep the chuck open much longer; for this action the
cams m and n are sepa-
rated from cam o in order

to allow additional time.

Theaction of closing
the chuck is as follows:
As arm D rotates, cam
m comes in contact with
roll Mi, Fig. 7, held on
the fulcrumed yoke Ni.
This yoke carries two
rolls that work in a cir-

cular groove cut in sleeve

Oi. As the cam forces
this sleeve away from
the chuck, the sleeve
acts upon two fingers
PI which bear against the FiS- 10 - Adjustable Cam for Con-
trolling Operation of Chuck
rear end of the chuck-

closing sleeve HI. As cam 0, Fig. 10, comes into action, it

reverses the operation of yoke Oi and removes the pressure
from the sleeve Hi, allowing the chuck to open, due to spring
tension.

Stock-feeding Mechanism. The bar stock is fed through

the spindle by a spring finger Ji (Fig. 7) screwed into the front
end of the tube KI, the rear end of which is provided with a
grooved collar LI. Fitting in this grooved collar is a forked
lever G which is carried on the rod RI (Fig. 6). The movement
of forked lever G is controlled by a cam H, which contacts
with a held on bracket U\ clamped to rod RI. Adjust-
roll

ment for length of feed is controlled by shifting the position

of the bracket U\ along rod RI, and the timing is effected by
shifting the cam H around the shaft E. An open-wound
26 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

coil spring serves to keep the forked arm G and its sliding
bracket up against a stationary bracket when the rod R\ is

not acted upon by the cam. For double feeding, a drum is

provided carrying two cams, allowing for feeding the stock

twice for every revolution of the camshaft.
Turret and Turret-slide. The turret is of the drum type
and is carried on shaft A2 (Fig. n) that is parallel with the
work-spindle. The turret on the 3j-inch machine accommo-
dates six tools which are held by two clamping bolts each, in
the holes in the front end of the turret, and are located con-

centrically with the axis of the work-spindle. The turret / is

moved forward for cutting and backward for withdrawing the
tools, by a cam-drum K which is free to rotate on shaft A 2
and carries segment cams B 2 fastened to its periphery. These
cams work against a roller which is held on a stud driven into
a hole in the base of the machine. As the cam-drum is rotated
by means of gearing, the engagement of the inclined cam
grooves or surfaces with the fixed roller cause the drum and
turret to move in the direction of their axes, the turret moving
in a straight line or without rotation, except when indexing.
Cast integral with drum K is a spur gear D 2 which rotates it.

Gear D2 engages pinion E 2 ,

beneath it, which, in turn, is ro-
tated at different speeds for the cutting and idle movements
of the machine by a mechanism to be described later.
The turret is indexed upon its back stroke by means of a
rod Hheld adjustably by locking nuts to a spur gear forming
2

part of the feeding mechanism. This rod comes into contact

with hardened pins held in the rear face of the turret. Before
the turret can be turned around, however, it is necessary to

disengage 'a locking wedge from a slot in the circumference of

the turret. done by means of a cam-block held on the
This is

flange of drum K. The indexing can be effected by hand by

simply depressing a lever, which has the same action on the
locking wedge as the cam-block held upon the drum K. The
turret head is mounted on the bed of the machine and can be

adjusted to suit various lengths of work and tools held in the

turret. The turret is held to the base of the machine by means
CLEVELAND AUTOMATIC
28 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

of bolts. A scale fastened to the base of the machine and a

pointer on the turret-slide enable the operator to obtain the
same setting of the turret head when setting up the machine
for a part which has been machined previously.
Operation of the Cross-slide. On the Cleveland auto-
matic screw machine, as regularly equipped, the cross-slide
for holding both the rear and front cutting tools consists of
one casting, but a double cross-slide can be supplied, when
desired. The cross-slide is actuated by means of a fulcrum
lever T (Fig. n), which derives motion from cams 3 on the K
drum U carried on the rear shaft E. The flange of this drum
is numbered so that the position of the various cams can be
recorded on a lay-out card to facilitate re-setting the work.
The cross-slide is provided with an adjustable stop-screw
so that accurately formed work can be obtained. It is also
provided with adjustable gibs to compensate for wear. The
position of the cross-slide relative to the axis of the spindle is
controlled by regulating nuts on the connecting-rod fastened
to the rear of the slide.
Variable Feeding Mechanism. As the cam-drum K
(Fig. n) is rotated, the turret is moved towards the spindle
for bringing the tools into contact with the work, and then
backward withdrawing the tools. This cam-drum is ro-
for
tated through gearing at a predetermined rate of speed which
is controlled by a series of
adjustable cams that automatically
vary the rate of the turret feeding movement according to the
nature of the work. Motion for this variable feeding mecha-
nism is derived from an overhead countershaft by a belt operat-
ing on pulley N, which is keyed to an extension of the friction
disk L. When a fast movement is required, in order to reduce
the non-cutting or idle period to a minimum, a sliding clutch
is engaged with
pulley N, so that the drive is direct to the worm
gearing at the rear of the turret, which transmits motion to
the cam-drum K
through a spur gear, pinion E 2 and the
gear D% forming part of the cam-drum. This clutch is oper-
ated by means of levers that engage dogs F 2 which are adjust-
ably mounted on the rear face of the regulating drum 3 .
 CLEVELAND AUTOMATIC 29

When the turret is to be moved at its slow or cutting speed

for feeding the tools forward, the clutch is shifted in the oppo-

site direction by dogs Vz so that it engages teeth on the

extended hub of a pinion which forms the central member of

a planetary gear mechanism. The drive from belt pulley N
to the worm gearing at the rear of the cam-drum is then
through friction disks L and M
and a planetary reduction
gearing which transmits motion to the worm-shaft and is

Fig. 12. Detailed View of Automatic Feed-regulating Mechanism

located adjacent to the worm-wheel, as the illustration shows.

This change from fast to slow speed, or vice versa, can also be
controlled by a handle at the front of the machine.
The Feed-regulating Drum. One of the interesting
features of the Cleveland machine is the regulating drum
which is used for securing independent feeds for each tool
in the turret and on the cross-slide. This regulation is secured
by means of a series of adjustable cams mounted upon the

periphery of the regulating drum 3 Fig. u. By changing

,

the position of these cams, any desired feed may be secured

30 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

for each tool. As each cam comes into contact with lever Q,
the position of the roll between friction disks L and is M
changed with reference to the center of the disks, so that the
speed is either increased or decreased. The bell crank lever
Q (Fig. 12) has a segment gear at its outer end the teeth of
which mesh with the sliding sleeve R on the rod Fs This .

rod is held in a bracket attached to the machine. As sleeve R

is moved up and down by the action of lever Q, the position
of the roll 2 between the two friction disks is changed, thus
varying the speed. Variations in the position of the friction
roll are transmitted to the pointer of the indicator dial Gs,

so that the positions of the different regulating cams for

any given job can readily be duplicated, provided their re-

spective positions, as shown by the indicator dial, have been
properly recorded. With this arrangement, a wide range of
feeds for the turret and cross-slide tools is easily obtained
and the feed may also be varied after the machine has been
set up for a given job, provided a higher rate is considered
essential to economical production.

Gridley Single-spindle Automatic. The Gridley single-

spindle automatic shown in Fig. 13 (built by the Windsor
Machine Co.) is designed for handling straight bars of stock
up and including i\ inches in diameter, and it will feed
to

lengths through the chuck up to 13! inches. These machines

are also made, at the present time, in two larger sizes for han-

dling bars of stock 3! and 4! inches in diameter, respectively.

The spindle A, through which the bar of stock is inserted, is
rotated from a parallel shaft at the rear to which it is geared.
This rear driving shaft may either be belt-driven or motor-
driven. The various end-working tools required are attached
to slides B on the turret. Forming tools may be held on slide
C and a cutting-off tool on arm D. The movements of these
tools and other parts the machine requiring automatic
of

operation are controlled by cams mounted on the cam-drums

E and F.
The Turret. The turret of the machine shown in Fig. 13
does not move axially, but it is indexed or rotated part of
GRIDLEY AUTOMATIC 3 1
32 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

a revolution after each successive operation has been per-

formed, in order to locate the various tools attached to it in
the working position. The tool-slides B are given the neces-

sary feeding movement. The axis of the turret

is parallel

with that of the spindle, but it is lower than the spindle, so

that the tools attached to the different slides of the turret
willbe in alignment with the spindle when indexed to the
upper position. This turret revolves in bearings located in
both ends of the main frame or headstock of the machine.
The turret is revolved by a worm which has an intermittent
movement and engages a worm-wheel located between the
turret bearings. The machine can be so adjusted that the
turret stops only at the tool positions required and skips any
of the regular locations, if it is not necessary to use all of the
tool-slides.
The turret is rigidly held in its different positions by a locking
pin which engages steel plates set in the periphery of a locking
disk attached to the turret.
Tool-slides on Turret. The slides which hold the end-
working tools are gibbed to the square end of the turret cast-
ing that extends beyond the frame of the machine. These
slides are moved toward and away from the chuck by suit-
able cams attached cam-drum E. The
to the longitudinal
movement is transmitted from the feed cam-drum to whatever
tool-slide is in the working position, by means draw-bar of

G (Fig. 14) which extends through the center of the turret

and has a roll for engaging the cam on one end and is con-
nected to a tool-slide at the other. When a tool-slide comes
around to the working position, a pin P, attached to the slide,
engages a notch in a collar attached to shaft G. When the
turret indexes, this pin moves out of the notch and the pin on
the next successive tool-slide enters the notch.
The tool-slides are provided with T-slots throughout their
length, so that the tool-holders can be secured to them at
any point, or several tools may be attached to the same slide,
if necessary, one being back of the other. Between the tool-
slides or at the corners of the turret, accessories to the tools
 GRIDLEY AUTOMATIC 33

may be applied, such as drill-supports, stops for self-opening

dies, taper guides, etc., or a stop for the stock when all of the
tool-slides are required for tools. This method of mounting
the tools on slides enables each tool to be given a rigid support.
Operation of Forming and Cutting-off Tools. The forming
slideC at the front of the machine, and the cutting-off tool
held by the swinging arm D at the rear, are operated inde-

pendently of each other. As the back-rests in the turners

held on the turret are so located as to take the thrust of the

Machinery

Fig. 14. Sectional View showing Method of Supporting Turret and Operating
Tool-slides

forming tool, turning and forming operations can be performed

at the same time, or the turner may be used as a support for
the work when the forming tool is in action.
Arrangement of Cams. The camshaft carries the feed
cam-drum E and the operating cam-drum F. The cam H on
drum through the medium of draw-bar G extending through
,

the machine, imparts a forward feeding movement to the tool-

slides; cam / controls the return movement. Three feed

cams are regularly furnished with the machine. The inclina-
tion of these cams vary so that they give fine, medium, and
coarse feeds; they may readily be located anywhere on the
34 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS
 CHICAGO AUTOMATIC 35

cam-drum, as they are held in position by two cap-screws.

The camshaft has a rapid and a slow movement. The cams
for operating the high-speed lever K which controls the rapid
and slow movements of the camshaft are held in a circular
T-slot in the left-hand edge of the operating cam-drum F.
A set of cams L, for operating the belt shippers, is also at-
tached to this cam-drum. The dogs for operating the turret-
revolving mechanism at the proper time are held in a circular
T-slot extending around the right-hand edge of cam-drum F.
The cams for operating the forming slide C and the cutting-off
arm Dare attached to disk M. The forming-slide cam is lo-
cated on one side of the disk and the cutting-off cam on the
other side. These cams are held in place by screws, so that
they can readily be changed. The cams for opening and clos-

ing the spindle chuck are located at N, and the movement for
feeding the stock through the spindle is derived from cam 0.
Application of Motor Drive. When the Gridley automatic
is motor-driven, two variable-speed motors are employed,
each having its own controller, resistance, etc. One motor
drives the spindle while the other drives the feeding mecha-

nism, so that the cutting speed and the feed are independently
controlled. The feed or speed may be varied automatically
as the controllers for each motor are operated by cams on the

operating cam-drum.
The Chicago Automatic Screw Machine. The single-
spindle automatic screw machine shown in Fig. 15 (built by
the Chicago Automatic Machine Co.) is driven by a single
belt from the lineshafting direct to tight and loose pulleys at
M on the rear shaft of the machine. The lever R controls
the position of the belt. The shaft on which the pulleys are
mounted drives the main drive shaft N through two change-
gears, which are enclosed in the case on the left-hand end of
the machine. The work-spindle is driven from this main drive
shaft through gearing having a ratio of 5 to 8, and these gears
are never changed. The main drive shaft extends the entire

length of the machine and through gearing, drives the mecha-

nism for rotating and indexing the turret, operating the cam-
36 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

shaft, and, through a separate spindle and gear, the threading

mechanism.
Chuck Feeding Mechanism. The spindle of the machine
is provided with the usual spring chuck and friction feeding
finger. This mechanism is operated by cams on drum A.
Segment B pulls the feeding tube back and, when the chuck
isopened by the segment C, the spring D forces the stock for-
ward against the stop. The chuck is then closed by the regular
type of chuck-closing fingers. In setting-up the machine on
a new job, considerable saving in stock can be effected by pull-
ing lever E up. This removes roll F from the path of the seg-
ment and prevents the chuck from opening and the stock from
feeding. This enables the operator to set-up all the tools on
one piece without spoiling a large number of parts before the
required size and shape is obtained.
Turret Mechanism. The turret J derives its indexing
movement from the main drive shaft N through a train of
gears and a which is operated at the proper
friction clutch,
time by circular segments or cams attached to the rear side of
index plate P. These segments control the engagement of
the friction clutch when the turret has been withdrawn and,
in this way, the turret is rotated far enough to locate the next
successive tool opposite the work-spindle. In many cases,
tools are not needed in some of the holes in the turret and
these empty holes can be skipped in indexing, by attaching

long circular segments to the side of the index plate. If only

two tools were used, there should be two long circular segments
on the index plate, whereas, if three tools were used, there
should be two short segments and one long one, and so on.
After the turret approximately located by the indexing
is

mechanism, accurately aligned by a guide which engages

it is

the notches in the index plate P when the turret is advanced

to the working position. When setting-up the machine, the
turret can readily be indexed by means of lever H
which serves
to engage the clutch at the rear of the machine.
The Camshaft. The camshaft is driven from shaft N
through a train of gears at the right-hand end of the machine,
 CHICAGO AUTOMATIC 37

these gears being changed in accordance with the speed re-

quired as determined by the number of spindle revolutions

necessary to complete a series of operations. There are fifty
divisionsaround the circumference of the cam, marked by rows
of tapped holes one inch apart, so that the circumference of
the cam is 50 inches. In order to illustrate how the lengths of
the cams for the different tools are determined, assume that
a piece requires a milling operation for a length of one inch.
With a feed of 0.005 inch, this will require about 200 revolu-
tions (i -r- 0.005 = 200) and, in the same way, the number
of spindle revolutions for the other operations is obtained.
If the total number for a complete series of operations were,

say, 1040, this number divided by 50 (number of divisions on

the cam) equals approximately 21, which represents the num-
ber of spindle revolutions for every inch on the cam circum-
ference. By dividing the number of spindle revolutions for
the milling operation, or 200 by 21, the result equals the length
of the segment on the cam for this particular operation; thus
200 -T- 21 = 9! inches, approximately. As the cut is to be one
inch long, the segment should have a lead or rise of about lyV
inch. The lengths of other segments for different operations
can be determined in the same way. The return segments
for the turret are always the same, although their position may
have to be changed for different operations.
The Cross-slides. The machine shown
cross-slides of the
in Fig. 15 are operated independently by plates or cams at-
tached to drum K. These cams impart motion to the cross-
slides through fulcrumed levers which are connected at their
lower ends by means of a spring L that keeps the rolls in con-
tact with the cams. These cams for controlling the movements
of the forming and cutting-off tools do not require much

adjustment, although sometimes a longer or shorter cam is

required. The cross-slides are provided with adjusting screws
for setting the tools in the correct position relative to the
work.
Method of Cutting Threads. For threading operations,
a central spindle is used, which is driven directly by gearing.
38 SINGLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

On the i^-inch machine, this gearing is so arranged that, for

every 100 revolutions of the spindle, the tap or die will make
128 revolutions, so that 28 threads will be cut irrespective of
the pitch of the thread for every 100 revolutions of the spindle.
If the spindle makes 50 revolutions, 14 threads will be cut, or
7 threads for every 25 revolutions of the spindle. As the
spindle always runs backwards, and since the threading die
runs faster than the spindle, it is evident that the variation
in speed is utilized for cutting the thread. Whenever a thread
has been cut to the required length and the turret starts to
withdraw the die, the driving pins of the die-holder are dis-
engaged and then the die-holder is held stationary by the
engagement of a clutch, thus backing the die off of the thread.
Feeding Movements for Tools. The feeds recommended
for ordinary work on this machine are as follows: When

turning machine steel with box-tools, the feed may vary

from 0.004 to o.oio inch for roughing, and, for finishing, from
0.002 to 0.006 inch per revolution of the work. For drills less
than | inch in diameter, the feeds may vary from 0.002 to 0.006
inch, and, for drills over f inch in diameter, from 0.006 to 0.015
inch per revolution. For forming tools, the feeds may vary
from 0.00025 to 0.004 inch, the amount depending upon
the width of the forming tool and the diameter of the stock
being formed. Cut ting-off tools may be given a feed of from
0.002 to 0.004 inch per revolution. When operating on brass
stock, the feeds previously given may be doubled.
 CHAPTER III

MULTIPLE-SPINDLE AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINES

THE multiple-spindle screw machine represents a develop-

ment of the single-spindle type and was designed primarily
to increase production, by grouping several work-spindles
together so that separate bars of stock one in each spindle
- could be With this ar-
operated upon simultaneously.
rangement, when there are several end-working tools, such as
a box-tool, a drill, a reamer, and a threading die, all of these
tools operate on different bars of stock as the turret moves
forward, instead of indexing first one tool and then another to
the working position, as is necessary when all the operations
are performed successively upon the end of a single bar of stock.
The advantage of the multiple-operation method, as previ-
ously explained, is that the time required for producing a part
is equivalent to the longest single machining operation plus
the non-cutting period necessary for advancing the tools to
the work, withdrawing them, and indexing the spindle carrier,
whereas, with a single-spindle machine, the production time
equals the total time for all of the operations plus the idle or
non-cutting period.
Acme Automatic Screw Machine. The National- Acme
automatic multiple-spindle screw machine shown in Fig. i
illustrates the general principle governing the construction
and operation of screw machines The machine
of this class.
has four parallel work-spindles A
which are equally spaced
t

and equidistant from the axis of the cylindrical head in which

the spindles are mounted. Each spindle contains a bar of
stock when the machine is in operation, and the bar, as it
rotates with the spindle, is operated upon by tools held in
an opposing tool-slide B and also upon cross- or side-working
tool-slides C. A tool from the side and one from the end may
39
MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS
 NATIONAL- ACME SCREW MACHINE 41

work together on each bar, and all of the tools engage the stock
at practically the same time.
When the tools are all withdrawn, the cylinder contain-
ing the work-spindle is indexed or revolved far enough to
locate each spindle opposite the next successive set of tools
which perform additional operations. When each bar reaches
the last tool or set of tools in the series, the completed part is
severed from the bar, which is then automatically moved out-
ward through the spindle far enough for turning another piece.
With this arrangement, a part is finished each time the spindle
head indexes one-quarter of a revolution.
Order of Operations. With the machine illustrated in

Fig. i, there are eight standard tool positions, four being

from the side and four from the end, thus allowing eight inde-
pendent tools to be used, if necessary. The stop which engages
the feeding movement of the stock does not occupy a tool
position. Assuming that eight operations were required, the
sequence or order in which the various tools are presented to
the work would be about as follows :

After the preceding piece is cut off in the fourth position,

a new length of stock is fed forward, the feeding movement
occurring during the indexing from the fourth to the first
position, or with the larger type of machine in the fourth
position, as the indexing is being completed. The cams next
bring forward one tool from the side (usually a forming tool)
and also a tool from the end, which may be a box-tool, drill,
or tool for facing, countersinking, etc. The bar is then in-
dexed to the second position, where it may be operated upon
by a shaving tool in the front top slide, or tools for light form-

ing, knurling, or thread rolling; at the same time, tools in

the main slide may be used for milling, drilling, reaming,

countersinking, facing, etc. The bar is next indexed to the

third position, or opposite the rear top slide, which may carry
a knurling tool, a thread-rolling tool, or one for a forming
or shaving operation. The end tool may drill, ream, counter-
bore, tap a hole, or cut an external thread. In addition, at-
tachments are frequently used in this third position for milling
 Fig. 2. Spindle-driving and Stock-feeding Mechanism

Fig. 3. Main Tool-slide and End-working Tool-holding Spindles

 NATIONAL-ACME SCREW MACHINE 43

from the end, and for drilling from the side or milling from the
side, etc. The use of these attachments is made possible be-
cause the work-spindle can be stopped in this position. In
the fourth position, opposite the rear horizontal slide, the
end tools may countersink, counterbore, drill, etc., whereas
the cross-slide may be used for finish-forming, after which
the finished part is severed from the bar.
The previously referred to merely indicate,
operations
in a generalway, how the tool equipment may be used. The
order of the operations and the tools used depend upon the
conditions governing each case. For instance, knurling can
be done in thefirst and fourth positions from the side, if neces-

sary, orfrom any of the end positions. Threading can some-

times be done in the second position. Moreover, threads can
be rolled in the fourth position, necessary, the order being
if

varied according to the requirements of the work.

Spindle-driving Mechanism. The four work-spindles of
the machine shown in Fig. i are driven by gears meshing
with a central gear on the driving shaft D which derives its
motion from the belt pulley E and extends through the main
tool-slide and spindle head
to the central driving gear. These

spindle gears are not attached directly to the spindles but are
driven through friction clutches which permit each spindle
to be stopped at the third position in case a threading opera-
tion is necessary. The exact arrangement of the spindle-
driving mechanism is shown more clearly in the detail view,
Fig. 2. In this illustration, the shaft HI corresponds to the
main driving shaft D in Fig. i. The spur gears /i, which are
driven from the central shaft, are free to rotate on bronze
bushings and are provided with taper projections or shoulders
which form the internal member of a friction driving clutch.
The other member of this driving clutch consists of a tapering

cup KI, which is keyed to a sleeve that is keyed to the spindle.

The cup is held into engagement with the friction gear I\
by coil springs L 3 The way in which these friction clutches
.

are utilized in connection with threading operations will be

described later.
44 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

The Camshaft. There is only one on the

camshaft
machine illustrated in Fig.i, and this is under the bed and
carries all of the operating cams for controlling the move-
ments of the various slides, and also a segment gear for

indexing the spindle head. This shaft carries the two main

Machinery

Fig. 4. End View of Machine showing Speed-changing Mechanism for

Camshaft

cam-drums F and G. Attached to drum F cams for

are the

operating the stock-feeding, chuck-closing, and opening mecha-

nisms, and also the dogs for operating the friction clutches
which engage or disengage the work-spindles from their driving
gears. On drum G are cams for operating the main tool-slide,
and, on some machines, a thread-starting mechanism. This
camshaft makes four complete revolutions to one revolution of
 NATIONAL-ACME SCREW MACHINE 45

the spindle head, and a complete range of speeds is provided

by means of change-gears.
Camshaft Speed-changing Mechanism. The upper or
main driving shaft D, Fig. i, which drives the four work-
spindles of the machine, transmits motion to the camshaft
beneath the bed through the mechanism illustrated in Fig. 4,
which enables the camshaft to be rotated at a suitable speed.
The pulley U$ (which corresponds to pulley E, Fig. i) is driven
from a constant-speed countershaft. This pulley normally
runs free on the driving shaft, but can be secured to it for
driving direct when necessary. Attached to the inner hub of
this belt pulley, there is a bevel gear V 5) which meshes with
another bevel gear on the shaft W^ which transmits motion
to the horizontal shaft 5through additional bevel gearing.
(On some of these machines, spiral gears are used instead of
bevel gears.) From this point, motion is transmitted to the
camshaft by means of change gearing, which is selected in
accordance with the speed required. The sleeve A 6 of this
clutch keyed to the horizontal shaft
is 5, and sleeve B&
passes through the bearing in the frame and forms a part of
a sprocket and clutch at C&. The shaft F 5 is also continued
through the frame and has a washer E$ keyed to its outer
end. ,

The gear of the four change-gears is keyed to this

first

washer and meshes with a larger gear on the stud. The mo-
tion then transmitted through two other gears to a clutch
is

of which the sprocket C 6 forms a part. Motion is further

transmitted to the camshaft, when the tools are at work,
by means of a chain which drives another sprocket that is
connected to a worm-shaft. This worm-shaft, in turn, drives
a worm-wheel which is mounted upon the right-hand end of
the camshaft of the machine as shown in Fig. i. The sprocket
on the worm-shaft may be disengaged from the shaft by means
of a clutch controlledby a hand lever. The sprocket is pro-
vided with a safety device in the form of two fiber collars

which are kept into frictional contact by a nut. This nut is

tightened sufficiently to drive the worm-shaft when the ma-
46 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

chine operating under normal conditions, but, in case of

is

unusual strain, slippage occurs, thus relieving the gearing and

other parts of the machine.
For the movements of the machine or those movements
idle
which occur when the tools are not in operation, as when feed-
ing the stock, indexing the cylinder, and moving the tools to
and from the work, the camshaft is driven at the "direct

SHAFT

Machinery

Fig. 5. Gears used in Obtaining Changes of Spindle Speed

speed" which is much faster than the regular cutting speed,

in order to reduce the idle period to a minimum. This direct
drive is obtained by shifting the sleeve A & to the left, so that

motion is transmitted to the sprocket C 6 direct from shaft Y 5)

instead of through the combination of change gearing. The

change of speed from the direct to the cutting speed, and
automatically by dogs on a cam-drum
vice versa, is controlled

located at the right-hand end of the camshaft. This cam

 NATIONAL-ACME SCREW MACHINE 47

transmits motion through suitable shafts and levers to the

sliding member A 6 of the friction clutch. The method of
determining the change-gears to use in any case is explained
in Chapter V, which deals with the adjustment and setting-up
of screw machines.

Speed of Main Driving Shaft. The speed of the main

driving shaft from which all other members of the machine
are driven can be varied by means of the gearing shown in

Fig. 5. The direct speed is obtained by first sliding the gears

A and B out of contact with gear C on the shaft, and the
gear D which is attached to the hub of the belt pulley U$,
or by removing the gears A and B entirely. Then a sleeve
that is keyed on the end of the main driving shaft is fastened
to the belt pulley by screws. In order to change from the
direct drive to the drive through the back-gears, the screws

binding the sleeve to the pulley are removed and motion is

transmitted through gears A, B, C, and Z>, which are selected
in accordance with the speed required and as shown by a table

accompanying the machine.

Main Tool-slide. The main tool-slide B (Fig. i) carries
the end-working tools and also the driving mechanism for the
threading spindle, as well as the cams which control the move-
ments of the two top slides C. The main slide is actuated by
cams directly beneath it which engage a roll attached to the
under side. These cams are set so as to bring the tools up to
the work quickly, feed them while cutting, at a comparatively
slow speed, and then withdraw the tools at a higher rate of
"
speed. As the roll travels over these fast-angle" cams, the
speed of the camshaft is increased considerably, and then
reduced to the cutting speed as soon as the tools are in the
working position.
A detail view of the main tool-slide is shown in Fig. 3,
where it is represented by the reference letter M%. There are
four tool spindles to correspond to the four work-spindles of
the machine. The spindle Nz is in what is known as the
"first" position; 2, in the "second" position; P 2, in the
"
"third"; and Q 2, in the fourth" position. The tool spindles
48 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

N 2 and Q 2 are held stationary in the main tool-slide, whereas

the spindles 2 and P 2 may be revolved. The spindle P 2

is the one used for threading as will be described
operations,
later. The spindle O2 is rotated when it is necessary to drill
a small hole in a comparatively large piece of work. Without
this feature the speed of the work-spindle would have to be

Fig. 6. Main Tool-slide removed, showing Arrangement of the Cross-slides on the

"Acme" Multiple-spindle Automatic Screw Machine

increased considerably in order to drill a small hole efficiently.

This tool-spindle is also used for holding a threading tool,
if necessary.
Operation of the Cross-slides. The lower horizontal cross-
slides shown at 5 and F& in the detailed view, Fig. 6, carry
the forming and cutting-off tools and are moved toward and
away from the work by levers, the lower ends of which are
engaged by cams on the disk K, Fig. i. These two slides are
 NATIONAL-ACME SCREW MACHINE 49

mounted on auxiliary slides G$ and 5 which are adjustable# ,

along the bed of the machine, which adjustment permits chang-

ing the positions of the forming and cutting-off tools relative
to the work, without adjusting the tools in the tool-holders.
The upper ends of the levers which operate these slides engage
slots on the under sides of the slides, and the lower ends are
provided with rollers which come into contact with the cam-
shoes. On some of the Acme machines, these operating levers
are drilled in two separate places for the pins upon which they
swing. This feature makes it possible to form deeper and cut
off largerdiameters of stock, when the levers are pivoted in
the lower holes, without using cams of greater throw. The
forming slide E 5 is provided with a stop and an adjustable
stop-screw, to check it at the end of the cam movement so
that duplicate parts may be turned to the same diameter.
The upper cross-slides P 5 and () 5 for operating in the second
and third positions, respectively, are similar in construction
to the lower slides, but are operated by strip cams which are
attached to and receive their motion from the main tool-
slide, as shown in Fig. 3. The angles of these strip cams are
governed by the rate of feed desired and the lead of the cam
operating the main tool-slide. The slide P& in Fig. 6 is equipped
with a shaving tool, whereas the slide Q b has a knurling tool.
Indexing Mechanism. The head in which the four spin-
dles is mounted is indexed a quarter turn between the suc-

cessive machining operations, by means of a segment gear H,

Fig. i, which engages teeth at the rear end of the spindle head.
This segment or fan gear, which is shown more clearly at J
in Fig. 7, is mounted on the main camshaft M of the machine,
which, as previously mentioned, makes four revolutions to
one complete turn of the cylinder. Provision for accurate
alignment of the spindles with the tools in the tool-slide is

made by means two plungers O and K. The plunger

of

drops into position first and is brought into contact with the
aligning screw N; then
the other plunger is forced in against K
a hardened steel taper plug. The bolt is withdrawn by an K
arm P fulcrumed at O and operated by a dog R on the cam-
 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

shaft. This dog should engage fully with the end of the arm
before the tooth of the segment gear J comes into contact
first

with the cylinder. In operation, as the bolt is withdrawn, K

the tooth in the segment gear J comes into contact with
first

the cylinder, thus rotating it and, at the same time, forcing

back the bolt O. Then, as the cylinder revolves around to the

Machinery

Fig. 7. View showing how the Cylinder is indexed and locked in Position

next position, the bolt is forced into the cavity in front of

the aligning screw N

by a coil spring. As the arm drops off
of the dog T, the bolt K is forced home by the coil spring V,
thus drawing the cylinder back and seating the aligning screw
^V firmly on the flat part of the bolt 0.

Operation of the Spindle Chuck. The opening and closing

of each spindle chuck at the point where the stock must be
 NATIONAL-ACME SCREW MACHINE 51

moved forward is controlled by a cam

Vi, on drum W\, Fig. 2,
which actuates lever Ui connecting with whatever sleeve on
the spindle is in the stock-feeding position. (The drum Wi
and U\ correspond with drum F and lever I, Fig. i.)
lever
The spring chucks are of the push type and are forced forward
for tightening, whenever a tapered collar TI is pushed back-
ward by the lever U\. The tapered collars T\ actuate the
Oi by means of the levers PI which are forced
steel sleeves
outward in the usual manner. In order to tighten the spring
chucks on the bars of stock, hollow set-screws in the collar S\
should first be unscrewed and then the collars are turned to the

right, which changes the fulcrum point of the chuck operat-

ing levers.
Feeding the Stock through the Spindle. The lever for

operating the stock-feeding tube also derives its motion from

a cam on the drum Wi t Fig. 2. This lever D 2 is pivoted at
its lower end and connects with a cam on the drum by means
of lever E 2 and rod F 2 The length of the
.
feeding movement
is controlled F 2 thus vary-
by adjusting the stop G 2 on the rod ,

ing the distance that the rod F 2 travels through lever 2 D

before moving it. The stock is fed against a stop or gage, and,
on the smaller machines, the feeding is done during the index-
ing, the stop being located between the fourth and first tool

positions. On the larger machines, a cam control brings the

stop into the first position and withdraws it after the stock is
fed against it and before the tools feed up to the work. The
feed-tube B 2 is first withdrawn by lever 2 causing the feed D ,

finger A 2 to slide over the bar which is held tightly in a spring

chuck NI. Cam lever U\ next releases the chuck, and feed-
tube B 2 is pushed forward. As the forward movement begins,
the feed finger A 2 grips the stock and forces the latter through
the open chuck until it comes into contact with the gage or
stop H Just before lever B 2 has reached the forward end of
2.

its stroke, and after the bar of stock has come into contact

with the stop, the cam lever U\ closes the chuck, so that the
bar of stock securely held in its position preparatory to being
is

operated upon by the cutting tool. The holder for stop 2 H

52 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS
can be adjusted along the hexagonal rod J 2 and the stop is
moved into or out of alignment with the spindle by a cam L 2
which engages the dog or lever K 2.

Mechanism for Threading. When cutting a right-hand

thread, the work-spindle stopped is in the third position

opposite the threading spindle, which is revolved at the proper

speed for the size and pitch of the thread and the metal being
cut. When the thread is finished, the threading spindle is

Fig. 8. Gears arranged to Drive the Right-hand Threading Mechanism

at its Slowest Speed

stopped and the work-spindle is again rotated, allowing the

threaded piece to run the tool off freely. The die or tap is not
forced onto the work, but is advanced by the pitch of the
thread. The threading speed is entirely independent of the
spindle speed for the other cutting operations. When starting
to cut a thread, the die isgiven a positive start by means of
a cam-controlled lever. Change of speed for the die spindle
is obtained by sliding the driving gear into mesh with the
direct driving gear on the spindle for the high speed, and into
mesh with a compound driving gear for a slower speed. The
work spindles are stopped one at a time as the cylinder indexes
 NATIONAL-ACME SCREW MACHINE 53

them to the third position, by the action of a cam on drum W\,

Fig. 2, which disconnects the friction clutch KI that nor-
mally engages the spindle-driving gear I t When the friction .

clutch is disengaged, the driving gear runs freely while the

spindle is locked stationary for the threading operation. The
length of time that the work-spindle must be held stationary

Fig. 9. View of the Main Tool-head, showing the Right-hand Threading Mechanism

in the third position is determined by the duration of the

threading or other special operation to be formed.
Rotation of the Threading Spindle. The threading spindle
is rotated from the main driving shaft HI, through the ar-

rangement of gearing shown in Fig. 8. A slow and a fast speed

may be obtained for each feed of the work-spindle, the slow-
speed gearing being shown in place in Fig. 8. When a shoe at
RS, Fig. 9, is in the groove S3 (see Fig. 8) of the sliding gear,
 54 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

the drive is transmitted through gears T3 /3 and F3 to the , ,

gear on W
thes threading spindle, rotating the latter at its
slowest speed. When the shoe R$ is engaged with groove A 4
of the sliding gear, the drive is direct from this gear to gear W^
thus rotating the spindle at its fastest speed, which is used
for threading brass or cutting very fine threads on soft steel.
When it is desired to prevent the threading spindle from

rotating, the shoe jR 3 drawn up and gear C3 slid out of en-

is

gagement with the other gears. The threading spindle P 2

(Fig. 9) is driven by a block C 4 that engages an adjustable pin
jE 4 .This pin may be adjusted out when the forward travel
of the threading tool must be faster than the speed at which
the main tool-slide is traveling.
Mechanism for Starting Threading Die. When cutting
a thread, the die or tap is not forced onto the work, but is
advanced by the thread after being given a positive start by
a cam-controlled mechanism so that a poor first thread will
be avoided. Just as the threading operation begins, the cam-
operated lever Nt, Fig. causes the roller 7 4 to engage the
9,

swinging lever H, which, through the plunger G 4 pushes the ,

threading spindle forward. In this way, the threading tool is

"
given a positive start; then the threading tool leads" onto
the work as far as the thread is to be cut. The main tool-
slide then recedes, but the threading spindle P 2 is prevented
from moving backward by the grip of the threading die or

tap, so that the coil spring P 4 is compressed. As the tool-

slide engages ratchet R on the
moves backward, the pawl () 4

rear end of the threading spindle, thus preventing the latter

from rotating, so that, as the work-spindle rotates, the thread-
die is backed off of the work. The spring P 4 which was com-
,

pressed by the backward movement of the tool-slide, then

returns the threading spindle to its normal position.
Cutting a Left-hand Thread. When cutting a left-hand
thread on the Acme machine, slight alterations are necessary
on the threading spindle, and both spindles revolve, the die
spindle rotating slowly and the stock spindle at the regular
speed. As the work-spindle is rotated faster than the thread-
 DAVENPORT FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE 55

ing spindle, there is a relative motion between the two spindles,

the work-spindle gaining on the threading tool so that a thread
can be cut. For backing off a die, the stock is stopped and the
threading spindle continues to run, which removes the tool
from the work.
Use of Opening Dies. Long outside threads or those that
are extremely coarse or fine can be cut to particular advan-

tage by using an automatic or self-opening die-head. On

the Acme machine, the die-head is revolved while cutting and
is opened automatically and closed by cam movements while
rotating. The mechanism for timing the automatic opening
of the die and closing it, for the threading operation, is attached
to the main tool-slide on the cut-off side of the machine. The
die-head operates in the regular threading position.
Davenport Automatic Screw Machine. The multiple-
spindle automatic screw machine shown in Fig. 10 is built by
the Davenport Machine Tool Co., New Bedford, Mass. This
machine has five work-holding spindles and is so designed that
each tool is controlled independently by a separate cam, and
the travel of each tool may be varied without changing the
cam which operates it. The five spindles are mounted in the

spindle head A (Fig. n) and the five tool spindles are sup-

ported by the frame B. In addition to the five tool spindles

for holding end-working two horizontal cross-
tools, there are
slides K and L (Fig. 12) and two swinging arms and N for M
operating forming and cutting-off tools. The mechanism for

driving the work-spindle and actuating the tool spindles, and

cross-slides at different rates of speed, as well as other impor-
tant features of the machine, will be described.
Method of Driving Spindles. The work-spindles are
five
driven from a belt pulley J (Fig. 13) at the rear of the machine,
which transmits motion to them through change-gears selected
in accordance with the speed required. These change-gears
drive a large gear C, Fig. n, which has internal gear teeth
that mesh with the smaller gears D
mounted on the various
spindles. This outer internal gear has a bearing on the hubs
of the spindle gears at the pitch diameter, giving a free-running
 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

Fig. 10. Davenport Five-spindle Automatic Screw Machine

rolling bearing. The change-gears provide for eight spindle

speeds ranging from 600 to 1500 revolutions per minute.

Operation of Tool Spindles. The end-working tools are
mounted in sliding spindles, each of which is operated by a
separate cam. These cams are mounted on the shaft E (Fig. 1 1),
and actuate the levers F, there being one lever for each spindle.
The connecting-rods G extending from each spindle to its
operating lever are attached to adjustable blocks on the H
DAVENPORT FIVE- SPINDLE MACHINE 57

^^-^
58 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

levers, and, by changing the position of these blocks, each

tool is made to advance the same amount as the throw of the
cam which or a less amount, down to one-half the
operates it,

throw of the cam. The face of each lever is graduated to

indicate the movement of the tool relative to the cam throw.
For instance, a cam for turning a maximum length of 2 inches
has a throw of 2 inches, but it is equally effective for
rise or

turning a length of i inch, the reduction being obtained by

simply setting the block on the cam lever to the 0.5 division.
When the block graduation i.o, the tool moves a dis-
is set at
tance equal to the cam
throw. The tool spindles may be ad-
justed lengthwise for varying the operating position of each
tool by a turnbuckle connection between the cam lever and the

spindle. The curved surface on the lever provides that the

tool in its forward position will be the same distance from
the spindle regardless of where the block is clamped to theH
lever. There are seventeen cams furnished with the machine
and these cover the work ordinarily done on it. For large
quantities of certain kinds of work, it is well to use special
cams.
Cross-slides and Swinging Arms. Each horizontal cross-
slide and swinging arm is operated by a separate cam, two of
which are mounted on the front camshaft O and two more on
the rear camshaft P. Motion is transmitted to the arms M,
N, and slides K, L, through levers and connecting links which
have the same adjustment as the levers that actuate the end-
working tools. These arms and slides provide for one cutting-
off tool and three forming tools, where they are required, or

more than one tool can be used for cutting off, the arrange-
ment depending upon the nature of the work. Circular form-
ing and cutting-off tools are generally used and are shown in
position opposite four of the spindles. Each toolpost has a
stop-screw for regulating the size of the work formed, the same
as on a single-spindle machine, and, in addition, an adjusting
screw or compensating stop, which will be described later.
Driving Mechanism for Camshaft. The front and rear
camshafts for the cross-slides and swinging arms, and the cam-
 DAVENPORT FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE 59

shaft at the end of the machine for actuating the tool spindles,

are all driven from a feed-shaft Q (Fig. 13) extending along the
rear of the machine. This feed-shaft, in turn, is rotated from
the main driving shaft through a friction clutch R that is con-
trolled by a hand lever at the left-hand side of the machine
in front. The friction clutch is held into engagement by a
spring to allow it to slip in case of accident. The rear feed-
shaft Q drives the shaft 5 (Fig. n) which extends across the

Machinery

Fig. 12. Cross-slides and Swinging Arms of Davenport Machine

machine. This shaft has right and left-hand worms which

mesh with worm-wheels T mounted on the front and. rear
cross-slide camshafts. Bevel gears at the sides of these
worm-wheels mesh with corresponding bevel gears on cam-
shaft and thus rotate the camshaft which imparts movement
,

to the end-working tool spindles. The speed at which the

three camshafts revolve is controlled by change-gears at U
(Fig. 13) which enable the time in seconds that is required
to make one piece to be varied from 3 to 20 seconds, increas-
6o MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

ing by \ second up to 7 seconds, and then by i -second incre-

ments up to 20 seconds, which is the maximum time allowed.
Indexing the Spindle Head. The head containing the
five spindles is indexed by a rod which carries two pawls and
is operated at the right moment by a crank disk mounted on

the indexing shaft that extends along the front of the machine.
This indexing shaft derives its movement from the handwheel
shaft (see Fig. 10) which is driven continuously when the feed

driving clutch of the machine is engaged. An indexing clutch

is disengaged except when the work-spindle head is to be

indexed. When the cam for starting the index comes into con-
tact with this clutch at each revolution of the shaft, the clutch
isengaged and the shaft for indexing the head is rotated one
complete revolution. The feed cams for feeding the tools are
stationary during the indexing of the spindle head.
Spindle Head Locking Mechanism. The spindle head is
locked in position by a lever which has a notched shoe that
successively engages locking blocks on the spindle head, as
these are indexed in position. The locking lever is pulled out
of engagement and pushed back by a positive action.
also
In addition to the locking lever, the spindle head is also
clamped by a rod which is drawn downward by the action
of a cam surface and serves to tighten the front bearing cap,
thus holding the head rigidly while the tools are in operation.
Stock Stop. The stock is fed through the spindles against
a stop which is made of a part of the first turning or other end-
working tool. The length that the cams feed the stock is
controlledby a nut on the left-hand end of the shaft, and the
stock stop is adjusted by a screw near the lower front sliding

spindle. The bars of stock rotate inside of a wooden tube,

instead of in gas pipes, so as to avoid excessive noise and

marring the surface of the material.

Compensating Stops. In order to insure that the tools
on the swinging arms and cross-slides will be located accu-
rately,with reference to the different spindles, the Davenport
multiple-spindle machine is equipped with what are known as
compensating stops. These stops consist of a series of pins V
DAVENPORT FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE 6l
62 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

(Fig. 12) which project from the periphery of a disk which is

secured to the front end of the spindle head. There are four
separate stops for each spindle; two are for the front cross-
slide and swinging arm and there are two additional stops for
the back cross-slide and rear arm, which are utilized when the
spindle has been indexed around to the rear position. These
pins or stops are engaged by additional stops upon the swing-
ing arms and tool-slides and the adjustment of each stop is
such that the cutting edges of the tools are accurately located
relative to the axis of each spindle when the stops are in en-

gagement. In this way, each tool is positively located, and

any slight inaccuracy, due either to constructional defects or
wear in the machine, is automatically compensated for, after
the stops have been adjusted.
Method of When cutting threads on
Cutting Threads.
the machine illustrated in Fig. 10, the work-spindles are not
stopped or reversed. The spindle carrying the die or tap is
revolved in the same direction as the work-spindle, but at a
slower speed when running the die on, and at a faster speed
for backing it off of the finished thread. The speed of a die
or tap when cutting is about three-fourths of the spindle speed,
so that the actual threading speed is one-fourth of the spindle

speed in revolutions per minute, and, as the diameters that

are threaded are usually quite small, the actual surface speed
for cutting the threadsis low enough to insure smooth threads

and durability for the dies. When backing off a threading

die or removing a tap from a hole, the threading spindle re-
volves rapidly.
The mechanism for driving the threading spindle is shown
The long "threading shaft"
in Fig. 13. W
is driven from the

belt pulley shaft at the rear, through change-gears, as shown.

This long shaft carries the male part of two friction clutches
which engage either of two friction clutch gears of different
diameters. These clutch gears, in turn, transmit motion to
the threading spindle at the different speeds required for
running a die on or for backing it off of the work. Thus, when
cutting a thread, the slow-speed gear is engaged; the clutch
 DAVENPORT FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE 63

is shifted to engage the high-speed gear when the thread has

been cut to the required length, by means of a cam which
actuates the clutch through the lever X. In the illustration,
the threading clutch is shown engaged for running a die off

of right-hand threads.
Work for which Camshaft Rotates Continuously. For
ordinary operations, the camshafts for feeding the tools are

stopped when the spindle head is indexed, as previously men-

tioned. For some classes of work, however, it is preferable
to arrange the machine so that the camshafts rotate continu-
ously. For instance, many pieces can be made from brass
rods, in 2, 23, or 3 seconds, and, for these rapid jobs, the ma-
chine is equipped with special cams which do not stop revolv-
ing when the head is indexed, thus saving a fraction of a
second on each piece of work. In order to operate the machine
in this way, the roll on the lever operated by cam F, Fig. n,
is removed and attached to the outside of the lever for safe

keeping. When this change is made, the feed clutches on the

handwheel shaft are not disconnected during the indexing of
the head; the cams for feeding the tools then revolve con-
stantly and are so shaped that the tools remain in their back
positions during the indexing of the head. The tools arrive
at their working position before the crankshaft which indexes
the head has entirely completed its revolution, thus effecting
a saving in time.
Speeds and Feeds Recommended. The following feeds
and speeds are recommended for the Davenport multiple-
spindle automatic: For brass work, the spindles should usually
revolve at the fastest speed, which is 1500 revolutions per
minute. When using high-speed steel tools and turning soft
iron wire, the surface speed of the work should vary from about

90 to no feet per minute; for soft machine steel, from 80 to

100 feet per minute; for tool steel, from 20 to 30 feet per min-
ute. Especially heavy cuts will require slower speeds than
those listed. For turning ordinary screw stock, the surface
speed is usually 100 feet per minute. These speeds are ordi-
narily used in conjunction with fine feeds varying from 0.004
64 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

for turning; from 0.0005 to

to o.oio inch 0.0015 mcn for
forming and cutting off.
Hayden Automatic Screw Machine. The five-spindle
automatic screw machine shown in Fig. 14 (built by the Cin-
cinnati Automatic Machine Co.) has incorporated in its de-

sign several distinctive features. The five spindles, which

Fig. 14. Hayden Five-spindle Automatic Screw Machine

revolve in a forward direction, thus permitting the use of

right-hand tools, such as drills, etc., are driven either from a
constant-speed motor, or by a single belt pulley A, at the
rear, which transmits motion to the spindles through a geared

speed-changing mechanism, at B (Fig. 15) of the tumbler-

gear design. The end-working
tools, such as box-tools, drills,
reamers, etc., are held in spindles which are operated inde-
HAYDEN FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE
66 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

pendently by cams that are a permanent part of the machine

and are adjustable for varying the feed of each tool in accord-
ance with its work. Four cross-slides are provided for holding
either circular tools, rectangular forming tools, knurling tools,
thread rolls, a cross-drilling attachment, or combinations
tools. The cams for operating all the cross-slide and end- work-
ing tools are held on slides and are actuated by a master cam
which imparts to each slide a reciprocating motion.
Spindle Chuck. The chucks or collets of the machine
shown in Fig. 14 are of the draw-back type, but they are held
in a stationary position endwise while the closing member is

pushed forward over the chuck for tightening it upon the

stock. When a chuck of the "push-out" type is closed, it
grips the stock while moving forward, because the tightening
of the chuck depends upon this forward motion. By designing
the chuck-closing mechanism so that the outer chuck-closing
member is pushed forward instead of the chuck, it is claimed
that excessive strains on the mechanism, resulting from the
movement of the stock after it is partially gripped by the
chuck, are eliminated. The chucks are opened and closed and
the stock fed forward by cams on the master cam-drum C at
the end of the machine. Adjustment for feeding the stock to
different lengths is made by a screw in the master drum. By
the shifting of a lever, the machine can be made to run in the
usual manner without feeding any stock or operating the
chucks, which is convenient when setting up the machine or
when testing the size turned by any tool after the cutters have
been sharpened, etc.
Operation of the Master Cam. The master cam-drum C,
which imparts motion to the cross-slide and the tool spindles,
has two speeds. This master cam-drum revolves at a uni-
formly fast speed, three-quarters or its circumference,
for
this movement requiring one and one-half second. The re-
maining one-fourth of the master cam-drum circumference is

utilized in operating the cutting tools, and the speed of rota-

tion is reduced in accordance with the nature of the machining
operations, by means of a geared feed : box D at the front of the
 HAYDEN FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE 67

machine. While the master cam is operating at the fast

speed, the first action that occurs is the withdrawing of all

tools, and, when these are back out of the way, the head which
carries the work-spindles is unlocked and indexed. The

Fig. 16. Adjustable Cams of Hayden Automatic

chuck holding the stock from which a finished piece has been
severed is opened and the stock fed against a stop, after which
the chuck is closed; these movements occur simultaneously
with the indexing and are followed by the locking of the
68 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

head and the bringing of all tools into position for starting
another series of operations. At this point, the speed of the
master cam is automatically reduced and continues to rotate
at this slower speed until the tools have completed their work
and are ready to be withdrawn again; therefore, it will be seen
that the time required for finishing a part is equal to the time
necessary for the cutting operations, plus a constant period
of one and one-half second (three seconds on preceding design)
while the master cam is rotating three-fourths of a revolution
at the fast speed.
Adjustable Cams. The cams for operating the cross-
slides and the tool spindles of the machine shown in Fig. 14
are in the form of a slide or wedge having a hinge or swivel

point at one end. The arrangement of these cams for the end-
working tool spindles is shown by the detailed view, Fig. 16.
The five cams E for the end-working tool spindles are carried
by a slide F which is moved in a direction parallel with the
tool spindles, by the master cam C at the opposite end of
the machine. Each cam E transmits motion to the tool
spindle which it controls, by means of vertical rods G, having
rack teeth at their upper ends which engage pinions H that
mesh with rack teeth on the tool spindles. The lower ends of
these vertical rods G
are equipped with rollers that bear against
the cams E and, as the latter are moved by the master cam,
each tool spindle is also moved longitudinally an amount

depending upon the inclination of the particular cam by E

means of which it is
operated. The angular position of each
cam isvaried in accordance with the feed required by the tool,
by adjusting screws /. With this arrangement, special cams
are not required for each job, and the only cams furnished
with the machine are those which form a permanent part of it.
The four cross-slides are also operated by separate cams,
the inclination of which may be varied for regulating the

feeding movement of each cross-slide independently. These

cams L (Fig. 14) also transmit motion to the cross-slides
through vertical rods K
having rack teeth at their upper ends
which engage pinions meshing with racks attached to the
 HAYDEN FIVE-SPINDLE MACHINE 69

cross-slides. The cams L by slides which receive

are carried
their motion from the master cam-drum C.
Cross-slide Stops. Each cross-slide has an adjusting screw
and a separate stop on the outside of the revolving head.
These stops are adjustable and provide means to compensate
for any slight wear which may occur, although, after having
once been correctly set, they should not require adjustment
for a considerable period. Each slide is provided with a swivel
to enable work to be formed tapering or for correcting a taper-

ing cut. Each slide also has a screw for crosswise adjustment.
Indexing and Locking Mechanism. The head is indexed
by a crank and slot mechanism, insuring an easy starting and
stopping movement, in order to avoid excessive vibration and

jar. The locking pin for the spindle head is located at the
bottom near the chucking end, and has one flat side and one
angular side so that the latter pushes the head around until
the flat side comes into contact with the locating block. The
head may be unlocked when it is desired to index or revolve it

by hand.
Time Required for Making One Piece. As previously
explained, the master cam-drum C, Figs. 14 and 15, controls
the movements of all cutting tools and completes all of the
cutting operations while it is turning one-fourth of a revolu-
make one piece depends
tion; therefore, the time required to
upon the speed at which the master cam rotates during this
one quarter revolution. This speed is regulated by the shift-
ing of two tumbler gears located in the case D
in front of the
machine. By means of these gears, 20 different speeds may
be obtained which give periods of time ranging from i\ to 36
seconds. A plate or table attached to the machine shows,
opposite each unit of time and under the different spindle
speeds available, the number of spindle revolutions during
that particular period of time, which, of course, is equivalent
to the number of revolutions available for each
operation.
After deciding the order of the operations and which opera-
tion requires the greatest number of spindle revolutions (which

may be found by dividing the length of the cut by the feed

MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS
 GRIDLEY FOUR-SPINDLE MACHINE 71

per revolution), the total number of revolutions per operation

is obtained. Then referring to the plate or table, the nearest
number of spindle revolutions is located in the column headed
by the spindle speed which is suitable for the work to be pro-
duced ; opposite this number will be found the time in seconds
required for machining, and also letters indicating the respec-
tive positions of the tumbler-gear levers. There are sixteen
changes of spindle speeds obtained by shifting gears in the
speed-box B at the rear.
Thread Cutting Operations. The top spindle of the
machine illustrated in Fig. 14 is usually used for thread cut-
ting. If threading operations are not necessary, however, this
spindle may be converted into a regular tool spindle or it may
be used for high-speed drilling. When cutting a right-hand
thread, the spindle which holds the die is revolved in the same
direction the work-spindle, but at three-fourths of the
as

spindle speed, whatever that speed may be, so that the actual
threading speed is equivalent to one-fourth of the spindle
speed. At a fixed time, which is three-fourths of the total
time required for making a part, the spindle is caused to stop
instantly, and as the die continues to revolve, it is unscrewed
from the work. When cutting a left-hand thread, the spindle
that is in line with the die is stopped and the die revolves at
one-fourth of the regular spindle speed. After the thread is
cut, the spindle is rotated at full speed, thus backing the work
out of the die. The mechanism for thread cutting is self-
contained on the machine and the machine is readily changed
for cutting left-hand threads.

Gridley Multiple-spindle Automatic Screw Machine.

The Gridley multiple-spindle automatic screw machines have
four spindles, the ij- by 5^-inch size being shown in Fig. 17.
These spindles are driven constantly in one direction from a
driving shaft at the center of the spindle-carrying cylinder.
This shaft is provided with a gear which meshes with a gear
on each spindle and is driven through change-gears from a
pulley A
running at a constant speed. This pulley may be con-
nected with an overhead countershaft or be driven from a motor.
MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS
 GRIDLEY FOUR-SPINDLE MACHINE 73

four work-spindles are mounted in a spindle carrier

The
which extends from one end of the machine to the other. This
spindle carrier is given an indexing movement each time the
tools have completed their work and have been withdrawn.
In way, each of the work-spindles is brought into align-
this
ment with the various tools held on the tool-slide B, which
is fed forward and quickly withdrawn by a cam. After each
indexing of the spindle carrier, the tool-slide moves forward
and each tool or set of tools performs the required operation.
The tool-slide is then withdrawn and the spindle carrier in-

dexed to locate each spindle into alignment with a different

tool or set of tools. A finished piece is produced every time
the tool-slide moves forward. A
Geneva stop mechanism is
employed for indexing the spindle-carrying cylinder. With
this mechanism, the starting and stopping of the carrier are

gradual, but the intermediate movement is rapid.

Tool-slide. The tool-slide B is mounted upon an exten-
sion D of the central part of the spindle-carrying cylinder.
This extension is supported in a bearing at one end of the
machine while the larger diameter which carries the spindles
issupported at the other end, the tool-slide being mounted
between the two bearings. With this arrangement, if either
end of the cylinder becomes loose in its bearing, the align-
ment between the spindles and' tool-slide would not be affected.
The tools on the tool-slide are held in holders which are rigidly
bolted to the slide instead of being held by shanks.
Feeding Movement for the Tools. The feeding movement
for the tool- slide which holds the end- working tools is derived
from a cam on the cam-drum C, Fig. 18. The slides carrying
the forming and cutting-off tools are operated by cams on the
drum E. By means of a quick change-gear mechanism con-
trolled by lever F, the feed may be varied at will, while main-
taining a constant spindle speed. With this arrangement, the
machine may be set up without considering the rate of feed,
as the latter may be varied afterwards until it is as coarse as
conditions will permit.
The Idle Movements. After the tools have finished cut-
74 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

ting, the withdrawal of the tool-slide, the indexing of the

spindle-carrying cylinder, and the movement of the tools for-
ward again to the position for cutting are commonly known
as the idle or non-productive movements. On the Gridley
multiple-spindle machine, the time necessary for these idle
movements is independent of the feed used when the tools
are cutting.
Camshaft and Cams. The main camshaft is parallel to
the driving shaft and is driven from it by a worm on the
spindle driving shaft, through a change-gear box, a worm-

Fig. 19. Independent Stops for Each Spindle Position

shaft, and a worm-gear mounted on the camshaft. This

shaft carries the cams for feeding the tool-slide, for operat-
ing the chuck- and stock-feeding mechanism, and also operates
the mechanism for revolving the spindle carrier and drives
the shaft upon which the forming and cutting-ofT cam-drum
E (Fig. 1 8) is mounted. The long cam-drum H operates the
mechanism for feeding the stock. The indexing arm /, for
revolving the spindle carrier, carries a cam which withdraws
the locking bolt and indexes the spindle carrier one-fourth of
a revolution for each revolution of the camshaft. The cam-
drum E which carries the cams for operating the cut-off and
NEW BRITAIN SIX-SPINDLE MACHINE 75
76 MULTIPLE- SPINDLE DESIGNS

forming tool-slides has its axis at right angles to the main cam-
shaftand is driven through a pair of bevel gears. The large
cam-drum C for feeding the tool-slide is provided with cams
of three different leads, and cam lever K is set in one of three
positions, depending upon the particular cam that is being used.
Stops for Forming Tools. Independent stops for the form-
ing tool are provided for each spindle position, so that the tool
is moved up to the same position relative to the spindle each

time a part is produced. The arrangement of these stops is

shown by the detailed view, Fig. 19. The stop A, which is

attached to the spindle carrier, is engaged by a stop B, passing

through an arm that is fixed to the forming tool-slide.
Method of Cutting Threads. When cutting threads on
the Gridley multiple-spindle automatic, the die is held in a
holder L (Fig. 18) which is carried by a slide. This slide is
fed forward by a cam M which imparts motion to the slide

through the bellcrank N

and the connecting link shown, and
the slide is returned by another cam on drum //. The die is
rotated in the same direction as the spindle, but at a speed
slightly less than the spindle speed while the thread is being
cut; the die is then revolved at a higher rajte of speed, in order
to runit off of the work. These two speeds are obtained by
means of two gears on the spindle driving shaft which mesh
with two loose gears and P on the threading shaft. For
cutting a thread, the slow-speed gear is engaged by a clutch
located between the two gears, and, as soon as the thread is
completed, this clutch is shifted to the high-speed gear, thus
backing off the die. The adjusting nut Q controls the point
at which the die is reversed, and the cam for re-engaging
the clutch is attached to a worm-wheel on the camshaft.
Either right-hand or left-hand threads can be cut by trans-
posing one connecting link and changing one cam.
These machines, at the present time, are built in four sizes:

namely, } by 4^ inches; ij by 5^ inches; if by 7 inches; and

2\ by 7 inches.
New Britain Automatic Screw Machine. The New
Britain automatic screw machine shown in Fig. 20 has six
NEW BRITAIN SIX-SPINDLE MACHINE 77
78 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

spindles, so that nine operations can be performed simultane-

ously on six pieces, by utilizing both the end-working and
cross-slide tools. Fig. 22 shows the arrangement of the drive.
The driving shaft is shown at the extreme right, and this
shaft runs at constant speed. At the left-hand end of the
driving shaft there is a gear A that transmits motion to
the main shaft B through gear C. The main shaft passes
through the tool-slide and spindle carrier, and at its extreme
left-hand end ca-rries a gear D the function of which is to ro-
tate the six spindles through gears E. The drive is carried from
the main shaft to the camshaft through a small pinion F on the
main shaft, that meshes with gear G on the feed-shaft. This
feed-shaft carries a pinion H
that meshes with an internal
gear on the feed cam 7. Camshaft / is rotated through gears
from the end of the feed-shaft, and these gears may be changed
to secure any required speed for the camshaft. The drive to
the indexing shaft is taken direct from the drive shaft to the
index drive shaft K through spur gearing. The index shaft
is in two sections; the forward section marked L and the rear
section M.
(See also Fig. 21.) The forward half rotates con-
tinuously, but, at the time of indexing, a clutch connects it
with the rear section M
and the indexing is done through
spur gearing and a Geneva motion that will be described later.

Power carried to the threading shaft

is N
(see Figs. 21 and 22)

through spur gearing direct from the main shaft. At the left-
hand end of the threading shaft is a spur gear that is thrown
into the driving gear on the threading spindle, for
mesh with
performing the threading operation.
Spindle Construction. All of the spindle thrust is taken

upon the ball thrust bearings Q (Fig. 23) that are set into the
frame of the spindle carrier, and receive the thrust of the ro-

tating spindles. The one of which is shown at

collet chucks,
"
R, are closed on the push-in" principle, being forced into
sleeves on the noses of the spindles. The usual mechanism
for closing the chucks is used, there being fingers S that are
oscillated and throw the chucks forward into the sleeves.

These fingers are operated by clutches. The stock tubes T

 NEW BRITAIN SIX-SPINDLE MACHINE 79

are also of the usual type, the work being seized by the spring

jaws on the chuck-end of the stock tubes. The stock tubes

are advanced by a cam mechanism acting through the sleeve
that may be seen on the extreme left-hand end of the stock
tube. The main shaft of the machine is indicated at B, and
transmits power to the spindles through gear D that meshes
with gears E on the spindles. The spur gears W are for driv-
ing the spindles when in operation for threading, the gear W
being slidably keyed At all times, except
to the spindles.
when the spindles are in the threading position, these gears
W are kept thrust into a taper seat in the gears E, and the

spindles are driven by the gear D. This friction is maintained

by fingers X that are operated by clutches and yokes. At the
time of threading, the clutches are cam-operated so as to re-
lease fingers X, and the between gears
friction drive and E W
is broken; thus at this time the spindles are not driven by
the driving gear D, because the connection between gears E
and Wis broken. For threading, therefore, it is evident that
gears W, operated by a special driving mechanism to be de-
scribed later, are responsible for the rotation of the spindles.
While the main shaft B passes through bronze bushings in
the spindle carrier, none of the weight of the spindle carrier
comes upon it, this weight being all taken on the spindle-
carrier bearings at V. more speeds are available for the
Six or

spindles, and these are by change-gears that may be

effected

placed upon the right-hand ends of the feed-shaft and cam-

shaft, as illustrated in Fig. 22.
The Tool-slide. There are six tool-holding positions on
the tool-slide P (Fig. 20) whichoperated from cam-drum 7.
is

Upon this drum are placed the cams that govern the opera-
tion of the slide. These cams act through a stud on the lower
part of the tool-slide. The cam-drum is kept free from back-
lash by a hardened steel roll supported from the frame, that
runs against the right-hand edge of the drum. As previously
mentioned, the cam-drum is driven by an internal gear and

pinion, shown at H in Fig. 22. A stud (Fig. 20), carries a

bevel pinion that meshes with a corresponding bevel gear on
8o MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

the feed-shaft which carries the small pinion H, so that the

cam-drum may be turned by hand when setting-up the ma-
chine. A hand lever on stud Q operates a clutch for disengaging
the camshaft at any desired time, thus stopping the action of
the tools. This clutch may also be thrown out from the rear
of the machine. A laminated cam is made use of on the feed
drum. This is a patented cam construction, in which the

.THREADING CHANGE-GEARS

Machinery

Fig. 22. Diagram showing Arrangement of Driving Mechanism on New

Britain Six-spindle Automatic

cam strip is composed of three leaves, which permits of the

adjusting of one cam to any length of work within the capacity
of the machine.

Indexing Mechanism. -- The indexing of the machine

shown in Fig. 20 is done at constant speed, irrespective of the
speed of the main shaft or camshaft and without regard to
the length of the job on the machine. As has been explained,
the index shaft is in two sections; the forward section L
(Figs. 21 and 22) revolves continuously, and the rear section M
revolves only at the time of indexing. A clutch connects
the two sections of the indexing shaft; and, at each revo-
 NEW BRITAIN SIX-SPINDLE MACHINE 8l

lution of the cam-drum, this clutch is tripped by the small

edge-cam R, Fig. 22. When the clutch is tripped, and the
rear index shaft is caused to turn, gear S turns gear T
through
exactly one-half revolution, because gear- S is just one-half
the diameter of gear T.
Diametrically opposite each other on the side of gear T
are two studs that operate the Geneva gear which may be U
more clearly shown in the front view, Fig. 20. This gear is
supported, but not driven, by the camshaft. The operation
of the stud in the slot in the Geneva gear turns it exactly one-
sixth of a revolution, and as this gear U is in mesh with the

W E O EjgWV. \ r-~.

Machinery

Fig. 23. Cross-sectional View of One of the Six Spindles of New Britain
Automatic Screw Machine

gear on the spindle carrier, which is of the same diameter, the

spindle carrier is also turned one-sixth of a revolution. Just
previous to the indexing, a cam and cam lever operated from
the camshaft withdraw the locking bolt shown at V in Fig.
21. This is a wide heavy key that
is normally kept in contact

with the spindle carrier by spring pressure, engaging in one of

the six slots equally spaced about the circumference of the
spindle carrier. The cam releases the key, so that, when the

spindle carrier has turned far enough to engage the locking

bolt, itjumps into place and holds the spindle carrier until
the time of next indexing. The Geneva motion is particularly

adaptable to indexing mechanisms in that the starting motion

is slow, gradually accelerating and then diminishing at the
end of the motion.
The Cross-slide. The cross or forming slides of the
machine shown in Fig. 20 are three in number, operating on
82 MULTIPLE-SPINDLE DESIGNS

the second, third, and sixth spindles. Provision has also been
made for adding a cross-slide to the fifth spindle if the work
to be performed requires it. Fig. 20 clearly illustrates the
second and third spindle cross-slides which are operated by
means of cam levers engaging plate cams on the camshaft /.
The may be readily seen in Fig. 21 and is used
rear cross-slide

principally for
cutting off. The stock-feeding and chuck-
closing operations are performed from the cam-drum at the
extreme end of the camshaft. This operates on the clutches
that feed the stock and close the chuck on the spindle in the
first or lowljj position, which is just above the top surface
of the cam.
The Threading Spindle. The threading shaft N is

mounted at the left-hand end (as viewed in Fig. 21) in a float-

ing bearing that permits the entire shaft to be oscillated,

thus allowing the gear under the guard at Z on the opposite
end to be thrown into or out of mesh with the spindle gear W,
when actuated by lever Y that is guided by a cam on the cam-
shaft. The operation of this threading shaft is as follows:

Just before the spindle carrier is indexed, the threading shaft

and its away from the spindle to give the
gear are thrown
spindle carrier a clear path for indexing. As soon as the lock-

ing bolt has shot into place, a rise on the cam that governs
lever Y carries this lever back into its inner position with the

gear in mesh with the gear W

on the spindle at the threading
position. Simultaneously with this action, lever is operated X
by the cam on the camshaft and operates the spindle clutch
that releases the spindle driving gear E (see Fig. 23) from con-
tact with the gear W
that is now in mesh with the gear Z on
the threading spindle. By this means the spindle is operated
at the correct threading speed. Before the indexing takes
place, the threading shaft is again swung away and gear Z is

thrown out of mesh with the spindle gear.

A brake lever located at the right of lever (Fig. 21) X is

operated from the camshaft. The upper end of this lever is

fitted with a fiber plug and its function is to bear against the

spindle and retard rotation just before the threading-shaft

 NEW BRITAIN SIX-SPINDLE MACHINE 83

gear Z
goes into mesh with the spindle gear. On the left-
hand end of the threading spindle is a reversing shaft by means
of which a left-hand rotation may be given the shaft when left-

hand threads are to be cut. The threading die or tap-holder

on the tool-slide is fitted with a pusher that presses against
the rear of the holder to engage the threading die or tap on
the work, after which it "leads" itself on. Spring fingers
prevent the threading-die holder from turning when in action.
This machine at the present time is built in four sizes; namely,
f by 3! inches; i by 5 inches; if by 7 inches; and 2 by 9^
inches.
 CHAPTER IV

AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINE TOOL EQUIPMENT

THE
various cutting tools used on automatic screw machines
for external and internal machining operations include form
tools for accurately producing irregular shapes in duplicate,

box-tools, hollow mills, shaving tools for light finishing cuts,

recessing tools, drills, reamers, counterbores, centering tools,
knurling tools, cutting-off tools, threading dies, taps, etc.

There are also many special designs, some

which are neces-
of

sary for making a given part on the screw machine, whereas

others are used to obtain a higher rate of production than
would be possible with regular or standard tool equipment.
The most important tools, especially of the class that is adapted
to general work, will be described. Most of these tools were
designed for use on certain screw machines, although the same
general types, in practically all cases, may be applied to screw
machines made by other manufacturers, with such modifica-
tions regarding size, etc., as may be necessary owing to varia-
tions in the design of the machine.
Circular Forming and Cutting-off Tools. When a part
is to be produced on the automatic screw machine, the suc-

cessive order of the operations and the kind and number of

the cutting tools required should be decided upon before de-
signing the cams, assuming that the machine is of the type
requiring special cams for each job. The method of applying
a forming tool varies somewhat according to the shape and
proportions of the work.
A simple application of a circular forming tool is illustrated
by the diagram to the left in Fig. i. This tool A is attached
to a holder which is mounted upon the cross-slide of the ma-
chine; the cutting-off tool islocated on the opposite side, as
the illustration indicates. The stock is first fed out against
84
 FORMING TOOLS

the stop in the turret and then the forming tool A moves in,
turning the body and the conical head; just as the tool A is
finishing, the cut-off tool B moves in and severs the part from
the bar. The body of this screw could be turned by a tool
held in the turret, but, when using a machine of the Brown &
Sharpe type, a tool held on the cross-slide is usually preferable,
because the work can be done more rapidly. This method is
recommended when the length of the work does not exceed
i\ times the smallest diameter A of the part when finished;
parts that are longer than this are too flexible to be turned by
a cross-slide tool.

Another example is shown to the right in Fig. i. In this

Fig. 1. Application of Forming and Cutting-off Tools

case, the forming tool C

turns the part c and e. Then a die in
the turret threads the end after which the tool moves in D
and serves the finished piece from the bar of stock and, at the
same time, forms the part d for the next screw. The stock is
then fed out against the stop in the turret and the operation
repeated.
Methods of Applying Circular Forming Tools. When
turning short screws on a Brown & Sharpe machine with
circular forming and cutting-off tools, as indicated at A
Fig. 2, if the time utilized by the tools will not permit revolv-
ing the turret for locating the stock in position for the next
successive feeding movement of the stock, two sets of tools,
that is, two stops and two die-holders should be used in the
86 TOOL EQUIPMENT

_L
 FORMING TOOLS 87

turret. The method shown at B is not to be recommended,

because the feeding of the stock varies to such an extent that
the forming tool will break off the screw when the latter has
been reduced to a diameter a by the forming tool, in case
there is an excessive amount to face off of the end of the stock.
As the turret would require to be indexed, any case, to
in
clear the arm of the slotting attachment, the screw end could
be finished by a tool in the turret with little loss of time as
compared with the method shown at B, although the latter
may be employed when part a is large in diameter and the
screw is short and stiff.

When a box-tool or hollow mill follows the forming opera-

tion, when turning a comparatively long screw or bolt as indi-
cated at C, the forming tool should be beveled as at e % as this
leaves a beveled shoulder on the work, so that, when the box-
tool or hollow mill reaches the formed surface, it completely
removes the superfluous material as at C\ without leaving
the objectionable ring which would be produced if the face
of the forming tool were square, as indicated by the diagrams
C2 and C3 This ring of metal c prevents the finishing box-
.

tool or diefrom being fed up to the shoulder. The cutting-off

tool should bevel the end of the stock as at d (diagram C),
so that the box-tool will have a light cut until the back-rests
have a good support. This beveled or pointed end also locates
a hollow mill and equalizes the cutting action on the teeth.
The method illustrated at D may sometimes be used to
advantage when making shouldered screws or other pieces
of similar form. This method, however, is not recommended
when considerable accuracy is required, because a slight
eccentricity in the spring collet would cause part / to be out
of true with part g. For accurate work, the part g should be

rough-turned with a cut-off tool and a light finishing cut taken

with a box-tool held in the turret. The forming tool shown
at DI is so shaped that it moves the burr from the screw-head.
When applying circular forming tools, the gaging of the
work should be carefully considered, because in some cases,
when irregular shapes are to be formed, it may be possible to
88 TOOL EQUIPMENT

use a forming tool which will greatly simplify the method

of gaging the finished work. The piece shown at E in Fig. 2
will require a box-tool, a forming tool, and a cutting-off tool,
but, when usingthe forming tool shown, it is simply neces-

sary to measure the diameter and over-all length, and the

latter does not require to be very accurate. Another method
of producing the same part is shown at F; three tools are used
as before, but the cutting-off tool finishes the work to length
h, whereas the box-tool finishes the shoulder to length k. In
this case,a more expensive gage will be necessary, and con-
siderable extra time will be required for setting up the tools
after grinding. It is generally necessary to provide means

REAR SLIDE
Machinery, N.Y.

Fig. 3. Circular Forming Tools and Holders

for removing the objectionable burr made by turning tools,

as indicated at G. In order to remove these burrs, forming
tools are frequently given beveled edges as indicated at Gi.
Holder for Circular Forming and Cutting-off Tools. In
order to prevent chattering, necessary to hold a forming
it is

tool rigidly. The Brown & Sharpe type of holder shown in

Fig. 3 provides a rigid support for the tool and includes suit-
able adjustment, provision for periphery clearance, as well
asmeans for adjusting the tool at right angles to the work.
The tool is firmly clamped against the face of the holder by
means of a cap-screw b in the center and a clamping bolt which
grips the rear side of the tool and prevents it from turning
while cutting.
 FORMING TOOLS 89

Arrangement of Circular Tools. When

applying circular
tools to automatic screw machines, their arrangement has
an important bearing on the results obtained. The various
ways of arranging the circular tools, with relation to the rota-
tion of the spindle, are shown at A, B, C, and D, in Fig. 4.
These diagrams represent the view obtained when looking
towards the chuck. The arrangement at A gives good results
for long forming on brass, steel, or gun-screw iron, for the
reason that tjie pressure of the cut on the front tool is down-
ward; the support is more rigid than when the forming tool
is turned upside down on the front slide, as shown at B; here

Machinery, N.Y.

Fig. 4. Different Arrangements of Circular Tools

the stock, turning up towards the tool, has a tendency to lift

the cross-slide, causing chattering; therefore, the arrangement
shown at A is recommended when a high finish is desired.
The arrangement at B works satisfactorily for short steel
pieces which do not require a high finish; it allows the chips
to drop clear of the work, and is especially advantageous
when making screws, when the forming and cut-off tools oper-
ate after the die, as no time is lost in reversing the spindle.
The arrangement at C is recommended for heavy cutting on
large' work, when both tools are used for forming the piece;
a rigid support is then necessary for both tools and a good
supply of oil is also required. The arrangement at D is objec-
90 TOOL EQUIPMENT

tionable and should be avoided; it is used only when a left-

hand thread is cut on the piece and when the cut-off tool is
used on the front slide, leaving the heavy cutting to be per-
formed from the rear slide. In all "cross-forming" work,
it is essential that the spindle be kept in good condition, and
that the collet or chuck have a parallel contact upon the bar
which is being formed.
Clearance for Circular Tools. In order to provide periph-
ery clearance on circular tools, the center of the tool is lo-
cated a certain amount above or below the center of the
work, as shown in Fig. 4. On account of this offset of the cut-
ting edge, the actual difference in the diameters of different
surfaces of the forming tool does not exactly correspond
with the same relative dimensions on the work. For instance,
ifa circular forming tool has two or more diameters, the dif-
ference in the radii of the steps on the tool will not be exactly
the same as the difference in the steps on the work.
There is a difference of opinion regarding the question of
side clearance for circular tools, some advocating considerable
clearance, others only a slight amount, or no clearance at all.

When tools heat up and "welding" occurs, this may not be

due to the lack of clearance, but rather to the poor quality
of cooling lubricant used. Side clearance is necessary in some

cases, but tools made without clearance should be ground

smooth on the sides and a good grade of lard oil used as a
cutting lubricant.
Tool-holders for Flat Forming Tools. Flat or straight
forming tools are used on automatic screw machines instead
of circular forming tools, in some cases, especially when the
part to be formed quite large and a very rigid tool is de-
is

sirable. The toolpost shown at A in Fig. 5 is extensively

used on the Cleveland automatic machine. The base a is

bolted directly to the cross-slide and the top face of this base
is beveled to an angle of about 15 degrees. The bevel wedge
b has a tongue which fits into a corresponding groove in the
base and the top face of the wedge has a tongue that fits into
another groove in the flat forming tool c. The forming tool
 FORMING TOOLS

is adjusted vertically by screw d, the head of which engages

one of a series of slots in the wedge. The toolpost shown at B
isused for holding light forming tools or for cutting-off tools
that are not of the blade type. It consists principally of a

Fig. 5. Two Types of Flat Forming Tool-holders

Fig. 6. Open-side Forming Tool-holder and Standard Universal Cut-off Tool-

holder for Cut-off Tools of the Blade Type

clamping strap e, a base /, and a tapered wedge g, which is

adjusted by screw h.
The design of tool-holder shown at A in Fig. 6 is known as
an open-side forming toolpost. It is used for holding forming
tools having square shanks. The forming tool is clamped by
set-screw b and is adjusted to the required height by wedge e
and screw /. This type of toolpost is adapted to holding inex-
pensive forming tools. The toolpost shown at B in Fig. 6
is known as a universal cutting-ojj tool-holder. The swinging
Q2 TOOL EQUIPMENT

tool-holder his pivoted on bolt i which also clamps the holder,

t

ratchet, and post together. A threaded stud j supports the

ratchet k and this ratchet gives adjustment to the tool-holder
h. The blade type of cutting-off tool I is clamped in place by
two bolts m. This tool-holder may be used on either the
front or the rear of the cross-slide. As shown in the illustra-

tion, it is set for the rear position. When it is to be used on

the front of the cross-slide, the position of the tool-holder h

may be reversed so that the blade is located below the center.

Tools for Cutting Off There are two
Finished Parts.
general types of tools used on automatic screw machines for
cutting off finished parts from a bar of stock; namely, the
blade type and the circular type. The blade type consists
of a narrow straight blade which is clamped in a suitable
holder. Tools of this kind serve only to sever finished parts,
whereas the circular type are, in many cases, so formed that,
as the blade cuts off the finished piece, another cutting edge
on the tool either bevels or rounds the end of the part being
"
severed or performs some other operation, such as point-
ing" the bar of stock or reducing its diameter at the end, pre-
paratory to making the next piece. The view to the right in
Fig. i illustrates how a cutting-off tool is used to turn down
the end of the next succeeding piece while cutting off the one
that has just been finished. Other similar applications of
circular cutting-off tools are shown in Fig. 2.

The edge of a cutting-off tool is ground at an angle, so that

it will sever the finished part completely by a cutting action.
If the cutting edge were parallel with the axis of the work, the

latterwould break off, due to the pressure of the cut before

the cutting edge reached the center, so that the end of the
severed part would not be finished neatly, but, with the cutting
edge at an angle, this does not occur. This angle a (see Fig.
2, Chapter VII) for different materials should be about as
follows: For drill rod and tool steel, a = 10 degrees; for Nor-

way iron and machine steel, a= 15 degrees; for gun screw

iron, a= 18 degrees; for hard brass, a= 20 degrees; for
soft brass and copper, a= 23 degrees.
 CUTTING-OFF TOOLS 93

The
thickness of the blade of a cutting-off tool should be
varied according to the diameter of the work, the angle of the
cutting edge, and the hardness of the material to be operated
upon. The thickness of the blade of an ordinary circular
cutting-off tool not required to form part of the
which is

work may be determined by the following formula:

r=
DX cot a.
X 0.14,

in which T= thickness of blade in inches;

D= diameter of stock in inches;
a= angle between cutting edge and axis of work.
When the cutting-off tool is also used for forming, the
blade is shorter and the
thickness may be about
three-fourths of that ob-
tained by the preceding
formula. In any case,
when a tapped hole passes

through the work, the cut-

ting-off blade should be wide
enough remove the por-
to
tion cut by the chamfered
end of the tap. Fig. 7. Box-tool designed for
General Work
Rake of Forming and
Cutting-off Tools. For cutting brass, the top face of the
cutting part of the tool is usually in the same plane as the axis
of the work, although, in some cases, especially for soft brass,
a negative rake of about 5 degrees is given the cutting edge.
For cutting other materials, forming and cutting-off tools will
operate more satisfactorily if given a positive rake. ^ The angle
for drill rod and tool steel should vary from 8 to 10 degrees;
for gun screw iron, 12 degrees; for machine steel, 15 degrees;
for Norway iron, 18 degrees; for copper and aluminum, from
25 to 30 degrees. For cutting steel and iron, the cutting edge
of the tool should be at the same height as the center of the

work, whereas for cutting brass, bronze, copper, and aluminum,

94 TOOL EQUIPMENT

better results are sometimes obtained by setting the cutting

edge slightly above the center, although for such material as
Tobin bronze, the cutting edge should be set the same as for
steel.

Box-tools. Box-tools are made in a great variety of

designs and types which differ chiefly in regard to the number
and arrangement of the cutters and the method of supporting
the part being turned. Most of the types described in the

following have been extensively Used. The box- tool shown

in Fig. 7 carriestwo cutting tools. The tools rest on a pin d
and are held by set-screws a and 6, and by two other set-screws,

012 i

TT1H
Machinery, N.T.

Fig. 8. Finishing Box-tool largely used for Steel Work

not shown, which are on the under side of the box-tool. The
support, which is of the V-type, is located at the back of
the box-tool at an angle of 45 degrees with the vertical center-
line, and is held by the set-screw c. This box-tool is used for
general work, for turning both one and two diameters, as
required. When one diameter is being turned, the cutter
in the rear is pushed back.
In Fig. 8 is shown a finishing box-tool which is used largely
for steel work. In this box-tool, the turning tool is held in
an adjustable block A which is adjusted up and down on the
body of the holder by the set-screw B, and held to the body
by the cap-screw C. A projection is formed on the body of
the box-tool and a corresponding guiding groove is cut in the
block. The turning tool is held by means of two set-screws
 BOX-TOOLS 95

D and the headless screws E. These latter are for adjusting

the turning tool, in order to increase the clearance between
the tool and the periphery of the work. The V-support is
held in beveled grooves in the body of the holder, by two
screws F
which pass through the two parts of the body sepa-
rated by saw cut, thus binding them together. The cutting
a
edge of the turning tool is located from o.oio to 0.012 inch
in advance of the face of the supports. A hole is drilled through
the shank of the box-tool for holding a pointing tool or other
internal cutting tool, which
is held with the set-screw G.

Fig. 9. Box-tool of the Roller-support Type

In Fig. 9 is shown a box-tool of the roller-support type,

which is provided with a roller support for the front cutter and
a V-support for the rear cutter. The supports A are held by
pins in the two blocks B, which are adjusted in and out by the
knurled-head screws C. The blocks B are held to the body of
the box- tool by cap-screws which are tapped into them. A
slot is cut in the body of the holder in which the bodies of
the cap-screws slide, thus providing adjustment for turning
different diameters.
A simple type of shaving box-tool is shown at B in Fig. 10.
This tool is provided with V-supports which are adjusted by
96 TOOL EQUIPMENT

the collar-head screw e and are clamped in position by means

of the clamp bolts /. The turning tool g is adjusted by a collar-
head screw h and is held in position by a set-screw i. This tool

Fig. 10. Roller Steadyrest Shaving and Roughing Box-tools

is of very simple construction and is used where only one

diameter is to be turned at a time.
The roughing box-tool C, Fig. 10, is provided with roller
supports, and the turning tool j is held in a square hole pro-
vided in the stud k; this stud clamps the turning tool against
the face of the box-tool holder. Adjustment for height is
 BOX-TOOLS 97

secured by means of the set-screw /. Two set-screws, one of

which is shown at m, act as an adjustment for stud k.

The box- tool shown at A in Fig. n holds three turning

tools, and can also carry a centering tool or drill, which is held
in the shank of the holder. The flat base a has two grooves

11. Multiple Turning Tool, Adjustable Hollow Mill,

and Standard Three-tool Box-mill

extending its full which the three holders b

length, in one of
and in the other two the brackets
for the cutting tools are held,
c for roller supports. This box-tool can be used for turning
three different diameters at one setting and is used either for

roughing or finishing cuts. The roller supports may be ad-

justed to lead or follow the cutting tools by simply moving
them along the slot in the holder. The brackets carrying the
98 TOOL EQUIPMENT

supports can be placed in any desired position and the holders

for the cutting tools can also be adjusted to suit the various
diameters and lengths of shoulders on the work.
An adjustable type of " hollow roughing mill" or box- tool
is shown at B in Fig. u. This is supplied with two cutter

heads, each containing four cutters d. The flat arm e of the

box-tool has a spline cut the full length, and also a slot through
which the studs of the cutter heads pass. The studs are made
integral with the cutter heads and are clamped by nuts as
shown. The four cutters in each head are adjusted by re-
moving the head from the arm and placing it on a stand
fittedwith a plug gage of the same diameter as the work to
be turned. This stand holds the cutter head in the correct
relation to the plug gage, so that the tools can be brought
into contact with the plug gage and then clamped. This tool
which is adapted to rough turning cast iron is supplied with
a hole in the shank for holding a centering tool or drill. The
heads for the cutters are adjustable along the body of the
holder.
The box- tool shown at C
in Fig. n
is of the open- type con-

struction and is supplied with one turning tool clamped to

its the work being supported at this point by roller
face,

supports. The second tool, which is set at an angle and held

down by a heel clamp, can be used for turning a second di-
ameter; the work is supported opposite this tool by a
V-support.
Box-tools of Over-cut Type. The type of box-tool com-
monly used on the "Acme" multiple-spindle automatic is

known as the over-cut type; this usually carries two cutting

tools as shown in Fig. 12. The front cutting tool is set "tan-

gentially" to the work, while the rear cutter is radial in rela-

tion to the center of the work. The front tool, when used for

taking a finishing cut, is set about o.oio inch in advance of

the supports and is ground a little high at the rear to provide
for clearance. The roller supports c which are commonly
used are shown dismantled at D and fastened to the holders
at E. The support holders are held to the box-tool body by
 BOX-TOOLS 99

a cap-screw e and are backed up by large-headed screws /.

The rear cutting tool h is held in a tool-holder which is retained
in a V-groove in the body of the box-tool by a cap-screw k
and is provided with an elongated slot for adjustment.
The box- tool shown at H is known as a "round box- tool"
because of the rounded shape of its body. It is provided with
a solid support which is very rarely used except on small brass
work. It is particularly suited for use in the "first" position
when the forming cut overlaps the box-tool cut. This type

Fig. 12. Group of Over-cut Box- tools used on the "Acme" Mul-
tiple-spindle Automatic Screw Machines

of box-tool is also provided with roller supports for general

work.
Spring-releasing Box-tool. The
regular box-tool, when
used for taking heavy roughing cuts, usually leaves a spiral
mark on the work in backing off. This is due to the extreme
point of the cutting tool becoming heated, and a certain
amount of the cuttings sticking to it, thus forming a ragged
edge, which produces an objectionable mark on the work when
the tool is withdrawn. To overcome this difficulty, the
National-Acme Mfg. Co. designed the "spring-releasing box-
tool" illustrated in Fig. 13. In this design, the front cutting
tool is removed from the work on the back stroke, and is thus
100 TOOL EQUIPMENT

prevented from producing an objectionable mark. The front

part of the body A is cut out as shown, and a block C is held
to it by a bolt and nut. This block is provided with a tongue
so that adjustable in a vertical direction on the face of
it is

the box-tool body. The tool-holder B is provided with an

angular groove which fits over a corresponding tongue on the
face of the block C. The tool-holder is held to block C by a
shouldered screw E, the diameter of which is smaller than
the elongated hole in the tool-holder, to provide for a slight
movement. Screw E is backed up by headless screw F to
.

POSITION OF TOOL
WHEN RELEASED

POSITION OF TOOL'
WHEN CUTTING
Machinery

Fig. 13. Spring-releasing Type of Box-tool

prevent from loosening when the tool-holder is moved back

it

and forth on it.

In the tool-holder B, there is a spiral spring H which acts
on a plunger, the latter bearing against the body of the shoul-
dered screw E. The
action of this spring draws the tool-
holder forward toward the center-line of the box-tool body,
its movement being stopped by the headless screw G. The
tool-holder B works on a tongue which is at an angle with the
line X Y. When the front cutting edge of the tool strikes
the work, it compresses the coil spring //, forcing the tool-
and holder back until its movement is stopped by the shoul-
dered screw E. Then when the main tool-slide stops advancing
 BOX-TOOLS IOI

and begins to retreat, the pressure on the cutting tool is re-

leased, allowing the spring to force the tool-holder up on the

angular tongue and thus raise the tool from the work as shown
by the diagrams at the lower part of the illustration. The
block C carrying the tool-holder is adjusted vertically for
turning different diameters by means of the collar-head screw /.
The roller supports are held in holders / which are backed
up by blocks K\ these blocks are held in place by a cap-screw

Fig. 14. Turning Tool for Taper or Irregular Shapes

M and drilled out to receive a headless screw L y

the latter
forming a heel on which the rear part of the block rests. As
the diameter of the work increases, the screw is released, M
allowing the roller-support holders / to drop back to bring
the rolls to the proper position. Then the screw L is brought
out until the block K is
practically in a parallel position,
when the screw M is tightened.
Taper-turning Box-tool. The box-tool shown in Fig. 14,
which is adapted to the turning of taper or irregular forms,
is held by a shank in the turret of the machine and is supplied
102 TOOL EQUIPMENT

with a bushing on the front end which. guides the work. The
circular slide A carries the turning tool B
and is fitted with
a pin C which comes in contact with the adjustable guide D
held on the cross-slide. When the turning operation is com-
pleted, the cross-slide recedes, allowing a spring located inside
the holder to move the slide A
back to its original position.
The guide D held on the holder E which is attached to the
can be made of any shape, so that any irregular
cross-slide
form as well as tapered work can be secured. This guide is

Fig. 15. Taper-turning Tool

fulcrumed on a pin in the bracket and is supported and

adjusted by two set-screws. This tool is used on the Cleveland
automatics.
A taper- turning tool made by the Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co.,
and one that is recommended for accurate work, is shown in

Fig. 15. When in operation, a block or plate, which can be

set at any angle desired, presseson the point of screw a, which
forces the holders carrying the supports and turning tool
out from the center. The screw a is tapped into sleeve b and
moves the latter in the direction of the arrow. Now as the
sleeve b forced in, it pulls on the band spring c, which is
is

attached to the circular block d, thus turning the latter around

in the direction of the arrow. The spring is fastened in a slot
cut in the circular block d. The circular block d has eccentric
projections e formed on it, which fit in slots cut in the tool-
holder / and support-holders g. As the sleeve b is forced in,
 BOX-TOOLS I0 3

it carries the spring c forward, thus rotating the circular block

d arrow and forcing the holders carry-
in the direction of the

ing the supports and turning tools out from the center.
In the end view shown at A, the turning-tool and support-
holders are shown
in the position they occupy before screw a

engages the operating block. The supports and turning

tool can be adjusted independently of each other by the set-

Machinery

Fig. 16. Various Methods of Applying Box-tool Cutters to the Work

screws and are held by the screws i. After the turret drops
h,

back, disconnecting the screw a from the block, the turning

tool and supports are returned to their former position by
means of the coil springy (shown at B). The spring j presses
against a pin k (shown at C) which is riveted to a plate /; this
plate is held to the shank of the holder by a pin fitting in a
slot. Plate held up against the outer casing of the holder
/ is

by the nut w, screwed onto the shank of the holder.

104 TOOL EQUIPMENT

Methods of Applying Box-tool Cutters. Box-tool cutters

are applied to the work either radially as shown at A, Fig. 16,
or tangentially as illustrated at B and C. The radial position
for the cutter is more commonly used for brass work, whereas
the tangential cutter is used for all classes of steel work, and
also for brass work in some The
cutting edge of a radial
cases.
cutter is set above the horizontal center-line of the work an
amount that usually about 0.02 times the diameter which
is

is being turned. This is the preferable method of applying the

turning tool for taking roughing cuts on brass rods. If the
stock is rough or of irregular shape, the cutter should precede

the support an amount varying from o.oio to 0.020 inch, but,

if the bar is cylindrical and has a finished surface, the
sup-
port, when taking roughing cuts, should precede the turning
tool, as shown by the dotted lines at A
The tangential cutter
.

shown at B is set to take a

roughing cut from a bar having a
comparatively rough surface. The tangential cutter shown
at C is set for taking a finishing cut in steel. The cutting edge
is located back of the center of the work an amount equal to

o.io of the diameter d, being turned. For cutting brass, the

tangential cutter is set in line with the center, or, in some

cases, slightly in advance of the center.
A method of applying two turning tools for roughing down
steel work is shown at D, and at E three turning tools used
for the same purpose. For taking roughing cuts on brass,
where considerable material is to be removed, a hollow mill
is generally used, but the method shown at D can sometimes

be employed to advantage. At E no supports are used, as the

tools support the stock. These tools can either be set radially
as shown, and a slight amount in advance of each other, or

tangentially and at varying heights, so as to distribute the

cuts equally among the tools. For taking roughing cuts on
steel, it is preferable to set the cutters tangentially to the
work.
At F shown a method of applying two tangential turning
is

tools for turning down two diameters on a piece of work.

This method is used when the distance a is not much greater
iff
-4*1 I 1
1
'
b
106 TOOL EQUIPMENT

than from J to f inch. For a larger dimension a, it is generally

advisable to use two separate box-tools, provided there is
sufficient room in the turret. When turning tools are used in
this manner, the thickness b of the first tool should be such
that the second tool, when set tightly against the first one, will
turn the shoulder to the desired length. To illustrate, assume
that a = 0.375 i ncn J
= 10 degrees; then b = a X cos
j8
=
0.375 0.9848X 0.369
= inch.
turning When two tools
are used in this manner, they should be ground on all sur-
faces and should also be made a good fit in the square or

oblong hole cut in the body of the holder to receive them.

Holding and Adjusting Box-tool Cutters. At A in Fig. 17
is shown a method which is commonly used for holding a box-

tool cutter for brass work. A square hole is cut in the body
of the holder to receive the cutter, the latter being held by a
set-screw a. The cutter is adjusted for different diameters
by the collar-head set-screw b which bears against the rear
end of the tool. By cutting a slot in the turning tool to fit the
collar on the screw, this screw may be used for adjusting the
tool both in and out.
The method shown at B for holding the turning tool is
used particularly for brass work. The turning tool is held in
the block c by two set-screws d, the block being adjustable
along the body of the holder. The block c has a projecting
shank which passes through the body of the holder and is
fastened to it by means of the nut and washer shown. This
method of holding the tool is very convenient for certain
classes of work, especially when different diameters are re-

quired, as it is possible to have one or more blocks for holding

the turning tools.
A method of adjusting and holding a tangential cutter is
shown at C. The cutter is set at an angle from the face of the
box-tool, and is held in the body of the holder by two set-
screws e and /. The tool rests on a small block /i, thus allow-
ing it to be adjusted for turning different diameters, the two
set-screws being used in connection with this block for

adjusting.
 BOX-TOOLS 107

A method of holding the turning tool somewhat similar to

that just described is shown at D. The tool rests on the body
of a screw g instead of on a block. These two methods of
adjusting the tool can only be used for certain classes of work.
A method which allows of more adjustment is shown at E.
The tool is adjusted and held by three set-screws, thus allow-
ing it to be adjusted for various diameters, with the face of
the tool held in a place parallel to the horizontal center-line.
The methods shown at C, D, and E are used principally for
roughing box- tools. At F is shown the method of adjusting
the turning-tool holder which is usually applied to finishing
box-tools. The tool is held in a block h, which is adjusted up
and down on the body of "the holder by means of set-screw i\
the block is held, when in the desired position, by cap-screw/.
This block has a groove in it which fits on a tongue formed
on the box-tool body, thus holding the tool-holder rigidly.
At G is shown a method similar to that just described, but the

turning tool is held in the holder in a manner similar to that

shown at C. By this means, the cutter may be set at a slight
angle from the horizontal center-line, thus giving it more
clearance, as is sometimes necessary, especially when cutting
steel. A slight adjustment of the tool, independently of the
tool-holder, is also possible.
With the design shown at H and 7, a micrometer screw is

used for setting the box-tool cutter to the correct diameter.

This micrometer screw k has two shoulders and is screwed
into the body of the holder, the body of the screw being made
a good fit in the block shown in detail at /. A 4o-pitch thread
is cut on this screw, so that for one revolution of the screw the

turning tool is moved a distance equal to 0.025 inch. The

block is held to the body of the holder in the same manner
as thatshown at F and G.
Agood method of holding two or more turning tools for
roughing is shown at /, the holder being made with the desired
number of projecting lugs or tool-holders m. The tool is held
in a stud n, which has a square hole cut in it to receive the
tool. This hole is cut at an angle with the face, so that the tool
io8 TOOL EQUIPMENT

is set at the desired angle. Two set-screws o are used to pre-

vent the tool from turning under the pressure of the cut, and
also to permit of a slight adjustment of the tool. This method
of holding a turning tool is used mostly for roughing work.
Box-tool Work Supports. The type of support to use and
the method governed largely by the follow-
of applying it are

ing conditions: Shape of the stock, whether round or other-

wise; character of the cut, whether taper or otherwise; na-
ture of the material, whether soft or hard; number of different
diameters to be turned; length of the work being turned;

Machinery, N.Y.

Fig. 18. Methods of Applying Box-tool Supports to the Work

clearance allowable between the face of the circular form tool

and the box-tool.
At A in Fig. 18 isshown a box-tool support used in rough-
ing box-tools. This support surrounds the work and precedes
the turning tool. It is used mainly for turning down cylindrical
work in which the finished diameter is to be concentric with
the part which is not finished, that is, which has not had a
cut taken from it. Where the work being turned projects
more than five times its diameter from the chuck, and is of large
diameter, it is not advisable to use a bushing support, unless
the stock is reduced by the circular cut-off tool, in order to
weaken it somewhat.
At B is shown a support which is sometimes used for finish-
 BOX-TOOLS 109

ing box-tools. One

objection to the design is that as it does
not surround the work, a bar of larger radius than the sup-
porting surface is deflected to one side, thus producing work
which is not straight, but slightly tapered. The support shown
U
at C is commonly called a V- support," and has a two-point
bearing on the work. The thrust from the tool is against
both supports. As a rule, this support should not precede the
cutting tool, for the reason that, if the work is not cylindrical
in shape, the irregularities of the bar will be reproduced on the
work that is turned. This V-support can be used for brass,
steel, and similar materials, and gives satisfactory results when
it does not precede the turning tool.

In turning cast iron or aluminum, difficulty is sometimes

encountered in producing a finished surface on the work.
This is usually due to fine chips or dust becoming wedged in
between the supports and the work, thus causing an abrasive
action which roughens the work. It is, therefore, advisable
when turning aluminum or cast iron, to use roller supports.

One method of applying the roller supports is shown at D.

These should be hardened and ground, and it is usually
rollers

preferable to lap them also, so that they are very smooth.

This support is also used when turning machine steel, and is
made to bear rather hard against the work, which gives it a
burnished appearance. Another support which is sometimes
used for cast iron is shown at E. This gives a two-point bear-
ing, and allows the tool to be set radially to the work. This
support, however, is not as good as the roller type.
At F is shown a method of supporting the work when apply-
ing two turning tools to it. This method is used principally
for roughing down steel work and also when it is necessary
to rough down the work from a large to a small diameter in
the least possible time. As a rule, supports for box-tools should
be made from high-carbon steel, left glass-hard, and given a

very smooth finish, which is one of the chief requirements of

a box-tool support.
Holding and Adjusting Box-tool Supports. Various
methods of holding and adjusting box-tool supports are shown
no TOOL EQUIPMENT

in Fig. 19. At A shown a common method of holding a

is

bushing support. The support shown at B is tongued to the

holder and is adjustable in an axial direction. At C is shown
one method of holding a V-support. A rectangular hole is
cut in the body of the holder in which the supports fit. When
in position, the supports are held by the set-screw b. This
method of holding a V-support is commonly used for both
roughing and finishing box-tools, when one cutting tool is

H Machinery

Fig. 19. Methods of Holding and Adjusting Box-tool Supports

applied to the work, and sometimes when two cutting tools

are used so close together that it is only necessary to support
the work at one place. At D
is shown a method of holding a

V-support when it is necessary to apply more than one sup-

port to the work, as when turning down to more than one
diameter at a time. This support is held in a movable block c,
which is adjusted along the body of the holder. These last
two methods are principally for box-tools used for turning
brass or a similar class of materials, in which the cutter is
set radially to the work. At E is shown a common method of
 BOX-TOOLS III

applying the V-support to a box-tool used for cutting steel.

This method is used when the cutting tool is set tangentially.
The methods shown at C, D, and E are limited in their scope,
owing to the fact that they cannot be used
to a certain extent,
in conjunction with a circular form tool when it is necessary
to have the box-tool work closer to the forming tool than the
thickness of the web e. For this class of work, the design
shown at F is commonly used. This support is beveled and
set in a beveled slot cut in the front end of the box-tool body.
The body of the holder is split and screws bind the two parts
together.
At G is shown a method
of applying roller supports. These
roller supports are held in two movable members, / and g,
which, in turn, are fastened to the body of the holder by the
clamping screw h. As the clamping screw h would not be
sufficient to hold these roller-support holders against the

pressure of the cut, they are held in the correct position by

large-headed screws i, which are screwed into the body of the
holder. At H is shown another method of applying roller

supports. In this case, the supports are held on two sliding

holders, j and k, which slide in grooves cut in the box- tool
body. are adjusted in and out to the required diameter,
They
and are held by the clamping screws. There are numerous
other methods of holding roller supports, but they are all of
a somewhat similar character to those already shown. Natu-
rally, there are various conditions which govern the method of

applying these supports. The methods of holding supports,

previously described, are those generally used in standard
box-tools, and do not include those used for special conditions.
Design Hpreferable usually to the one shown at G.
is

Cutting Angles for Box-tool Cutters. It is not sufficient

to hold a box-tool cutter rigidly and support the work well,
to obtain good results, but it is also necessary to have sufficient
clearance, and the correct cutting angle on the tool. The tool
must have sufficient clearance and rake, so as to remove the
material with the least possible resistance and power. The
manner in which the tool is applied to the work, and the ma-
112 TOOL EQUIPMENT

terial on which it operates govern the cutting angle on the tool.

Generally, in automatic screw machine practice, the cutter
is set radially for turning brass and, when held in this way,
the cutting angles are approximately as illustrated in Fig. 20.
Tool A is for roughing and tool B for finishing, the cutting
face of the latter being ground parallel for a short distance

y equal to approximately one-fifth of the diameter being turned.

For steel turning, the cutter should be set tangentially to the
work as shown at C and D. The end of tool C should be ground
to approximately the following angles:

Cutting Angles for Machine Steel Cutting Angles for Tool Steel
a =10 degrees; a = 8 degrees;
6= 10 degrees; b= 8 degrees;
c=8 to 10 degrees; = 8 to 10 degrees;
c.

d= 70 to 72 degrees. d=?2 to 74 degrees.

The formof tool shown at C is commonly used for roughing

cuts, but will, not produce an absolutely square shoulder.

For finishing cuts, the tool is ground as shown at D, which
produces a square shoulder. The cutting angles for tool D
are as follows:

Cutting Angles for Machine Steel Cutting Angles for Tool Steel
e=from 10 to 12 degrees; e =from 8 to 10 degrees;

/ =from 15 to 1 8 degrees; / = from 8 to 10 degrees;

g
= from 60 to 65 degrees. g
= from 70 to 74 degrees.

While the cutting face on the shown at D is straight,

tool
it is usually advisable, especially when cutting machine steel

and Norway iron, to give more "lip" to the tool, as shown by

the dotted line h. The cutting edge of a radial cutter for rough-
turning brass rod is set above the horizontal center line of the
work, an amount equal to about 0.02 times the diameter being
turned. If the stock is rough or of irregular shape, the cutter

should precede the support by an amount equal to from o.oio

to 0.020 inch, but, when the bar is cylindrical and has a fin-
ished surface, the support for roughing cuts should precede the
tool. The face of a tangent cutter should be set back a distance
x (see Fig. 20 D) equal to about one-eighth the diameter being
turned, for tool steel, and one-tenth the diameter, for machine
 HOLLOW MILLS
steel. Sometimes, it is also advisable, especially when cutting
machine steel, to elevate the tool from the horizontal an angle
of from i to 2 degrees, to increase the clearance.
Size of Steel for Box-tool Cutters. For special conditions,
the tool is sometimes made of rectangular section, but ordi-

J 1 t V

Eig. 20. Different Methods of Applying Box-tool Cutters in Automatic

Screw Machine Practice

narily square stock is used. The square sections recommended

for box-tool cutters are as follows:

Largest diameter of work, in inches: 5 f \ f i

Square section of tool, in inches: T\ \ T\ f T\

Roller Steadyrest. A simple steadyrest of the roller-

support type is shown at A in Fig. 10. The roller supports a

are held in slides b which are adjusted by means of screws c.
The slides are then clamped in the desired position by means
of the clamp bolts d. This steadyrest may be used to support
the end of a bar when using exceptionally wide forming tools,
when knurling, or for centering the end of the stock by insert-
ing a suitable tool in the shank.
Hollow Mills. For roughing cuts, especially in brass, a
hollow mill gives satisfactory results. A form which is com-
 TOOL EQUIPMENT

monly used in connection with automatic screw machine work

is shown in Fig. 21, which includes the angles of the cutting

edges for turning various materials. The hole in the center

of the hollow mill should from f to yV inch per
have a taper of
foot to provide clearance. The
cutting edge of a mill to be
used on steel should be set about one-tenth of the diameter
ahead of the center, whereas, if the mill is to be used on brass,
the cutting edge should be on the center-line. Hollow mills
of the inserted-blade type are also used to some extent on

./TAPER
X'TOJJ"PER FOOT /FLAT

Machinery

Angles of Cutting Edges, in Degrees,

for Different Materials
Angle as Shown
by Illustration

Brass Rod Machine Steel Tool Steel

10
3

Fig. 21. Hollow Mill and Angles of Cutting Edges

automatic screw machines, although they are more extensively

employed on screw machines of the hand type.
Centering and Facing Tools. When drilling holes which
are less than 7% inch in diameter, it is always advisable, es-
pecially when the hole passes through the work, to use a start-
ing or centering tool. At A in Fig. 22 is shown a centering
tool which is used for brass work, and at B, one which is used
for steel and soft iron. This latter tool is similar to the or-
dinary twist drill, except that the flutes are shorter. A worn-
out twist drill is sometimes used for this purpose, with the
 CENTERING AND FACING TOOLS

point ground thin, as shown at a, which reduces the pressure

and allows the drill to start easier. This tool also makes a
better center than would a drill with a thicker point. The
included angle of the cutting edges on a centering tool should
be less than the drill which is to follow. If this is not the
case, the point of the drill will start- to cut before the body of
the drill is properly supported; consequently, an imperfect
center will be formed. If an imperfect center has been formed,
the drill will run out, as shown at C.
It practically impossible for a drill to start concentric with
is

the center of the work when a small teat, as shown, has been left
by the centering tool, unless the latter has a more acute angle

90TO 100 90 TO 100

'ACE OF
DRILL HOLDER

Fig. 22. Centering Tools Starting the Drill Concentric

than the drill to follow, when there is no difficulty (see diagram

D). The included angle of the point for centering tools varies
from 90 to 100 degrees; 90 degrees should be used, preferably,
for brass, and 100 degrees for steel. The included angle of
the point of the varies from 118 to 120 degrees, 118 degrees
drill

being generally used.

At A in Fig. 23 is shown a common form of centering- tool
holder. This tool holder has been found very successful for
general conditions when the work has been gaged to length
by a stop, thus obviating the" necessity of using a facing tool.
It is provided with a split bushing a, or is made without the

bushing, the hole for the centering tool simply passing through
the body and the shank, and being of the same diameter as
the centering tool. At B is shown a combination centering
n6 TOOL EQUIPMENT

and facing tool. This tool is used when the stop for gaging
the work to length has been dispensed with, the tool b being
used for facing the work to the required length. At C is shown
a combination centering and facing tool with a supporting
bushing c, which is held in the body of the tool by two head-
less screws d. The centering tool is held in a split bushing by

Fig. 23. Centering and Facing Tools

set-screw k. The turning or facing tool e isadjusted to cut the

required diameter by set-screw / and headless screws g, the
block h acting as a fulcrum. This holder is used when the work
has been turned before centering, and it is also found con-
venient for centering long and slender work.
Drills and Drilling. For general work, commercial drills
of the two-fluted type are used exclusively on the Brown &
 DRILL-HOLDERS

Sharpe automatic screw machines for drilling cylindrical

holes. The used for drilling machine steel,
spiral fluted drill is
Norway iron, etc., and also for shallow holes in brass; but,
when deep holes are to be drilled in brass, a straight-fluted
should be used in preference to a spiral drill, as it breaks
drill

up the chips, allowing them to be removed with greater ease.

The shape of the cutting edge of the drill affects the shape of
the chips produced and also the amount of power required

[F
= 4*
-4 3

Fig. 24. Various Types of Drill-holders

to force the drill into the work. If the included angle of the
point is about 118 degrees, and if the point is ground thin,
produce a long, curling chip, and will not require much
it will

power for drilling. When drilling, if the edges of the drill

burn, it is an indication that the surface speed is too high;
ifthe drill chips, the feed is too great; and if the drill splits
at the point, that the proper clearance has not been given at
the cutting edges.
For shallow holes, the best results are obtained by giving
a rotary motion to the work and a feeding motion to the drill,
but, when drilling deep holes, the drill and the work should
both be given a rotary motion. This helps to clear the chips
from the hole and also allow oil to penetrate to the cutting
Ii8 TOOL EQUIPMENT

point of the drill. When drilling deep holes, the drill should
not penetrate into the work more than i\ times the diameter
of the drill before being withdrawn. For drilling deep holes
in tool and machine steel, the spiral-fluted drill is
generally
used with good results, but, for drilling
deep holes in brass,
the straight-fluted drill gives better satisfaction, as it does not
produce a long, curling chip, which is generally objectionable.
Drill-holders. There are various types of drill-holders
used in the automatic screw machine. The alignment of the
turret holes with the spindle is usually very accurate and it
is not necessary to have a floating holder for holding a drill.

At A in Fig. 24 is shown a common form of drill-holder. It is

flattened on the sides to take up as little space as possible

when working in conjunction with the cross-slide tools. A
plain bushing as shown at a is used. At B is shown a more
expensive holder which is sometimes used for holding reamers
and counterbores for operating on a piece which has previ-
ously been drilled concentric. The bushing part of the holder
is shown at b. At C is shown a holder somewhat similar to
that shown at but, instead of the shank and drill-holder
,

being in one piece, a separate bushing is used. For ordinary

work, the holder shown at A is recommended.
High-speed Drill-holder. A high-speed drill-holder that
can be used on the larger sizes of machines for increasing the
speed of small the turret is shown in Fig. 25. The re-
drills in

volving spindle a mounted in two bronze bearings with the

is

driving gear b shown at B. The thrust is taken on the ball

bearing c shown at C. The drill chuck d is of the spring collet
type. The shank e is ground to fit the tool hole in the turret
and the rear end of this shank is a reservoir for oil which lu-
bricates all the bearings in the holder. Sufficient oil should
be put in at the point / to completely fill the reservoir. For
holding small reamers, the spindle a is especially constructed
to receive a floating type of reamer -holder instead of the drill-
holder shown. This holder
driven by a shaft running through
is

the turret shaft and a small pulley belted to the overhead

works.
 COUNTERBORING TOOLS 119

Counterboring Tools. Trouble is often experienced in

using counterbores on automatic machines. This is probably
due to the fact that counterbores are used which are not
adapted for the work on which they operate. Generally
speaking, there are several reasons for the unsuccessful work-
ing of counterbores, some of which may be summed up as
follows: i. Too many cutting edges, not allowing enough
chip space and also not providing for sufficient lubrication.

Fig. 25. High-speed Drill-holder

2. Too much cutting surface in contact with the work. 3.

Insufficient clearance on the periphery of the teeth. 4. Im-
proper location of the cutting edges relative to the center.
5. Improper method of holding the counterbore. 6. Improper
grinding of the cutting edges. 7. Too weak a cross-section.
8. The use of a feed and speed in excess of what the tool will

stand.
For work in automatic machines, where the counterbore
cannot be withdrawn when it plugs up with chips and seizes
in the work, the tool should not have more than three cutting
I2O TOOL EQUIPMENT

teeth. The periphery of the teeth should be backed off eccen-

trically, and the body of the counterbore should taper towards

the back. The amount of taper generally varies from 0.020
to 0.040 inch per foot. The relation of the cutting edge to
the center has an important bearing on the efficiency of the

B
TAPER FROM ~ TO W\
32 FROM 5 TO 10
OT
INCH PER FOOT

U
D
FROM 10 TO 15

BACKED OFF HELICALLY

Fig. 26. Three-fluted Drill Various Types of Counterbores

tool. For deep counterboring, where the difference between

the diameter of the teat and the body of the counterbore is
great, the cutting edge should never be located ahead of the
center; often, if it is located a little behind the center, better
results are obtained; but this rule is only general, as the ma-
terial to a considerable extent governs the location of the

cutting edges. It is advisable to have the cutting edge ahead

 COUNTERBORING TOOLS 121

of the center, when the counterbore is to be used as a facing

tool or for counterboring brass, provided it is not required to

enter the work to a depth greater than its diameter.

For general work, the cutting edges should be radial. Straight
flutes are suitable for either brass or steel, but for steel it is
better to have the teeth cut spirally, the spiral being sufficient
to give a rake of from 10 to 15 degrees. If the difference be-
tween the diameter of the pilot and the body of the counter-
bore is not very great, and if the counterbore must extend
into the work to a depth greater than its diameter, the cutting

edge should be back of the center, that is, to the rear of the
radial line parallel to the cutting face. When the counter-
bore has to remove considerable material or enter the work
to a depth greater than its diameter, it is generally advisable
to rough out the hole to the diameter of the body of the coun-
terbore with a three-fluted drill, such as shown at A, Fig. 26.
Then the counterbore used only for squaring up the shoulder
is

at the bottom of the hole. This method is especially advisable

when counterboring machine or tool steel.
At B is shown a counterbore which can sometimes be used
to advantage on brass work, but which is not recommended
for steel. At C is shown another counterbore for brass work,
which has three cutting edges, and at D is shown a counter-
bore for steel work, having its teeth cut spirally. Teeth cut
on a spiral which will produce a rake angle of from 10 to 15
degrees are generally found suitable for machine or tool steel.
Counterbores of the type shown at C and should have in- D
serted leaders or teats to facilitate resharpening.At E is
shown a counterbore which is recommended work having
for

complicated shapes, or requiring to have two or more di-

ameters finished with the same tool. This tool is backed off
helically as shown, thus allowing it to be ground and still
retain its initial shape and size.

The counterbores described are for making pieces which

permit using a pilot on the counterbore. The ordinary method
used in producing holes which bottom is to use flat drills and
combination counterbores and facing tools.
122 TOOL EQUIPMENT

Flat Drills and Combination Counterbores. At A in Fig.

27 is shown a flat drill which is used for roughing out a hole
having one diameter, and at B is shown the counterbore or
facing tool which is used for squaring it up. The cutting edge
a on the tool should be set about one-tenth times the diameter

Machinery.N.Y.

Fig. 27. Flat Drills and Combination Counterbores

ahead of the center, and the thickness of the blade b should be

about one-eighth of the diameter. At C is shown a flat drill
or counterbore for producing a hole having two diameters,
and at D is shown the combination counterbore and facing
tool for squaring it up. This counterbore is adjustable, the
part a being adjusted with relation to part b by means of
the headless screw c thus governing the distance between the
}
 COUNTERBORING TOOLS 123

shoulders, the headless screw d being used to prevent the

part a from rotating. These counterbores can be used for

either brass or steel work, but for steel work it is preferable
to use a spiral-fluted drill for roughing out the hole, instead of
a flat drill, as the material can be removed with greater ease
and rapidity.
Holders for Counterbores. For counterbores having
leaders or pilots, a rigid holder should not be used, as the

Fig. 28. Method of Holding Counterbores for Various Conditions

leader will follow the hole previously drilled or reamed, and if

the counterbore is not allowed to float, it will produce poor
work, and a broken tool will sometimes be the result. At A
in Fig. 28 is shown a floating holder which will be found very
serviceable. The sleeve or shank a is made to fit the turret
and is bored out from ^V to yV inch larger in diameter than the
shank of the holder b. The holder b is kept from turning by
the driving pin c, which is made a driving fit in the part b
and a loose fit in the part a. The hole in the part a should
be about sV inch in diameter larger than the pin c. The two
headless screws d are used for adjusting the counterbore so
that it will enter easily into the drilled hole. They also help
to keep the holder b from turning. It is good practice, when
124 TOOL EQUIPMENT

possible, to chamfer the hole so that the leader will enter easily.
The counterbore is held by the split bushing e and set-screw/.
If this holder is properly made and set it will be found to give
good results for general work.

Fig. 29. Adjustable Counterboring, Boring and Recessing

Toolholders

At B is shown a holder for holding the flat counterbore

shown. The holder is made
adjustable so that the tool can be
set concentric with the center of the work. After adjusting,
the part a is held tightly against the part b by the cap-screws
c. The counterbore is held in the part a by set-screw d. This
 REAMERS 125

holder is found very serviceable for holding a counter-

also
bore when
the hole to be counterbored penetrates into the work
to a distance greater than its diameter and a chucking drill
has been used to rough it out.
A counterbore holder of the adjustable type is shown at A
in Fig. 29. The front holder or plate a is bolted firmly to the
shank b, and is adjusted by means of four set-screws c, only
two of which are shown. This holder is made adjustable in
order to set the cutting tool perfectly concentric with the hole
in the work.

Adjustable Tool-holders for Boring and Recessing Tools.

- The tool-holder shown at B, Fig. 29, is used for a boring
tool. The front part of this tool-holder is adjustable by means
of two set-screws d, which work through the shank of the
clamping bolt e and in this way secure the desired adjustment
to set the boring tool concentric or to the correct diameter.
The recessing tool shown at C has a shank /, to which is ful-
crumed a holder g on a stud h. This tool is operated by means
of a cam i held in an arm j that is clamped to the cross-slide
of the machine. Cam i comes in contact with the pin k on the
holder and operates it after the tool has advanced into the
hole in the work. A stud in the sliding part of this holder is

spring-controlled and contacts with the screw k, which acts

as a stop for setting the cutting tool in a concentric position
for entering the hole in the work.
Reamers for Screw Machine Work. When reaming holes
in automatic screw machines, it is advisable not to leave any
more material to be removed by the reamer than
absolutely is

necessary. For general work, the following allowances will

give good results for reamers ranging in diameter from f to
f inch. For reamers over f inch in diameter, a drill $-% inch
less in diametergenerally used; this would leave from 0.012
is

to 0.015 inch to remove, as the drill will cut slightly larger

than its nominal size.

Diameter of reamer, in inches i & i T\ f

Diameter of hole before reaming 0.120 0.182 0.242 0.302 0.368

Reamers are generally made slightly tapering towards the

126 TOOL EQUIPMENT

back; a taper varying from 0.002 to 0.005 mc ^ P er foot is

generally used, and a less taper should be used for brass than
steel, as brass work, thin tubing, contracts and
especially
expands more readily than steel, so that, if a perfect hole is
desired, the reamer should be tapered but slightly. For ream-
ing machine steel, a rose reamer is generally used, as it has
been found satisfactory for producing straight and perfect

ADJUST TO BRING
REAMER CONCENTRIC
WITH HOLE IN WORK

Fig. 30. Methods of Holding Reamers

holes. This reamer tapers towards the back and is not re-
lieved on the periphery of the cutting edges, the end of the
reamer only being backed off. The cutting edges of reamers
are generally cut on the center (radial) for steel, but, for brass
work, they are sometimes cut slightly ahead of the center,
which produces a scraping action, and makes a smooth cut.
For brass, the cutting edges of the reamer should be parallel
 REAMERS I2 7

with the axis, but for machine steel thereamer gives better
results when the flutes are helical, making about one turn in
12 inches. For reaming tapered holes, a reamer having ser-
rated flutes gives the best results, and, when the taper is
steep (included angle greater than 30 degrees), the finishing
reamer should be preceded by a stepped counterbore.
Reamer Holders. The method of holding a reamer when
applying it to the work governs to a considerable extent the

quality of the hole produced. When reaming a deep hole, if

the reamer is held rigidly, it will nearly always produce a

Fig 31. Swing Tool used for External Cutting

hole which will be tapered and large in diameter. At A in

Fig. 30 is shown a floating holder which is sometimes used.

This holder cheaply made, but is not recommended for
is

automatic screw machine work, although it can sometimes

be used to advantage on the hand screw machine. One of
the disadvantages of this reamer holder is that the reamer
drops down as shown at a, if much clearance is allowed be-
tween the diameter of the reamer shank and the diameter
of the hole, thus preventing the reamer from entering easily
into the work, which generally results in a broken reamer.
At B is shown a more efficient holder, especially for deep-
hole reaming. The reamer is guided at the rear by a cone-
pointed screw b, and is kept from rotating and is guided at
the same time by the two cone-pointed screws c. By means
of these screws, the reamer can be set so that it will enter the
128 TOOL EQUIPMENT

drilled hole easily, and at the same time be allowed to adjust

itself correspond to the eccentricity of the hole in the
to
work. The small hole d is drilled through the shank of the
reamer, allowing the cone-pointed screws to enter. This holder
will be found very satisfactory for holding reamers when it is

not necessary to remove an excessive amount of material.

At C is shown a floating holder which is used for
reaming
shallow holes. The reamer is held rigidly by a split bushing
and set-screw /. The reamer is set concentric with the hole

Machinery, N. Y.

Fig. 32. Raising Block used for Operating Swing Tools on Brown &
Sharpe Machines

in the work by loosening the cap-screws g and then locating

it by the bevel or rounded corners on the end of
in the hole
the reamer.
Swing Tools for Turning. Swing tools are so named be-
cause the cutting tool is held in a swinging holder as shown
in Fig. 31, which illustrates one of the designs used on Brown &
Sharpe automatic screw machines. This tool is held in the
turret of the machine and the swinging member is operated by
a raising block equipped with either an adjustable or fixed
 SWING TOOLS 129

guide plate, which comes into contact with the screw seen at
the end of the swinging arm. This raising block (Fig. 32) is
held under the toolpost of the front cross-slide and it has a
guide plate E that can be set at an angle with the spindle for
generating taper surfaces. The exact shape of this plate de-
pends upon the nature of the operation and the shape required
on the work. The arm D which carries the guide plate can
be adjusted in and out and is held in position by screws d.
The screw / serves to adjust guide plate E which is locked in
position by screw g.
The swing tool is used for straight, taper, or irregular

Fig. 33. Shaving Tool used on the "Acme" Multiple-spindle

Automatic Screw Machine, and Examples of Work

turning, where box-tools or circular forming tools are not

applicable, as when turning long, slender work of irregular
shape or when turning behind shoulders. The work is often
roughed out with this tool and finished with a shaving tool.
The swing tool is also used for cutting-off finished parts when
both cross-slide tools are used for forming operations. The
shank is arranged to hold a back-rest for supporting small
flexible work. This back-rest or support is inserted in the hole
in the shank of the tool and the V-shaped supports are usually
set in advance of the tool.

Recessing Swing Tools. When it is necessary to chamfer

inside of a hole, or to enlarge the central part of a hole so that
130 TOOL EQUIPMENT

a bearing surface will be left at the ends only, this may be

done on the automatic screw machine by the use of a swing
tool. The design used on the Brown & Sharpe machine for
internal chamfering and recessing is similar in principle to
the one shown in Fig. 3 1 which is intended for .external work,
,

except that the swinging arm is arranged for holding the

shank of boring or recessing tools. The guide plate which
controls the movement of the swinging arm is shaped to suit
the work. A recessing or chamfering operation should always
precede a reaming operation, so that all burrs formed by the
recessing tool will be removed by the reamer.

OOL IS ASSEMBLED FOR SECOND POSITION

TO ASSEMBLE FOR THIRD POSITION
TURN BASE UPSIDE DOWN

Machinery

Fig. 34. Shaving Tool-holder with Roller Support

Shaving Tools for Screw Machines. When forming work

of irregular shape or contour, in the automatic screw ma-
chine, it is common practice to use a shaving tool which oper-
ates tangentially to the work and takes a light finishing cut.

Shaving tools are used to follow circular forming tools for

producing a smooth, accurately finished surface, and they are
also used to completely form the work without any previous

roughing operation. The amount removed by the shaving

tool variessomewhat with the size of the work. When taking
shaving cuts on small parts, from 0.003 to 0.005 inch might
be removed, while for larger parts the allowance is often
greater. A design of shaving tool which is used on the Acme
 SHAVING TOOLS 131

multiple-spindle automatic is shown in Fig. 33. This tool is

used in the second or third side positions and removes 0.002
or 0.003 inch of stock left by the forming tool. The blades
H and G of this tool are made in pairs. One blade is used as
a rest and does no cutting, whereas the other one has a cutting
edge. The holder H
is adjusted by means of a screw for lo-

cating the two parts H and G

the required distance apart.
The supporting blade slightly longer than the shaving tool,
is

so that it comes into contact with the work slightly in advance

of the tool. The support and the shaving blade are not exactly

parallel, the blade being inclined one-half degree to provide a

slight clearance.
Another design of Acme shaving tool which has proved
very effective on wide and difficult cuts is shown in Fig. 34.
This tool is similar in its general construction to the design
shown in Fig. 33, except that it is equipped with a roller type
of support. The cutting edge of the shaving tool should be
exactly in line with the axis of the supporting roller. The
shaving blades and supports are made from Jessop's tool steel.
For cutting brass, Jessop's high-speed steel has been found to
give better results. When
the support and shaving tool have
an irregular form, the surfaces should be smoothly finished
before the tool is hardened and then all the surfaces are lapped

by the work running between them.

The tools illustrated in Figs. 33 and 34 are only recommended
for taking light finishing cuts. The allowance for shaving
depends to some extent upon the nature of the work and the
kind of tools used prior to the shaving operation. The allow-
ances for various diameters of stock should be about as
follows :

Amount to Remove
Diameter in Inches in Inches

iV to i 0.0015
^ to \ O.OOlS
to | 0.0020
f to f 0.0023
| tO 1 1 0.0026
1^ to Ij O.OO28
i j to 1 1 0.0030
l| tO 2\ 0.0032
132 TOOL EQUIPMENT

Fig. 35 shows a type of shaving tool and tool-holder which

does not have a support for the work. This type of tool is
employed when the work is so rigid that a support is unneces-
sary. When a shaving tool is not preceded by a forming tool,
and if the work
long in proportion to its diameter, it is
is

advisable to grind the end of the shaving tools so that a shear-

ing cut will be taken in each way from the heaviest part of the
cut, in order to remove the material more easily. In other
words, the end of the tool is beveled each way from the part
that will take the heaviest cut, so that a point is formed which
first comes into contact with the work. The angles for the
cutting point of the tool, as indicated by the detailed views
to the right in Fig. 35, should be about as follows: For brass

Machinery

Fig. 35. Shaving Tool and Holder for Long Work

rods, A equals 20 degrees; for machine steel, 30 degrees; for

tool steel, 40 degrees. For brass rods, B
equals 30 degrees;
for machine steel,40 degrees; for tool steel, 50 degrees. For
brass rods, C equals 10 degrees; for machine steel, 15 degrees;
for tool steel, 15 degrees. Of course, these angles may vary
more or less without appreciably affecting the action of the
tool.

Dies for Screw Machine Work. The common form of

spring screw threading die equipped with a clamping ring

for making slight diameter adjustments has been used exten-

sively on automatic screw machines. For ordinary use, the

adjustable spring dies are often recommended, because they
can readily be ground and adjusted for size and are considered
economical. There are two methods of making the spring
screw threading dies. One is to use a hob tap which is from
 DIES FOR SCREW MACHINES 133

0.005 to 0.015 inch larger than the standard size of the thread
in order to provide clearance, and then close in the ends of the
dies by the adjusting ring or clamp. A
preferable method is
to tap out the die from the rear with a taper hob tap, leaving
the front end of the die about 0.002 inch oversize. The hob

tap should have a taper varying from T\ to J inch per foot.

"
The round split dies or button dies," as they are commonly
called, are also extensively used. While a round or button die
cannot be resharpened readily like a spring die, its initial cost
isconsiderably less, so that it can be discarded when dull.
The button dies, owing to their shape, are not distorted as much
as the spring screw dies when hardening, and they can be held
more rigidly in the holder. The cutting edges on spring screw
dies should be radial for brass and about one-tenth the di-
ameter ahead of the center for Norway iron, machine steel,
etc. The cutting edges of button dies can be ahead of the
center about one-tenth of the diameter.
Holders for Threading Dies. There are many different
designs of die-holders for use on automatic screw machines.
Many of these die-holders are applicable to differentmakes
of machines, while others are designed more especially for a
given type. The Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co. makes two general
styles of die- and tap-holders, which are known as the non-
releasing type and the releasing type. The non-releasing type
is so arranged that the die is free to move axially a limited
distance. Thereleasing type is so designed that, when the
turret stops feeding forward, a slight additional forward move-
ment on the part of the die causes the driving members of the
die-holder to disengage so that the die spins around with the
work until the spindle reverses; the die then starts to rotate
backwards with the spindle and work, but this backward
motion is automatically stopped by the die-holder, so that,
as the die is held stationary, it is unscrewed as the spindle
continues to revolve.
The non-releasing type of tap- and die-holder is used on
a very large percentage of the work done on Brown & Sharpe
automatic screw machines; in fact, the releasing type is gen-
134 TOOL EQUIPMENT

erally used in order to eliminate the use of a threading lobe

that is too pointed. For instance, some lobes which are de-
veloped for the non-releasing type of holder have a thin sharp
point, but by using the releasing type a certain amount of
dwell can be allowed at the top of the lobe which is some-
times desirable simply for strengthening the lobe. The non-
releasing type will enable threads to be cut to as uniform a
distance from the shoulder as the releasing type.
Releasing Die-holder. A releasing type of die-holder
for button dies is shown in Fig. 36. When the die-holder
or spindle a draws out from the body 6, the driving pins c

Fig. 36. Releasing Die-holder

are also withdrawn, so that the ends of these pins are flush
or even with the plate m. When the machine spindle is re-
versed, the spindle a revolves with the work and the ball e
is thrown out of the deep part of the pocket in which it nor-
mally rests, as shown at B, into the position shown at C.
This outward movement of the ball locks the die-holder, thus
allowing the die to be backed off of the work as the spindle
continues to revolve in a reverse direction. When the ball e
is placed in the pocket /, the die-holder may be used for cut-
 DIES FOR SCREW MACHINES 135

ting a right-hand thread, whereas, when the ball is in pocket

g, the die-holder may be used for left-hand threads.
Another design of releasing die-holder, which is a product
of the ClevelandAutomatic Machine Co., is shown in Fig. 37.
"
This is known as the Silent" die-holder because it is so de-

signed that the driving members do not strike against each

other after disengagement at the forward end of the turret
travel. The holder has a sleeve which is gripped in the turret
and a stem which fits inside of this sleeve. In the driving
mechanism, there are two pieces A, of the same shape, which
are held in position by screws B. The driving pins E, which

Machinery

Fig. 37. Sectional View of Cleveland Releasing Die-holder

come in contact with parts A when threading, are plain pins

having heads which are somewhat larger than the body and
flattened on the sides. Parts A and E are held in their cor-
rect positions by a weak, piano-wire coiled spring 7, which is

just strong enough keep the two large members of the die-
to
holder together. After the turret has advanced to the end of
its travel,and the driving points A and E are disengaged, the
small springs G swing parts A which are pivoted on screws B,
,

back so that their angular ends are nearly in a straight posi-

tion, or in a plane at right angles to the axis of the holder.

By this movement, the ends of driving pins E and parts A

clear one another, regardless of how long the turret remains
in the advanced position, thereby eliminating any pounding
and damaging of the parts which carry the die or tap forward.
The pieces C have no duty to perform when the die-holder is
on the threading operation, but, when the spindle reverses,
 TOOL EQUIPMENT

parts C drop into the slots H

and hold the die-holder rigid
while the turret recedes. These pieces are constantly held in
their position, whether in the slots or otherwise, by springs K.
The slots H, into which pieces C fit, are milled on a fairly

large diameter, and this part of the mechanism is designed to

last indefinitely.

When changing the die-holder for cutting left-hand threads,

the screws B are removed and the parts A are turned over so
that the straight driving side is in the opposite direction in
both cases. The screws / and F are also removed so that

Machinery

Fig. 38. Telescopic or Combination Die- and Tap-holder

pieces C can be turned around to reverse the position of the

driving sides. The small screws F fit into slots E and simply
hold the pieces C in their proper position.
Telescopic Die- and Tap-holder. A telescopic or combi-
nation die- and tap-holder, designed for use on the "Acme
automatics," is shown in Fig. 38. With this die-holder, two
threading operations be completed at the same time; that
may
is, two dies of different diameters can be used, or a die and tap
as required, the tap being held in the rear part of the holder.
This special tool consists of a shank A in which a button die B
isheld by the cone-pointed screw shown. When a tap is to
be used, the button die is replaced by a bushing for holding
 DIES FOR SCREW MACHINES

the tap. The front part C of the holder, which carries the lead-
ing button die, is a sliding fit on a key in member A. To en-
able the cutting of two threads of different pitch, the front
member C is restrainedby two coil springs D, which allow it
to lead out in advance of the other part of the die-holder, and
as the shank A is held in the die spindle, which also is spring-
controlled as regards the leading out of the spindle, it is evi-
dent that the lead of the two members is controlled by the
pitch of the thread in the dies. A
stop-screw E
is provided for

locating the holder C in its backward position, so that the two

Fig. 39. Self -opening Die Attachment on Acme Machines

dies will always be in the same relation to each other when

starting to cut. Clearance cuts are provided in both members
to facilitate the removal of chips.

Self-opening Die Operating Attachment. Fig. 39 shows a

self-opening die
applied to an Acme multiple-spindle auto-
matic. This type of die is recommended for cutting long threads
of accurate pitch. The working mechanism of the die-holder
is enclosed within the body which carries the cam-operating
blocks. The chasers have closing and adjusting cams milled
on their outer ends that bear against the cam-operating blocks.
The adjustment of the chasers is controlled by a fine-pitch
screw, the amount of adjustment being indicated by microme-
138 TOOL EQUIPMENT

ter graduations. This die is operated by an arm / which en-

a
gages groove in the outer body of the die-holder and shifts it
axially relative to the inner member which holds the chasers,
thus causing the latter to move inward or outward, accord-
ing to the direction of movement. Fig. 39 shows the attach-
ment in the position it occupies when the die is to be opened
after cutting the thread. The die is rotated by the threading
spindle in the usual manner. A
shoe 7, similar in shape to
shoe 7, is connected to the rear end of the threading spindle,
and is held on a spindle K which is retained in the bracket L
attached to the end-working tool-slide.
In operation, as the end- working tool-slide advances the
chasers in the die come in contact with the work and start to
cut the thread. When
the pitch of the thread is greater than
the forward advance of the tool-slide, the spring is com- M
pressed as the threading spindle is withdrawn; this action
carries forward the two arms 7 and / same speed. When
at the
the die chasers have advanced on the work to the required
distance, the sleeve N
comes into contact with adjustable
stop held in bracket P. This bracket is provided with an
adjusting screw and is attached to the casing enclosing the
cylinder. As the die continues to cut, the outer body A of
the die-holder is held back by arm 7 and the chasers advance
until they come out of contact with the cam-operating blocks,

allowing the head to spring open; then, as the end- working

tool-slide moves back, the lever Q strikes the rear dog R and

pulls the chaser head back into the casing and closes the die,

ready for cutting the next thread.

Taps for Automatic Screw Machines. When tapping
holes in the automatic screw machine, there is tendency for
the chips to clog back of the cutting edges, thus subjecting the
tap to excessive torsional strains at the moment its movement
isreversed relative to the work for backing it out of the hole.
In order to prevent the breaking of taps, the flutes should be
ample space for the chips,
relatively large in order to provide
the lands being made just strong enough to resist the cutting
pressure. The flutes may be milled with an 85-degree double-
 TAPS FOR SCREW MACHINES 139

angle cutter having an inclination of 55 degrees on one side

and 30 degrees on the other. Screw machine taps in all sizes
smaller than i inch in diameter should have four flutes, and
for larger diameters, six flutes. The width of the lands for
different diameters should be about as follows:
Diameter,
J inch, land width, y^ inch; diameter, f inch, land width,
-/2 inch; diameter, \ inch, land width, f inch; diameter, J
inch, land width, A
inch; diameter, i inch, land width, J
inch. Ordinarily the thread is relieved only on the top of the
chamfered end. If the straight part or body of the
tap is
relieved, the chips are liable to wedge in between the tops of
the threads on the lands of the tap and the thread in the hole,

,GRIND GROOVE AFTER HARDENING

Fig. 40. A Tap Suitable for Norway Iron and Machine Steel

which might result in either breaking the tap, owing to the

excessive torsional strain, or in damaging the thread in the
hole. The chamfered end of screw machine taps is usually
very short, because the tap, in most cases, is required to cut
threads close to the bottom of a hole.
The amount of chamfer required on taps for various pitches
is as follows:
From 14 to 24 threads 2\ threads.
From 26 to 32 threads 3 threads.
From 36 to 48 threads 4 threads.
From 56 to 80 threads 5 threads.

In regard to the diameter

of the shank, manufacturers making
a specialty of these taps recommend that the shank diameter
be made to correspond with the outside diameter of a spring
screw die for cutting the same size of thread as the tap is
intended for, so that the same holder may be used for both
the tap and the die. If a tap is to be used for cutting triple
140 TOOL EQUIPMENT

or quadruple threads, the flutes should be helical so that they

will be at right angles to the teeth and form square cutting

edges.
While an ordinary machine tap may be used for tapping
brass in the screw machine, it does not give satisfactory results
when tapping such material as Norway iron, machine steel,
etc. The tap shown 40 has proved satisfactory for
in Fig.
materials of the kind mentioned. The end of this tap is ground
at an angle of about 55 degrees and is slightly cupped out at
the center and backed off as indicated in the end view. The

tap should be slightly tapered towards the back for clearance.

A groove is ground the entire length of the threaded part
after the tap has been hardened. This groove allows the oil

to reach the point of the tap and also provides clearance for
the chips. When made from Stubb's imported drill rod and
carefully hardened, can
this
tap be worked at a cutting speed
of from 35 to 40 feet per minute.
Some taps intended especially for threading copper have an
odd number of flutes which are cut spirally. The Echols
patent tap, made by the Pratt & Whitney Co., has proved
effective for cutting clean threads in copper and tough ma-
terials, such as gun-metal, etc. This style of tap has an odd
number of flutes and each alternate tooth is omitted, the
arrangement being such that each tooth is followed by a blank
space on the following land, which, in turn, is followed by a
tooth on the next successive land.
Knurling Tools. The tools used for knurling the edges
of screw-heads, etc., in automatic screw machines, are held
either on the cross-slide or in the turret, their position de-

pending upon the location of the surface to be knurled or the

arrangement of the other tool equipment. There are three
general methods of presenting knurls to the work. When the
knurling tool is attached to the cross-slide, it may be forced
against the work either radially or tangentially and, when the

knurling tool is held in the turret, two knurls move along the
surface of the work on opposite sides and parallel with its
axis.
 KNURLING TOOLS 141

A cross-slide type of knurl-holder is shown in Fig. 41. The

knurl operates on the top side of the work as the cross-slide
moves laterally; as this movement is continued, the circular
cutting-off tool back of the knurl severs the finished part,
and then the cross-slide and knurl return to the starting posi-
tion. The knurl-holder is held to the outer face A of the rear
cross-slide tool-holder,by means of screw B, which also holds
the circular cutting-off tool. The distance C from the knurl
to the cutting-off tool may be changed in accordance with

Fig. 41. Rear Cross-slide Knurl-holder

the location of the knurled surface relative to the end of the

work. This design of knurl-holder can only be used on a tool-
holder which carries the cutting-off tool, because the finished
piece must be severed from the bar before the knurl can return
to the starting position.
Universal Cross-slide Knurling Tool. Another design of
cross-slide knurling tool is shown in Fig. 42. This design is
more complicated and expensive than the one previously
described, but it can be appli-ed to a wider range of work and
may be used in conjunction with either circular forming or
cutting-off tools on the front cross-slide. The knurl is held
in arm F, which is pivoted to lever C, and this lever is mounted
on a pin upon which it has a certain amount of adjustment
for locating the knurl relative to the work in a lengthwise
142 TOOL EQUIPMENT

direction. The nuts M on the stud shown serve to hold arm

C and also provide adjustment for raising or lowering arm F
in accordance with the diameter of the part to be knurled.
As the knurl passes over the stock on the outward movement
of the cross-slide, the nuts H bear against the face B of the

L K

Fig. 42. Universal Cross-slide Knurl-holder

lug shown, and spring K is compressed; when the knurl has

cleared the work and the pressure on the spring is released,
nut J is forced against the opposite side of the lug and arm F
swings outward, so that the knurl clears the work on the
return movement.
Turret Knurling Tools. Knurling tools which are held
in the turret and move parallel with the work usually have
 KNURLING TOOLS 143

two knurls which engage the work on opposite sides. The

design that is used on the Brown & Sharpe machines is shown
in Fig. 43. The knurls have teeth which are parallel to the
axis so that they may by used for either straight or cross-
knurling. Each knurl-holder A may be set to the different
angular position required, by means of the graduations on the
lugs B in which the knurl-holders are inserted.
These lugs are
clamped by nuts C and
are adjustable in the main holder F
for varying' the distance between the knurls, in accordance

Fig. 43. Brown & Sharpe Adjustable Turret Knurl-holder

with the diameter of the surface to be knurled. This adjust-

ment is effected by screws D which are locked
by screws E.
Opening and Closing Type of Knurl-holder. It is some-
times necessary to use a turret tool for knurling a diameter
which is either of the same size or smaller than a preceding
part of the work. For knurling operations of this kind, a
special knurl-holder is required which is so designed that the
knurls will move inward to the working position at a prede-
termined point and then open automatically after the required
length has been knurled.
Double Knurl-holder for Cross-slides. The double ad-
justable knurl-holder shown in Fig. 44 was designed primarily
for use on the Acme multiple-spindle machines. It is
usually
144 TOOL EQUIPMENT

held on a top working tool-slide. The shank A is slotted at

the end to receive a swinging member B which is pivoted on
screw C. The lower knurl is retained in holder B and the upper
knurl in an adjustable holder D, which is held in position by
cap-screw E which is backed up by screw F. The movement
of part B is by the stop-screw G against which the
controlled
holder is held by a bevel pin H and coil spring /. This con-
struction gives a certain amount of flexibility, thus making
it unnecessary to set the holder accurately relative to the
work, as it is self-adjusting.
The Teeth of Knurls. The teeth of knurls may be either

Machinery

Fig. 44. Double Knurl-holder of the Adjustable Type for Use on Top-
or Side-working Tool-slides

straight or parallel with the axis, or they may be at an angle

with the Knurls having straight teeth are presented
axis.
to the work so that these teeth are parallel with the axis of
the work when straight knurling, similar to the milled edge of
a coin, is desired. By applying two knurls of this type to
opposite sides of the work and inclining them to the axis of
the work, a cross or diamond knurling is obtained. A similar
form of knurling may also be obtained by using a pair of
knurls which have right- and left-hand helical teeth and mount-
ing the knurls in their holders so that their axes are parallel
with the axis of the work. Knurls also differ in regard to their
form, some being cylindrical for operating upon plain cylin-
 KNURLING TOOLS 145

drical surfaces, whereas others are made concave to conform

to the convex head of a screw or other part that requires

knurling.
Straight Knurls. Straight knurls or those having teeth
which are parallel with the axis are generally cut in the milling
machine by the use of a cutter of the desired angle. It is im-
portant to select a suitable angle for the teeth for knurling
"
different materials. A blunt knurl" will work better on soft
materials than one with teeth of a more acute angle. The
following included angles for the teeth have been found satis-
factory for the materials specified:
Brass and hard copper 90 degrees.
Gun screw iron 80 degrees.
Norway iron and machine steel 70 degrees.
Drill rod and tool steel 60 degrees.

When laying out a set of cams for knurling operations, it

is necessary to know the depth of the tooth in the knurl.
If d = depth of tooth in knurl; p= circular pitch of knurl;
a included tooth angle of knurl; then, for all practical pur-
poses, the depth may be calculated as follows: When,

a = gp degrees, d = -,

a = 80 degrees, d = - x tan 50 degrees,

2

a = 70 degrees, d = - x tan 55 degrees,

2

a = 60 degrees, d = - x tan 60 degrees.

2

Concave Knurls. The radius of a concave knurl should

not be the same as the radius of the piece to be knurled.
If the knurl and the work are the same radius, the material

compressed by the knurl will be forced down on the shoulder D

and spoil the appearance, of the work. A design of concave
knurl is shown in Fig. 45, and all the important dimensions
are designated by letters. To find these dimensions, the pitch
of the knurl required must be known, and also, approximately,
146 TOOL EQUIPMENT

the throat diameter B. This diameter must suit the knurl-

holder used, and be such that the circumference contains
an even number of teeth with the required pitch. When these
dimensions have been decided upon, all the other unknown
factors can be found by the following formula Let R = radius :

of piece to be knurled; r =
radius of concave part of knurl;
=
C radius of cutter or hob for cutting the teeth in the knurl;
B = diameter over concave part of knurl (throat diameter);
A = outside diameter of knurl; d = depth of tooth in knurl;
P= pitch of knurl (number of teeth per inch circumference) ;

p = circular pitch of knurl;

then,r = R + \&\ C = r + d',
A = B + 2r (3 d + o.oio inch).
As the depth of the tooth is

usually very slight, the throat

diameter B will be accurate
enough for all practical purposes
for calculating the pitch, and it
Fig. 45. Concave Knurl js not nec essary to take into
consideration the pitch circle. For example, assume that the
pitch of a knurl is 32, that the throat diameter B is 0.5561
inch, that the radius R
of the piece to be knurled is JQ inch,
and that the angle of the teeth is 90 degrees; find the dimen-
sions of the knurl. Using the notation given:

/>=- = = 0.03125 inch;

d = 0.0156 inch;
i 0.0156
Y
.

= 0.0703 inch;

C = 0.0703 + 0.0156 = 0.0859 inch;

A = 0.5561 + 0.1406 -
(0.0468 + o.oio) = 0.6399 inch.

Spiral Knurls. When a knurl has spiral or helical teeth,

the number of teeth around the circumference may be deter-
mined as follows: Divide the normal pitch of the teeth or the
shortest distance between adjacent rows of teeth by the
cosine of the angle between the teeth and axis of the knurl,
 KNURLING TOOLS 147

thus obtaining the pitch of the teeth as measured circum-

ferentially; the circumference of the knurl is then divided
by this circumferential pitch to obtain the number of teeth
in the knurl. To illustrate, the normal circular pitch is
if

0.0455 inch, and if the angle between the teeth and the axis
of the knurl equals 30 degrees, the circumferential pitch will

equal 0.0455 ~=~ cos 3 degrees = 0.0525. The circumference

divided by 0.0525 inch will equal the number of teeth around
the circumference of the knurl.
To find the lead of the helix or spiral, multiply the circum-
ference of the knurl by the cotangent of the angle between
the axis of the knurl and the teeth. If the circumference equals
2.362 inches, and the circular pitch is 0.0525 inch/ the number
of teeth equals 2.362-7- 0.0525 =
45 teeth. If the angle be-
tween the teeth and the axis of the knurl is 30 degrees, the lead
X cot 30 degrees =4.09
of the tooth groove or spiral equals 2.362

inches, which represents the lead for which the milling machine
would be geared when cutting the knurl teeth.
 CHAPTER V
ADJUSTING OR SETTING-UP AUTOMATIC SCREW
MACHINES

THE automatic screw machine, like automatic machine tools

in general, requires first a set of cutting tools that is suitable
for the particular work to be produced and, in addition, a
certain amount of adjustment, so that the movements of the
different tools will occur in the required order or sequence.
As the tool movements are ordinarily controlled by cams,
setting-up or adjusting a screw machine involves setting the
cams as well as the tools and whatever additional parts of
the machine must operate in accordance with the nature of
the work. On someautomatic screw machines, the cams are
previously laid out and milled to the exact contour or shape
necessary for moving the tools the required amount and at a
suitable rate of feed; these cams, which are special for each

job, are then placed on the machine in such positions that the
tools which they control act at the right time, as determined
by the successive order of the operations. Other types of screw
machines are so designed that special cams for each job are
not needed, because the machine can be adjusted for varying
the feeding movements and the time at which the different
tools operate. The following general information on screw
machine adjustment applies to several well-known designs
and indicates what changes are necessary for adapting these
machines to the production of different parts.
Setting-up the Brown & Sharpe Machine. The cams which
control the movements of the Brown & Sharpe machine are
made special for each job, and the laying out of these cams
"
is often referred to as camming the machine." The outline
of each cam is plotted on paper in advance, and this work
can be facilitated by the application of a cam templet for lay-
148
 ADJUSTMENT OF BROWN & SHARPE MACHINE 149

ing out the rise and drop on the cam lobes for various speeds.
In connection with work, this it is necessary to consider the
speed at which the spindle is to be operated; the best method
of producing the piece; and the feeds for the various opera-
tions. In order to avoid confusion, the actual methods of
designing cams have been treated separately in Chapter VII.
After the machine is equipped with the proper cams for
operating the turret-slide and the cross-slides, setting-up the
machine a comparatively simple operation. The selection
is

of the right feedsand speeds for the work is done in advance

in connection with the laying out of the cams. In addition
to making the adjustments common to hand-operated machines,
it issimply necessary to put on the three cams which control
the movements of the two cross-slides and the turret-slide,

respectively, select the specified change-gears, and set the

adjustable dogs which control the time of indexing, feeding
of stock, etc., to trip at the proper time. The cams are defi-
nitely located by the record of speeds, change-gears
pins. If

used, and name of the part for which the cams were designed,
are stamped upon the side of one of the cams, it is an easy
matter to duplicate the work for which the cams were designed,
at any future time, by simply equipping the machine with
the same cams and gears previously used.
When arranging and adjusting the tools, the most simple
tools should, generally, be set first. As a rule, these are the
circular form and cut-off tools which are held on the cross-
.slides.Before any of the tools are set, however, the collet and
feed finger should be changed for the size of work required,
the proper change-gears put on, and the driving belt placed
on the required step. After the feed finger and spring collet
have been put in place, the stock is inserted and pushed out
far enough so that it can be faced off with the circular cut-off
tool.

Setting Circular Form and Cut-off Tools. The cut-off

tool is then clamped to the toolpost and set with its cutting
edge as close as possible to the height of the center of the work.
The spindle is rotated and the end of the stock faced off,
 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

using lever 2K Fig. i, to operate the cross-side.

,
The illus-
tration shows an operator setting the cutting edge of a circu-
lar form tool to the height of the center of the work by means
of the adjusting nut L%. Care should be taken in setting the
circular form and cut-off tools, so that they will form the work
parallel and cut it off with a square face. This is accom-
plished by means of the adjusting screws a in the rear of the

toolpost, which can be adjusted when nut K$ is slackened

slightly.

Fig. 1. Operator setting a Circular Form Tool

In setting the tool on the front cross-slide, the cutting edge

should never be below the center of the work, but should be
set preferably above or at the height of the center. The cutting

edge of the tool on the rear cross-slide should be set just the
reverse in reference to the center of the work, when the latter
is running forward. When the work is running backward,
the position of the cutting edges of the tools on the front and
rear cross-slide should be reversed from that for the forward
 ADJUSTMENT OF BROWN & SHARPE MACHINE 151

rotation of the work. If the cutting

edges of the circular tools
are not set in the positions described, the work, when rotat-

ing, has a tendency to pull them around, thus increasing the

diameter of the work, and causing chattering.
When the circular form, tool used for finishing the work
is

to an exact diameter, the set-screw C3 should always be set

so that it will come in contact with the stop Z} 3 when the work
,

is turned to the desired diameter. In setting this stop, it should

be so adjusted that it will put a slight strain on the cross-

Mathinerj/

Fig. 2. Simple Method for Setting a Stock Stop

slide operating lever. The resulting action keeps the roll in

close contact with the cam, and thus assures the parts formed
being of the same diameter. When the circular form tool
wears slightly, the set-screw C$ can be adjusted back a slight
amount, and the strain which has been set up in the lever
will allow the tool to turn the work to the desired diameter.
The cross-slide is adjusted back and forth to bring the cross-
slide tools in contact with the work by means of split nut A,

which is locked by means of a screw. Gib Q 5 should be adjusted

so that there will be no unnecessary side play of the cross-
slide in the bed.
152 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

Setting the Stop. When the circular cut-off tool has been
set correctly, the chuck is opened by lifting the tripping lever,
and the stock is fed out the desired length by hand ;
this length

can be. easily measured off by the method shown in Fig. 2.

A flexible scale, the length of which depends upon the size of

the machine, is placed in an empty hole in the turret and
brought up against the inside face of the circular cut-off tool.
The cut-off tool is now brought up against the work by means
of the handle operating the cross-slide. It is then an easy mat-
ter to set the stock to the desired length. When this has been
done, the chuck is closed and the turret swung around so that
the stop comes in line with the stock.
When the stop is in this position, the
roll should be on the quick rise of the

lead cam so that, by rotating the cam,

the roll will rise up onto the lobe, thus
forcing the stop back into the turret the
required amount, where it can be locked
with the lock-screw provided for that
purpose.
When it is necessary to have the
length of the piece to within a limit
of o.oio inch or less, the stop A gives considerable trouble,
because the only, way in which it can be set is by tapping
it in or out, which is a rather difficult matter. A stop which
gives better results is shown at B. The parts a, b, and c are
made from machine steeland casehardened. The body a is

drilled and tapped for a screw the diameter of which is made

in accordance with the size of the machine in which the stop
is For the No. oo, d = T5^ inch; for
to be used : the No. o, d =
f inch; and for the No. 2, d = ^ inch.
For the No. oo machine, the number of threads per inch of
the screw should be thirty-two, which means that one revolu-
tion would give an adjustment of 0.031 inch. For the other
machines, the screw should have twenty threads per inch.
The stop proper, b, is made of hexagonal stock to fit the stand-
ard wrenches supplied with the machines. The nut c is made
 ADJUSTMENT OF BROWN & SHARPE MACHINE 153

of the same shape and from the same size of stock as b. By

having the stop hexagonal, as shown, it is an easy matter to
set it within 0.005 inch, by means of the faces on stop b, as
the relation of these faces to the nut can be noted, provided
the latter is held with a wrench while part b is rotated.
Setting a Hollow Mill or Box-tool. In setting a box-tool,
the bar should project out of the spring collet only far enough
for the machining operation, as otherwise the work will not

Fig. 4. Method of Operating Machine by Hand when Making Adjustments

be held rigidly, and will spring away from the cutting tool.
The cutting tool is first set to turn the work to within about

0.0005 or o.coi inch of the finished diameter; then the sup-

ports are forced up tightly into contact with the work and
clamped. It will be found that, when the stock is fed out to
the desired length, the supports bearing against the work
tightly, the tool turns it slightly smaller in diameter. The box-
tool cutter is brought in contact with the work by means of
the handle K^ Fig. i, on the No. oo machine, and by the lever
R 5 on the Nos. o and 2 machines, as shown in Fig. 7. These
154 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

levers should always be removed before engaging the driving

clutch.

Setting Centering Tools and Drills. When the drill used

than f inch in diameter, and is to pass entirely through
is less

the work, a centering or spotting drill should always be used.

The centering tool should be ground and set so that it will
not leave a teat in the work. It should also have an included

angle less than that used on the drill. To set the centering
tool, the holder carrying the tool is placed in the turret, the
latter swung down, the spindle stopped, and the centering tool

brought in contact with the work. The lead cam is then

rotated by handwheel V&, Fig. 4, until the roll rises up on to
the starting point of the lobe for feeding the centering tool
into the work. The holder is tapped back into the turret, so
that the point of the tool just clears the end of the work;
then the holder is clamped in the turret. If, upon trial, it
is found that the centering tool does not project in to the
required distance, it is a simple matter to bring it out. The
procedure given for setting the centering tool also applies to
setting a drill.
It is advisable to have a number of ground drills on hand,
and to use a gage for setting the drills, as shown in Fig. 3.
This gage is made from sheet steel about iV inch thick. The
dimension A is made equal to the distance that the drill is

required to extend out of the holder. If there is more than

one drill in the turret, which would be necessary when a deep

hole is to be produced, a gage of this kind should be made for

setting each drill. These gages should be marked according

to the position that the drill for which they are used takes
that is, "ist," "2nd," etc., and
in relation to the other drills;

kept in the same box as the other tools used on the job. If
this precaution is taken, no time will be lost in setting a drill,
because the machine need not be stopped.
Setting Counterbores and Reamers. A counterbore .pro-
vided with a leader should always be held in a floating holder.
Before setting the counterbore, the hole should be drilled; then
the procedure for setting centering tools should be followed,
 ADJUSTMENT OF BROWN & SHARPE MACHINE 155

except that the leader is inserted, bringing the face of the

counterbore in contact with the end of the work. Reamers
which are to produce deep holes should be held in floating
holders.

Setting Dies and Taps. Before a die or tap and its

holder are placed in the turret, the dogs should be set in posi-
tion to reverse the spindle in the correct relation to the thread-

ing lobe on the lead cam. The two parts of clutch M (see
Fig. i, Chapter II) should be engaged, so that the shaft
first

carrying the disk on which the dogs are located will be rotated
in step with the other driving mechanism of the machine. Then

FACE OF WE X

Machinery

Fig. 5. Turret-slide Operating Mechanism on Brown & Sharpe Machine

the shifter is pulled over and the main spindle started. The
lead cam is now rotated by means of handwheel F5 Fig. 4, ,

the operator also pressing his thumb against the turret-slide

and bearing on the turret base. While rotating the handwheel
F5 ,
notice when
the spindle reverses; and by keeping the
thumb in contact with the turret-slide one can tell when the
roll drops over the highest point of the lobe on the cam. When
the spindle reverses at the same instant that the roll drops
156 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

over the highest point of the lobe on the cam, the dog is set
in the desired position. This is illustrated graphically, for
setting a die, in Fig. 5. 'A button die, held in a holder, is shown
in position ready to start on the work. The face of the die
should be set the distance A from the end of the work. This
distance varies from tV to -3^ inch, depending upon the pitch
of the thread and the length of the threaded portion. The
detail view to the right shows the cam roll set just back of the

highest point of the lobe;

REAR CROSS- SLIDE when the roll is at this

point, the spindle should

reverse.
c
-SQUARE After the first setting, if

found that the die does

it is

not travel onto the work

far enough, the holder is

brought further out of the

turret. The same procedure
is followed in setting a tap,
except that it should be set

more carefully, only going

into the work a slight dis-
Machinery
tance when starting, and
Fig. 6. Use of a Square for Setting Raising the holder moved out of
Block
the turret until the desired
depth reached.
is It is sometimes found necessary, after

setting the tripping dogs, to adjust them slightly, especially

when using the drawout type of die or tap-holder. The turret
should not be indexed until the die or tap is clear of the
work.
Setting Swing Tools and Taper-turning Tools. Swing
tools are used for both internal and external cutting, and are

operated under three different conditions: i. The cutting

tool is fed into the work from the cross-slide alone. 2. The

cutting tool is fed longitudinally by the turret. 3. The cutting

tool is fed inward by the cross-slide and longitudinally by the
turret. For the first condition, the raising block need not be
 ADJUSTMENT OF BROWN & SHARPE MACHINE 157

set in any particular relation to the axis of the spindle. When

straight turning produced under the second condition,
is to be
the face of the raising block should be set parallel with the
axis of the spindle. For the third condition, when the work
is to be turned taper, the face of the raising block should be
set at an angle with the axis of the spindle.
is shown a simple method of setting the face of the
In Fig. 6
raising block parallel with the axis of the spindle. An ordinary
adjustable square is held against the face of the rear cross-
slide, and screw A is adjusted until the block is set correctly,

Fig. 7. Testing Position of Raising Block by means of Dial Indicator

after which screw B is tightened. This method can be used

when not necessary to have the raising block set exactly
it is

parallel with the axis of the spindle.

A better and more accurate method is shown in Fig. 7.
Here a dial test indicator B is
1

used. A split bushing is inserted

in one of the holes in the turret, and a bent rod with the indi-
cator is held in it. The finger of the indicator is brought to
bear against the face of the raising block C, and the turret is
traversed by handle R$ on the Nos. o and 2 machines, and by
using handle K^ Fig. i, on the No. oo machine, inserting it
in the turret traversing lever. While the turret is being trav-
ersed back and forth, the movement of the needle on the dial
is noted, and the screw A adjusted until no movement is

transmitted to the needle.

158 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

The
setting of the raising block for operating a taper turn-
ing tool or a swing tool for taper turning is generally done by
the cut-and-try method, the first time the tools are set up.
Most operators, when setting up a job for the second time, use
"
what is called a set piece" to set the tools by. This is a piece
of work which has been made correctly to size, but which is
not entirely cut off, as shown at C in Fig. 6. It is gripped in
the collet, and the turning tool as well as the circular form and
cut-off tools are set to it.
General Method of Setting-up Screw Machine. To illus-
trate the method followed in setting-up a Brown & Sharpe
automatic screw machine, let it be assumed that a set of cams
as illustrated in Fig. 8 have been designed and made for pro-

ducing a button-head screw on the No. oo machine. These

cams, together with the special and standard tools which are
numbered, are turned over to the operator. He also receives
a drawing similar to that shown in Fig. 8. Assume that the
machine has been set up for another piece of work, so that
it is necessary to dismantle it. The operator first removes
all the tools from the turret and the cams from the front and
rear end shafts. He also removes the spring collet by removing
the cap, and the feed- tube by lifting the latch; then he unscrews
the feed finger, which is threaded left-hand. The change-
gears are now removed, leaving the machine dismantled ready
for the new job.
To proceed, the operator first inserts the spring collet, puts
on the cap, and then screws the new feeding finger into the
feed-tube, and inserts the latter into the spindle. He then
puts the stock into the feed-tube, and places a suitable pipe
in the stand in which the stock is to revolve. This pipe should
be central with the feed-tubes, thus reducing the wear in the
hole of the latter. The belts are now placed on their proper
cones to give the desired spindle speeds. All belts should be
without rivets, and preferably should be laced with wire, as
this gives a smoother running belt. All the bearings should
be oiled with good machinery oil, and also the friction clutch.
The latter should be oiled at least twice a day.
ADJUSTMENT OF BROWN & SHARPS MACHINE 159
160 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

After the belts have been placed on the proper cones, the
collet, feed finger, etc., having been inserted, the change-

gears should be put in place. The handwheel is next put or

for operating the machine by hand. Before putting on the
cams, set the collet so that it has the proper grip on the stock ;

then open the collet again and push the stock out far enough
to be faced off by the cut-off tool. After closing the collet,
start the spindle and set the cross-slide circular form and cut-
off tools at the height of the center of the work, and in their

proper relation to each other. Next put on the front and rear
cross-slide cams, and if the job requires a threading operation,
as in this case, the shaft with the drum carrying the tripping

dogs for reversing the spindle should be connected with the

front camshaft.

Next, set in the cross-slides by adjusting nuts A 3, Fig. i,

so that the circular form and cut-off tools travel in to the re-

quired distance. Place the hollow mill in the turret, set it

correctly, and also set the tripping dog so as to revolve the

turret. Put the box-tool in the turret, set it, and also set the
dog for indexing the turret. Thethen set as previously
die is

described, and all the tripping dogs are set to index the turret
completely around. After all the tools have been set in their
proper relation, make a piece, except threading, by turning
the handwheel; at the threading operations, drop down the
die so that itdoes not pass onto the work. Gage the piece
thus made; if it is correctly to size, and the tripping dogs for
reversing the spindle and the die have been properly set,
throw the feed clutch by means of handle P (Fig. i, Chapter
II) and start the machine.
When is all used up, the chuck should be opened
the bar
by tripping the lever, and the turret revolved by withdrawing
the locking pin, so that it will not interfere with the short piece
left in the chuck, which should be driven out for the inser-
tion of a new bar. To insert the new bar, turn the handwheel
sufficiently to bring the shoulder of the feed-tube against the
end of the spindle, and push out the bar just far enough so
that its front end can be faced off with the cut-off tool. Now
 ADJUSTMENT OF CLEVELAND MACHINE 161

turn the turret back into position and start the machine by
throwing in the clutch. The ends of the rods of stock should
be ground to remove the burrs, thus insuring their entering
and feeding freely and evenly through the feed- tube. The
work should always be tested after the insertion of a new bar
of stock. If the parts made are short or thin, the tools will
become dull much more quickly; consequently, the work
should be tested more frequently in that case, so that any
errors be corrected as soon as possible.
may
Adjusting the Cleveland Automatic Machine. The setting-
up of a Cleveland automatic screw machine is principally a

Fig. 9. Turret-slide of Cleveland Automatic, which is Adjusted Along the Bed to

Suit the Various Lengths of Work and Turret Tools

matter of adjusting the cams on the cross-slide drum, as well as

the camscontrolling the variable tool feed and the stock feed.
Assuming that all the tools and other equipment that have
been used on previous jobs have been removed, the first step is

to insert the chuck. The hood on the nose, of the spindle is

firstremoved by a spanner wrench, and the chuck is then in-

serted, care being taken to remove all chips and heavy oil
which would retard its action. When the chuck is of the pad
type, it is only necessary to remove the pads and replace them
by those suited to the size of the stock that is to be handled.
After putting the chuck in place, the feed-tube is then taken
out and the desired size of shell or pads inserted. After
1 62 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

putting the chuck and feed-tube in place, the chuck is then

closed by hand and the cross-slide tools are placed in their ap-

proximate positions, allowing about f inch clearance between

the front face of the chuck and the inner face of the cutting-off
or forming tools.
Adjusting the Turret Head. Following the insertion of
the chuck and feed-shell, the next move is to adjust the turret
head A (Fig. 9) along the bed to accommodate the length of
work to be turned. This adjustment is made by turning
screw B. The turret should be advanced to full stroke, that
is,to its extreme forward position, by means of shaft C oper-
ated by the same crank handle that adjusts screw B, and the
turret tool having the greatest body length should be used
in determining the position of the turret head on the bed. In

making this adjustment, the clamping screws which fasten

the turret head to the bed should be released; one of these
screws is shown at D
and the other is at the front end of the
turret head underneath the bed. These should be securely
tightened when the turret head is in the desired position.
Setting the Turret Tools. Turning our attention now to
the turret, the first tool to be set is the gage stop. This is used
for gaging the stock to the correct length and should be set
in relation to the cut-off tool. The proper procedure is to
measure from the outside face of the cut-off tool to the front
face of the gage stop, when the turret is advanced to its ex-
treme forward position. All the other tools are then placed
in the turret in their proper holes. In setting the turret tools,
the exact length required for the job is secured by measuring
from the face of the gage stop to the cutting tool, or from
the outer face of the cut-off tool to the front edge of the cut-
ting tool, with the turret advanced to its extreme forward
position, as before. No attention is given to the final setting
of the cutters in a box-tool, until all the tools have been set
in their proper relative positions.

Adjusting Cross-slide Operating Cams. The cams for

operating the cross-slide are of curved segment form and are
held on a drum F shown in Fig. 10. The procedure in setting
 ADJUSTMENT OF CLEVELAND MACHINE 163

these cams is to first advance the turret E to its full outward

stroke and then bring the cross-slide by hand to the approxi-
mate position that the forming tool will occupy when it has
finished taking a cut. The bellcrank lever G is then moved
until the roll touches the flange of the cam drum, and a mark
ismade with a lead pencil, indicating the position of the roll
on the surface of the drum. Then the machine is operated
again by hand, rotating the drum about one-half turn, and the
high point of the forming cam H is placed so that it coin-

Fig. 10.Cams on Cross-slide operating Drum, which are moved

around to the Required Position and Clamped by Cap-screws

cides with the circumference of the circle previously outlined.

The cam for operating the cut-off tool is located in the same

manner, and is generally the last to be set.

The relief cams / (only one of which is shown) that draw
the cross-slide to a central position, after the forming and
cut-off tools have finished their operations, are next adjusted.
The cap-screws fastening these cams to the drum F are re-
leased, and the cams are shifted around so that the high points
contact with the roll and hold the slide in the central position,
after which the cams are clamped, to the drum.
164 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

The which controls the exact posi-

cross-slide connecting-rod
tion of the cross-slideis adjusted as required by the move-

ment of the forming and cutting-off tools. Two adjusting

nuts provided with individual locking nuts are located on this
connecting-rod, and these are adjusted back and forth in rela-
tion to the central pin in the bellcrank lever G, in order to

carry the slide to its exact position. After making this adjust-
ment of the cross-slide, the machine should be turned one

Fig. 11. Adjustmentof Belt-shifter Dogs for Controlling Speed and

Direction of Spindle Rotation

complete cycle by hand, in order to insure the operator that

each tool has been properly placed.
Making the Speed Changes. The next point that requires
attention is the correct spindle speed to use. This is governed
largely by the material that is to be operated upon, and to
some extent by the tools that are to perform the operations.
Fig. ii illustrates the method of adjusting the belt-shifter dogs
to obtain the different spindle speeds required to suit the tools
that have been placed in position. When a job is to be threaded
 ADJUSTMENT OF CLEVELAND MACHINE 165

with a spring or button die, or a tap is to be used, it is neces-

reverse the spindle exactly
sary to set the reversing dogs to
at the time when the turret is at the full forward position.
In order to make
adjustment without danger of injuring
this

the tap or die, the bar stock should be removed from the

spindle,the turret advanced by hand to the extreme forward

position, and the belt-shifter dog set to reverse the spindle at

this point; then the turret isbacked up by hand and the
power feed is thrown in, care being taken to observe whether

Fig. 12. Adjustment of Compression Collar Nut for Varying the

Gripping Pressure of the Chuck on the Bar

the spindle reverses just as the turret starts on its backward

motion. If the spindle reverses a little too soon or a little

too late, the belt-shifter dog is adjusted slightly to correct

the time of reverse. When it is seen that the spindle reverses

exactly at the moment the turret starts on its backward

stroke, theadjustment is correct, and the bar stock may then

be replaced in the machine and the threading die will cut
correctly. No adjustment of this kind is necessary when self-
opening dies or collapsible taps are used, because, when the
thread is finished, the chasers clear the work, and it is not
necessary to reverse the spindle. There are several different
1 66 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

combinations and arrangements of spindle drives possible on

the Cleveland automatics.
Chucking and Feeding Adjustments. Assuming now that
the tools have been set in approximately correct positions,
the next step is to place the bar of stock in the spindle of the
machine and adjust the chuck to its proper grip on the work.
This is accomplished by means of an adjusting nut A shown

Fig. 13. Method of Regulating the Length of the Stock-feeding

Movement

in Fig. 12, which is located at the rear end of the spindle.

In the operator is shown turning the ad-
this illustration,

justing nut with the spanner wrench.* Before adjusting this

nut, it is necessary to release the binding nut B until compres-
sion nut A is released. Adjusting nut A is turned until the
chuck has sufficient grip on the work to prevent it from being
shifted by the action of the turning tools. When it is desired
to tighten the grip of the chuck, the adjusting nut A is turned
 ADJUSTMENT OF CLEVELAND MACHINE I6 7

toward the right; turning it toward the left loosens the grip
of the chuck. taken with the operator facing
This direction is

the spindle and standing at the end of the machine. When

the correct adjustment of the chuck on the work is obtained,
the binding nut B is tightened to lock the adjusting nut.
The next step is to set the stock-feeding mechanism so that

Fig. 14. Setting the Shifter Pins on the Regulating Drum so that
the Feeding Movements and the High-speed Movements occur at
the Proper Time

the bar will be fed out to the correct distance. Fig. 13 shows
the method of
making this
adjustment, which is secured
by
shifting the position of the stock feed-rod head A along the
shaft so that cam H
will engage with the roll B at a point
that will feed the stock out to the desired length. The last
J-inch movement of the stock feed-rod should take place
after the chuck opened. This will give time for the spring
is

chuck to open fully before the stock starts to feed to the gage
1 68 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

stop. The stock-feeding mechanism should be set to feed

about % inch more than the job requires, and the gage stop in
the turret will force the stock back to the desired length just
as the chuck is closing on the bar.

Setting the Feed-shifting Pins. The feed on the Cleve-

land automatic is changed from the slow to the fast speed
through a sliding clutch. This is secured by means of shifter

pins A
and B
(Fig. 14) which are held in T-slots in the rear
face of the regulating drum. In setting these feed shifter pins,
each tool in the turret is advanced by hand, so that it is brought
to within about 3*2 mcn f where it should start to cut. Then
the feed shifter pin B is moved around in the T-slot of the regu-
lating drum and
set to shift the clutch to the slow speed at
this point. In the case of a tap or die, the tool should be brought
to a position J inch from the face of the work. The feed shifter

pins A in the outer T-slot of the regulating drum control the

fast or idle movements of the machine, and should be set to
shift the clutch into the fast speed at the completion of each
tooling cut, whereas the pins B
in the inner T-slot control
the shifting of the clutch to the slow speed and are set to move
the clutch at the point previously described.
Adjustment of Feed-regulating Drum. One of the impor-
tant features of the Cleveland automatic the regulating
is

drum, which is used for securing separate feeds for each tool
in the turret and on the cross-slide, the feed per revolution of
the spindle being controlled by segment cams which can be
adjusted while the machine in operation.
is Fig. 15 shows
the setting or adjusting of the feed regulating cams 7. These
cams are attached to the flange of the regulating drum by
means of two cap-screws. The flange of the drum is slotted
to allow adjustment of the cams. By shifting the position of
the cams, any desired feed can be secured for each individual
tool. Moving them toward the outer edges decreases the feed,
and in the opposite direction increases the feed. The edges
of cams /, through the medium of a bellcrank lever, guide
the position of roll / automatically up and down between the
friction disks K which drive the turret drum and camshaft.
 ADJUSTMENT OF CLEVELAND MACHINE 169

This makes it possible to increase or decrease the tool feed

as required, to suit the material being cut and the type of
tools performing the operations.
The position of the pointer on indicator L determines the
location of the feed regulating cams when setting up a job for
the second time. The indicator is held on an arm moving up
and down on a post; this arm receives its motion from the
bellcrank lever which, in turn, is operated by the cams on the

Fig. 15. Adjustment of the Regulating Drum Segment Cams to

give the Required Rate of Feed for the Turret and Cross-slide
Tools

regulating drum. The position of the pointer is recorded

on a record sheet which should be filled out before changing
to other work, and used as a guide when setting up the same
job again. This record sheet shows the position ofall adjust-

able cams and gives all the necessary tooling data. In addition
to the adjustments previously mentioned, there are positive

stops for the front and rear of the cross-slide which need to be
set and which make extreme accuracy easily obtainable. These
stops are in the center of the slide and control the exact posi-
tion of the tools.
 170 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

Adjustment of Acme Multiple-spindle Machine. To

make clear the methods followed in setting-up and operating
" "
the Acme automatic multiple-spindle screw machine, a
representative piece will be taken as an example, and the
various steps to be followed in setting-up and operating the
machine for producing this piece will be dealt with in detail.
While there are many questions that will arise in setting-up
the machine for producing various parts, where actual experi-
ence in work of a similar character would in many cases elimi-
nate the necessity of experiment, if the operator has a general
idea of the various working mechanisms of the machine and
their relation to each other, he will experience little difficulty
machine for average work.
in adjusting the

Assuming that the machine has been set up on a piece of

work, the first thing that the operator does is to dismantle

those parts, tools, gears, cams, etc., which have to be changed
for every new job, leaving any cams or tools in position that
can be used on the new piece. As a rule, the spring chucks and
feed chucks are removed first and are replaced by those of the

proper and shape. Then the tools in the main tool-slide

size

and the side- and top- working tool-slides are removed. When
a straight blade cut-off tool is used in the cut-off tool-slide, it
generally can be used for more than one job, so that in many
cases this tool need not be removed. The cams on the main
drum, and also the cams for operating the side-working tool-
slides, are now removed and replaced by cams which will give
the required amount of travel. The back-gears for rotating
the end-working tools and the threading spindle are next
removed and replaced by gears that will give the proper speeds
'

for the work in hand.

If it is necessary for the operator to proceed without instruc-
tions, he must first decide on the best method of applying

the tools before he begins to set up the machine. As this is

frequently the case, it may be advisable to give a short de-

scription of some which have to be taken into con-
of the points
sideration when deciding on the best method of tooling the
machine for producing any certain part.
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE

Deciding on the Method of Tooling. The four spindles

of the Acme automatic multiple-spindle screw machine may
tend to confuse a new operator, and to give him the impression
that a clear understanding of the method of tooling is more
difficult to obtain than when using a single-spindle machine.

The chief reason for this is that all the tools are used at once;

ORDER OF OPERATIONS

FIRST" POSITION

I "SECOND" POSITION*

"THIRD" POSITION

"FOURTH" POSITION

PIECE TO MAKE 16 P.

MACHINE STEEL
Machinery

Fig. 16. Successive Operations for Producing a Hexagon-head Cap-

screw on a Multiple-spindle Machine

however, this fact frequently makes it possible to rearrange

the tools considerably on repeating a set-up, and what might
have been considered the best method of tooling a certain
piece when it was first made may prove inferior to the new
172 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

method. This possibility of improving upon the method of

tooling sometimes changes the order of operations to such an
extent as to entirely change the method of manufacture.
As an illustration, assume that it is necessary to produce
the cap-screw shown in Fig. 16, which is to be made from cold-
"
rolled hexagon steel, {J inch in diameter" across the flats.
As an ordinary cap-screw, the body need not be
this is just

shaved, but can be produced accurately enough for all prac-

tical purposes, by dividing the cuts on the body between

two box-tools, which are held in the end-working tool-slide.

The operation at A, which takes place in the "first" position,
is performed with a circular form tool and box-tool. The
circular form tool forms the head and "necks" or grooves
the piece, whereas the box-tool, held in the "first" position
tool spindle, turns one-half the length of the body.In choos-
ing the lead cam for the forward travel of the main tool-slide,
a one-inch cam is sufficient, owing to the fact that the two
box-tools are working on different bars at the same time. The
second box-tool cutter is set one inch further out from the face
of the main tool-slide than the first box-tool cutter, in order
to complete the turning on the body of the cap-screw.
Calculating the Production per Hour. As all of the end-
working tools come up to the work at the same time, it follows
that in most cases all four tools from the end would be at work
on different bars at the same time. In this case, the screw
only requires the use of three end-working tools two box-tools
and a die although a pointing tool could be used if neces-

sary to make the point on the screw after it is threaded. By

considering the operations on this cap-screw, it will be found
that the longest operation is that necessary to turn one-half
the length of the body; then to find the production per hour,

necessary to determine the speed at which it is best

it is first

to run the work. As a rule, ordinary cold-drawn stock can be

worked at from 65 to 75 surface feet per minute for forming
tools or box- tools. In this case, select 75 surface feet as a
suitable speed; then, assuming that the bar is round and of
a diameter equal to the distance across the flats, it will be
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE 173

found that a spindle speed of 420 revolutions per minute will

be about right. The table of spindle speeds accompanying
the No. 53 machine shows that 445 is the closest number ob-
tainable. As the speed will not be increased excessively, the

back-gears for this higher speed may be used.

The next step is to find the number of revolutions of the

spindle required for the box-tool to travel one inch along the
work, at a certain feed per revolution. The body diameter of
this cap-screw is f inch, while the diameter across the corners is

0.794 inch, giving a depth of cut of 0.209, or approximately

3*2 inch. If a feed of 0.004 mcn P er revolution is selected
and 0.040 inch allowed for the tool to approach the work, it
will be found that it will take 260 revolutions of the spindle
for the box-tool to travel the distance required.
There are several methods followed in obtaining the pro-
duction of the Acme automatic screw machine, one method
being based on the assumed output per hour, which can be
obtained by the following formula:

RX 60
r

in which P = assumed product in pieces per hour;

R = revolutions per minute of work-spindle;
r revolutions of spindle required to complete the

longest single operation.

Inserting the values previously obtained in this formula:

P = - = 103 (approximately).
260

In assuming this product, the time required to feed the

stock, index the cylinder, etc., was not considered, and, in-
stead of calculating the actual time required for these idle
movements, an approximation is made. Referring to the
change-gear table for the machine that is to be used, it will
be found that the next closest production to 103 is 98.5; then,
by reducing the production to 98.5 pieces per hour, allow suf-
ficient time to take care of the idle movements of the machine.
Another method is to calculate the time required for the
174 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

longest single operation in the manner just described, and then

determine definitely the actual time required to feed the
stock, index the cylinder, etc. This is added to the time
required for the longest single operation, the sum giving the
exact time required to produce one piece. This method,
while considerably longer than the other, has the advantage
ofworking on a definite basis and may be clearly understood
by those not entirely familiar with the construction and opera-
tion of this machine.

Spring Chucks and Stock Support. Assuming that the

machine has been dismantled and is to be arranged for the
operation shown in Fig. 16, the first thing to consider is the
insertion of the proper spring chucks and feed chucks for

feeding and holding the bars. A round chuck should never

be used for holding either square or hexagon stock, but a
chuck of the same shape as the work should always be used.
After' the feed chuck and spring chuck have been put in

place, the bars of stock are inserted in the spindles, the chucks
being opened and the bars pushed through, so that they ex-
tend far enough out of the chucks to allow for cutting off the
finished parts. As a rule, it is good practice to put the bars
of stock into pipes for guiding them, before the machine is
started. In putting the stock-supporting reel in place, when
the bars are already in the spindles of the machine, the reel
is simply slid back over the rear bracket until it passes the
end of the bars, and is then pushed forward again, the bars
passing into the pipes. Asatisfactory method is to leave the
reel in place and push the rods through the pipes into the

spindles, then slide the reel back slightly to facilitate chucking,

and replace it again in the running brackets before starting the
machine. When the stock is small in diameter, the ends pro-

jecting from the rear end of the machine should be guided

by the pipes of the reel, as this prevents damage to both the
machine and the operator, due to a slight twist in the bars
which causes them to rotate eccentrically and buckle.
Selecting and Changing the Back-gears. After the stock
has been inserted in the machine, and the chucks closed on it
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE 175

by cranking the machine, the next step is to obtain the desired

spindle speed. This is secured by removing the back-gears

shown in Fig. 5, Chapter III, and replacing them with the
gears which will give the proper speed for the work in hand.
For the operation shown in Fig. 16, a spindle speed of 445
revolutions per minute has been selected. Referring to the
spindle-speed table for the No. 53 machine, it will be found

that the gears should go on as follows: A 52; B 46;

C 26; D
32. In putting on the back-gears, see that they
do not mesh too closely.
Lead and Forming Cams.
Selecting the A feature of the
Acme automatic screw machine which should be borne in mind
is that the lead cam, located on the drum for governing the

forward advance of the main tool-slide, is not adjustable, but

is bolted to the drum. Now, for different work, these cam strips
which are all of the same length, but have different rises, are
put on the drum G (Fig. i, Chapter III) and clamped by
cap-screws. For making the cap-screw shown in Fig. 16, it
is necessary that the main tool-slide travel forward approxi-

mately one inch, so that in this case a lead cam having a rise
of one inch in its length is selected. To determine this rise,
measure both the narrow and wide ends of the cam strip,
and the difference between these two dimensions will be the
lead of the cam.
To forming cam for operating the forming tool,
select the
measure the distance between the largest and smallest diameters
of the work formed by it, and divide the result by 2. In this

case, it will be found that the forming cam should have a rise

of -32 inch. All forming cams are plainly marked on the end
with the rise for which they were laid out. It is not always
possible to select a forming cam which will give the rise to
within a few thousandths of an inch of that required, but this

does not make muchdifference, as the longest single opera-

tion governs the time required to make one piece, and all the
other operations are completed in that time. In this example,
as usually the case, the forming is one of the shorter opera-
is

tions and, therefore, it does not matter if the forming tool

176 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

moves a little farther than is actually required, provided its

inward movement is arrested at the proper point.
To select the cut-off cam, measure the diameter of the piece
to be cut off and at the same time make allowance for
the angle on the point of the cut-off tool, so that it will pass
the center of the work. For cutting off the cap-screw shown
in Fig. 1 6, a |-inch cut-off cam, which actually has a rise on
the cam of j inch for cutting through a bar ^ inch in diam-
eter, should be selected. The cut-off cams are all marked
on the end to correspond with the diameter of the piece to be
cut off.

Placing the Cams in Position. In placing the lead cam on

the drum, when the operations performed from the main tool-
slide are of a heavy nature, a backing-up strip should be fitted
into the groove in the drum, behind the lead cam, so as to
resist the thrust of the cutting tools. A
starting strip should
also be put on just in front of the point where the lead cam

strip starts to bring the tool-slide up to the work, and a take-

back cam wide enough to draw the end-working tool-slide back
sufficientlyto clear the work when the cylinder is indexing
should next be put in place. This starting strip is adjusted
even with the starting or narrow end of the lead cam, and is
used to bring the tools up quickly to the work. When the roller
" "
is working on the fast-angle cams, the camshaft is rotated
at an increased speed, so that all the movements when the
tools are not cutting are a great deal more rapid than the cut-

ting movements. This is done to reduce the idle time and is

accomplished through the medium of the clutch mechanism
described in Chapter III.
In placing the cut-off cam in position, it should be put on
the disk opposite the one on which the forming cam is held,
and the take-back cam is also put on the same disk and at-
tached by screws. There are two sets of holes in the disk for
the cut-off cam, and the position of this cam on the disk de-
" "
pends upon whether the fourth end tool position is in use
or not. The disk for the forming cam has only one set of holes,
so that it is impossible to adjust it.
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE 177

Setting the Circular Forming and Cutting-off Tools. The

circular forming tool A, Fig. 17, is held to an oblong-shaped
tool-holder B
by a stud and nut. This holder is held in the
slot in the forming slide by a strap. For locating the cutting
edge of the forming tool in the proper relation to the work, a
tool setting gage C is used. This is held by the operator against

Fig. 17. Setting the Cutting Edge of a Circular Forming Tool to

the Proper Height with a Tool-setting Gage

the bottom face of the forming tool holder, and the nut for
holding the forming tool to the holder is then tightened. The
holder is then placed in its proper position in the slot in the
tool-slide and clamped. To
bring the forming tool into its
correct relation to the work, the machine is cranked or turned

by hand until the roll is just over the starting angle on the
forming cam; then the screw in the back of the slide is adjusted
until theforming tool just clears the work.
178 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

The adjusting screw on the slide in which the forming tool

is held should be set to stop the slide just as the cam lever
clears the highest point of the cam. Usually it is good prac-
tice to
put a
slight tension on this lever (by adjusting
the screw a little farther in than necessary), so that, when the
extreme knife edge of the tool is removed, thus making the
work larger in diameter, a slight outward turn of the adjusting
screw will bring the work back to the required diameter.
The next step is to set the cut-off tool. This tool, when
of the blade type, is set so that its top cutting edge is on a
line with the center of the work. It should also be set in a
horizontal position relative to the forming tool, by adjust-

ing the screw in the slide, which is provided for that purpose.
After the form and cut-off tools have been set in approxi-
mately the correct relation to each other, the next step is to
set the form tool so that it will turn the work to the required
"
diameter. To do this, crank the machine" or turn the
camshaft by applying a hand crank to the worm-shaft, until
the wedge is disengaged from the wedge fingers; then push
the rod through the chuck until its end passes the outside
edge of the circular form tool. Continue cranking until the
rod is chucked and the roll on the lever operating the forming
slide is on the starting point of the cam rise. The form tool
can now be adjusted inward, the machine started, and a cut
taken. It is good practice to adjust the form tool to give the

required diameter, before going further. It is necessary to set

the cut-off tool to remove the formed ends during the adjust-
ment of the forming tool. After one piece has been cut off,
it can easily be seen whether the cut-off tool has been set in
the proper relation to the center of the stock.
Setting the Box-tools. Assuming that the forming and
cut-off tools have been properly set, place the box-tool in the
"first" position tool spindle. Then open the chuck and feed
out the stock. When the work is long or of small diameter,
it is in setting the box-tool, to feed the stock
good practice,
out only a short distance from the face of the chuck, to pre-
vent springing or bending of the bar while adjusting the tool.
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE 179

In setting the box-tool, release the rollers and set the front
turning tool to turn from 0.005 to 0.007 mcn smaller than the
proper diameter, after which adjust the rollers until they come
into light contact with the piece to be turned. Then by ad-

justing the front cutting tool upward slightly, the tool and
rollers will come into the proper relation with each other. In

Fig. 18. Setting the "First" Position Box-tool to turn to the Required Distance on
the Work

many cases, a slight additional adjustment of the box-tool

cutter is necessary after the machine has been started and the
power feed is used.
Several methods are in common use for setting the box-tool
to turn to the desired distance. One of these is to crank the
machine until the roll just starts on the rise of the lead cam;
then to operate the screw A, Fig. 18, in the tool spindle, until
the box-tool cutter B just touches the work which it will be
 l8o SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

assumed has been fed out After adjust-

to the required length.

ing in this manner, tighten the screw holding the box-tool in

position in the tool-holder. After the "first" position box-tool
has been set in position in proper relation to the work, the
power feed may be thrown in to index the cylinder by oper-
ating the starting clutch lever at the front of the machine.
"
This will bring the rod just operated upon into the second"
position. Now adjust the gage stop and set the feed stop
on the lever operating the feeding mechanism, so that the
stock will be fed to the length of the piece to be made, being
sure to ascertain beforehand that the feed-tube is withdrawn

sufficiently to insure the end of the rod coming in contact with

the gage stop. When the stop has been properly set, the stock
fed the proper distance, and the cam roll-holders set so as to

give ample clearance for all tools, crank the machine until
the cam roll beneath the main tool-slide is in contact with
the start of the rise on the lead cam.
"
After having set the first" position box- tool, again crank
"
the machine until the forming tool and first" position box-
tool have completed their operations and another indexing
of the cylinder is about to take place. After this indexing
has proceeded about halfway, place the "second" position box-
tool back far enough to clear the stock during the indexing

operation. Continue cranking until the cam roll is in contact

with the cam, as before; then adjust the "second" position
box-tool so that it will "pick up" or continue the cut at the

position where the "first" position box-tool finished, and

at the same time, set the rest and front cutting tool to the
diameter formed by the "first" position box- tool. To bring
the box-tool out so as to turn up the correct length, an ordi-
nary scale C, as shown in Fig. 18, is sometimes used. Some
operators prefer the "scale method" of setting the end- working
tools, instead of working from the end of the bar.
When the screw is to be pointed, a pointing tool can be
"
held in the "first" position box- tool, or, if the fourth" posi-
tion tool spindle is not used, a pointing tool can be used from
this position. Assuming, in this case, that the pointing tool
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE i8l
" "
is in the position box- tool and that the gage stop,
first

forming tool, box- tools, etc., have been properly set, release
the set-screw which holds the pointing tool. Then crank the
machine until the tool-slide travels forward the required dis-
tance, and adjust the pointing tool out until it will remove
the desired amount of metal from the end of the screw.
Selecting Change-gears. After all the tools previously
mentioned have been set in their proper positions, several
pieces are made from the bars, the machine being operated
by power feed. Then change-gears are selected to give the
desired rate of production. As a rule, in setting up an Acme
automatic screw machine, the gears which have been decided
upon to give the desired production are not put on until all
the tools have been properly set and the various parts of the
machine work in the proper relation to each other. Most
operators set-up the machine on a "slow" set of gears, and,
after the machine has been set correctly, put on the gears
which will give the desired production. This change-gear
mechanism was described in connection with Fig. 4, Chapter
III. For the piece chosen as an example (see Fig. 16), it was
decided that a production of 98.5 pieces per hour would be
suitable. Referring to a table of change-gears, it will be found
that the first gear on the shaft should have 36 teeth; the second
gear on the shaft, 82 teeth; the first gear on the stud, 74 teeth;
and the second gear on the stud, 28 teeth. After these gears
have been put in their proper positions, the next step is to
set the threading spindle.

Setting the 'Threading Spindle. On the Acme multiple-

spindle automatic screw machine, the work-spindle is held

stationary while a right-hand thread is being cut, and the die-

spindle carrying the threading tool is rotated. When backing
off the die or tap from the work, the threading spindle is held

stationary and the work-spindle is rotated. The manner in

which this is accomplished was explained in connection with
the description of the threading mechanism in Chapter III.
In setting the tools for threading, before starting the ma-
chine, see that the clearance between the ratchet and pawl
182 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

extension anywhere from yg- to

is inch, when the pin block
-g-

on the holder and the pin in the spindle are placed end to end
(after the pin has been adjusted). It is very important that
" "
this precaution be taken, as a hang up between these two
points might occur, resulting in the stripping of the teeth
in the gears driving the holder, should this adjustment not be
made properly. For this example, the front face of the die
should be set almost in line with the cutting tool held in the
"
box- tool in the first" tool position, when the die-spindle is
as far back as the tool-slide will let it go.
The lead cam does not advance the threading tool at the
required rate of feed, as determined by the thread, but pro-
vision is made so that the die follows the lead of the thread.
It therefore, unnecessary to take the lead cam into considera-
is,

tion, as far as the feeding of the die-spindle is concerned.

The pins which actuate the die-holder for driving the
die

threading die should be set so as to carry the die up far enough

after the end of the travel of the lead cam has been reached,
before allowing the die to rotate freely. In this case, the lead
cam only travels approximately one inch, while the travel of
the die is ij inch, so that it will be necessary to set out the die
pins. Afterthe tools have been properly adjusted and are
all

working satisfactorily, set the cam dogs which shift the clutch
to the direct drive, so that they operate at the proper time in
relation to the cutting tools and the indexing of the cylinder.
As a general rule, the clutch should be shifted to the direct drive
when the die or tap is just free from the thread and the rolls
have cleared the cutting-off and forming cams. The clutch again
shifts to the gear drive just before the tools begin to operate.
Calculating Speed of
Work-spindles. The speed
of the

work-spindles obtainable by direct drive and through the back

gearing may be obtained from tables, but it might be pos-
sible, in some cases, to secure more satisfactory speeds with
gears having a different number of teeth than those given in
the table. The calculations used in obtaining the proper gears
to use for different speeds will be explained. The work-
spindles are rotated from the main drive shaft through gear-
 ADJUSTMENT OF ACME MACHINE 183

ing, the gears on the main shaft driving the spindles through a
friction gear that can be disconnected from the spindle when
it is necessary to stop rotation for performing operations
its

such as threading, cross-drilling, milling, etc. As there are

only two gears involved in this calculation, the method of
obtaining the speeds of the spindle is simple and can be obtained
from the following formula :

K=
rXN
-
,
n
in which R= revolutions per minute of work-spindles;
r = revolutions per minute of top or main drive shaft;
N = number of teeth in gear on top or main drive shaft;
n = number of teeth in friction gear.

For example, on the No. 54 machine, R= - - = 373

45
revolutions per minute, approximately. In the calculations
to follow, particular reference will be made to the Nos. 54
and 55 machines, as these two sizes meet general commercial
requirements.
"
Calculating Speeds of Threading and Second Position "
Tool Spindles. A
notable feature of the Acme multiple-
spindle automatic screw machine is that, for threading, the
work is stopped and the die is rotated, but, in backing off,
the reverse is the case. In order to fulfill these requirements,
it isnecessary to gear up the threading spindle to the main
drive or top shaft. Two speeds for each speed of the top or
main drive shaft are possible by shifting the gearing, one speed
being obtained by driving direct through the sliding gear on
the main drive shaft to the gear on the threading spindle, and
the other by driving through an intermediate and a compound
gear. The following formula is used for obtaining the speed
of the spindle when driven direct :

7?
~r~'
in which
RI = revolutions per minute of threading spindle (direct drive) ;

r = revolutions per minute of top or main drive shaft;

1 84 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

^Vi = number of teeth in sliding gear on top or main drive shaft;

t = number of teeth in gear on threading spindle (also called
direct gear).
As an example, assume that the speed of the top or main
drive shaft

RI = -
480
-
X
55
is

26
480 revolutions per minute, then

=227 revolutions per minute, approximately.

:

is

in
Rz =
which
:

KZ = -
The formula for obtaining the speed of the threading spindle,
when driven through the intermediate and compound gear,
as follows
r X Ni X T
iX /

revolutions per minute, of threading spindle (gear-driven)

,

r = revolutions per minute, of top or main drive shaft ;

NI = number of teeth in sliding gear on main drive shaft ;

T= number of teeth in pinion gear ;

n\ = number of teeth in back-gear ;

= / number of teeth in gear on threading spindle (also called

direct gear).
The "second position" tool spindle which can be used for

threading, necessary, and which

if many cases is used for in

driving small drills at their proper peripheral speeds, is also

rotated from the top or main drive shaft through gears. The

speed of this spindle can be obtained by the following formula :

rX N,
*3=~,
in which
Ra= revolutions per minute of "second position" tool spindle ;

r = revolutions per minute of top or main drive shaft ;

Ni = number of teeth in sliding gear on main drive shaft ;

"
T\ = number of teeth in gear on "second position tool spindle.
Assume that the speed of the main drive shaft is 480 revolu-
tions per minute, then :

480 X 26
= 346 revolutions per minute, approximately.
36
1 86 SETtlNG-TJP SCREW MACHINES

Main Camshaft Computations. The main camshaft on

the Acme automatic carries the cams for operating the vari-
all

ous slides, spindle-stopping mechanism, etc., and also the fan

gear for indexing the cylinder. As shown in Fig. 19, which is
a developed plan view of the camshaft with the drums and
cams on it, it will be seen that one revolution of this camshaft
completes one cycle of the machine; that is, one revolution
of the camshaft would mean the completion of one piece, or
four revolutions the complete indexing of the cylinder. The
rotation of the camshaft is not connected directly with the
rotation of the work-spindles, but indirectly the cams on it

govern the rate of travel of the tools on either the top- or side-
working tool-slides, and also the end-working slide. It is,

therefore, necessary to determine for each job the relation be-

tween the speed of the spindle and the speed of the camshaft
in order to determine the production per hour, minutes, or
seconds.
The camshaft is driven from the main drive pulley through
bevel gearing and a Johnson clutch. The clutch forms the
connection between the direct drive and gear drive to the
camshaft, so that it is possible to rotate the camshaft at a
much higher speed for the idle movements than the speed at
which it is when the tools are cutting. The speed
operating
of the camshaft, when driven direct, may be obtained from a
table, accompanying the machine, giving the number of pieces
produced per hour, as this number will represent the number
of revolutions the camshaft makes in one hour. For example,
the camshaft on the Nos. 54 and 55 machines has a speed of
576 revolutions per hour. Dividing 576 by 60, the camshaft
will be found to make 9.6 revolutions per minute or 0.16 revo-
lution per second. As there are 360 degrees in a circle, and
as any point on the cam drum makes 0.16 revolution per sec-

ond, the number of degrees passed through in this time equals

o.i 6 X 360 = 57.6 degrees, approximately. Now, if it takes
one second for the camshaft to rotate through a space of 57.6
degrees, the time required to complete the idle movements
can easily be found, when the number of degrees taken up by
1 88 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

the idle or non-productive movements are obtained. By refer-

ring to Fig. 20, in which the various drums and cams have been
laid out in their respective positions, and at the point in their
rotation at which the machine is indexing, it will be seen that
the non-productive movements come in between the time that
the lead cam A starts to operate and finishes. This applies
when the longest single operation is performed by the end-
working tools or from the forming slide. Where the longest

operation is performed from the cutting-off

slide, the idle time
is less because there are thirty more degrees taken up on pro-

ductive work. It is safe to assume that, on 75 per cent of the

jobs set up on this machine, the longest operation is performed
from the end-working tool-slide; hence, the calculations can
be based on the number of degrees of drum surface between
the starting and finishing points of the cam. This is found to
be 360 220 =
140 degrees. When the longest single opera-
tion is performed from the cut-off tool-slide, the idle move-
ments occupy no degrees of thedrum circumference.
Time required for Idle Movements of Machine. The
idlemovements of the machine are those required for advanc-
ing and withdrawing the tools to and from the work and
indexing the cylinder. The stock is fed out and the chuck
closed while the cylinder is indexing on the smaller machines
and in the "first position" on the larger machines, but, in all

cases, as can be seen from a study of Fig. 20, the idle move-
ments more than compensate for the time required to feed
out the stock. The three main idle or non-productive move-
ments of the machine should be considered in calculating the
actual time required for producing a given part. These
movements are all confined to the space between B and C on
the circumference of the cam drum. As all the non-productive
movements take place while the camshaft is being driven at
itshighest speed and not through
direct through the clutch
the change gearing it is necessary to determine what part

of the cam circumference these movements occupy and also

the speed at which the drum is being rotated when driven
direct.
 ADJUSTMENT OF DAVENPORT MACHINE 189

As previously determined, the idle movements or the space

on the cam circumference from B to C equals 140 degrees, and,
on the Nos. 54 and 55 machines, the camshaft, when driven
direct, is rotated at a speed of 0.16 revolution per second.

If it takes one second for the camshaft to rotate through

57.6, or
-
a space of 57.6 degrees, it will require 140 2.43
seconds, approximately, for the idle movements. This time,
if added to the time required for the longest single operation,

will give the actual time required to complete one piece.

Setting-up the Davenport Automatic. The method of

setting-up and adjusting the Davenport multiple-spindle au-

tomatic screw machine illustrated in Fig. 10, Chapter III,
will be explained by considering the method of procedure for

making a J-inch machine screw. The successive order of the

operations and the tools to be used should first be determined.
In this case, the order of operations is indicated by the dia-

grams A to E, inclusive (Fig. 21) and the finished product is

shown at F. The principal operation is that of rough-turning
the body of the screw, and, in order to reduce the time per
piece, two box- tools are used as indicated at A and B. The
tool in the first spindle turns one-half of the required length,
and then the remaining half is rough- turned by the other
box-tool in the second spindle. When the first box- tool is at
work, a forming tool on the cross-slide cuts away the metal
on both sides of the screw-head, as the illustration indicates.
The finishing cut is taken by a single box- tool in the third
spindle (diagram C) ;
this tool is given twice the feed of the

roughing box-tools, so that the finishing cut will be completed

in thesame length of time required for the two roughing cuts.
A die is next used to cut the thread, as indicated at Z>, and
then the finished screw is severed from the bar of stock by

the cutting-off tool, as shown at E. The end or point of the

stock is also rounded by the cutting-off tool, preparatory to
making the next successive screw.
Speed for Work-spindles. The machine
geared so that is

the work-spindles will revolve at whatever speed is considered

essential to economical production. For ordinary screw stock,
 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

a surface speed of about 100 feet per minute is considered a

fair average for this machine. The material, in this case, is
-j^-inch hexagonal steel (a special size for a J-inch screw), so
that the surface speed may be based upon a diameter of y76

Machinery

Fig. 21. Examples of Work done on Davenport Five-spindle Automatic

inch. Byreferring to the table of spindle speeds and corre-

sponding change-gears to use, it will be found that the spindle
speed should be 840 revolutions per minute, which speed is
obtained by equipping the machine with a driving gear having
28 teeth and a driven gear having 36 teeth. This speed of 840
 ADJUSTMENT OF DAVENPORT MACHINE 191

revolutions per minute will give a surface speed of approxi-

mately 100 feet per minute.

Number of Revolutions for Each Operation. The next
step is to determine the number of revolutions the spindles
make for each of the operations. The number of revolutions
which the spindles make for any given operation depends

upon the feed of the tool per revolution and the length of the
part to be turned therefore, it is necessary to first decide what
;

feeds are to be used. For rough-turning, the feed usually varies

from 0.004 to o.oio inch per revolution of the spindles and, in
this case, it will be assumed that a feed of 0.0075 mcn * s to be
used for roughing and twice that amount, or 0.015 m ch) for the
finishing cut, so that the box-tool which takes this finishing
cut will traverse inch or over the entire body of the screw,
i-jf
while each of the roughing tools is feeding f f inch or one-half
the length of the screw body. By dividing the length of the
turned surface by the feed per revolution, it will be
found that approximately 121 revolutions are necessary,
(1.8 1 2 -f-
0.015)
= I2I > nearly. Adding two revolutions to
allow for a little clearance, for indexing, between the ends of
the tools and the stock, gives a total of 123 revolutions of the
spindles.
After having determined the number of revolutions of the
spindles for the longest operation, the machine is equipped
with change-gears at U, Fig. 13, Chapter III, as indicated by
"
a table accompanying the machine. Under the heading Revo-
lutions per Minute of Spindles" and in the column headed
"840" (which represents the selected speed of spindles and
revolutions per minute) will be found the figure 123 represent-

ing the number of spindle revolutions required for the forward

feeding movement of the tools. Opposite 123, the necessary
change-gears are listed and also the rate of production. These
gears transmit motion to the camshafts. In this case, the gear
on the driving shaft has 20 teeth and the gear on the driven
shaft, 44 teeth. The time in seconds required to make one
piece, which includes the time for withdrawing the tools and
indexing, is 1 2 seconds per piece.
192 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

Selection of Cams. Seventeen cams are furnished with

the Davenport multiple-spindle automatic machine. Six of
these cams are intended for turning operations, two for point-

ing the ends of the stock, four for threading operations, and
five for forming and cutting-off operations. The rise or throw
of the cams varies ;
for instance, among the cams used for

turning, there one having a rise of

is ^
inch (used for center-
ing and facing operations) another having a rise of ^ inch two
; ;

others, a i-inch rise, and two additional cams, a 2 -inch rise.

If the travelrequired for the tool differs from the rise or throw
of the cam, the motion of the tool is varied by changing the
position of the link connecting the cam lever with the tool
spindle, as previously explained in Chaper III. When setting-
up a machine, cams are selected for each operation which are
nearest to the required size as to rise, but which have a rise,
in every case, that is equal to or greater than the travel re-

quired for the tool. When these cams have been placed in
position, the adjustable blocks at the upper ends of the cam
levers are set so that each tool will travel the exact distance

required on the work. After making these adjustments, the

feed for most of the tools will be finer than those first selected,

but, as the time for making a screw is governed by the longest

operation, an increase in the number of revolutions that the
spindles make during some of the shorter cuts simply means
that these tools will, in most cases, leave a finer finish and will
owing to the feed reduction.
last longer,

Adjustments for Threading Operation. The rise of the

cam to use for operating the threading die spindle and the
position of the link-block on the cam lever are shown by a
table. This table shows what the rise of the cam should be
for a given number of threads per inch, and also the position
of the link-block on the cam lever. The figures denoting the
cam rise and the graduation on the cam lever are listed under
the required number of threads per inch to be cut, and oppo-
site the number of turns which the work-spindle makes while

a part is being machined. When the cam-lever block is cor-

rectly set, the die-holder will follow up the thread, although
 ADJUSTMENT OF DAVENPORT MACHINE 193

the clutch pins of the die-holder permit a slight axial move-

ment, so that the die is free to follow the lead of the thread.
When the die is running off of the thread, the spindle carrying
the die-holder is moved in the opposite direction by the cam,
and the die-holder is provided with a ratchet which catches
on the first revolution after the threading clutch is shifted from
the low-speed gear to the high-speed gear. No adjustment of
the cam which controls the clutch of the threading spindle
is required for any pitch, as the clutch is always shifted just

after the die-cam has reached the highest point.

Record of It is good practice, preparatory
Operations.
to setting-up the machine for producing a new part, to lay
out the operations as shown in Fig. 21, and then record the
order of the operations, the tools used, etc., so that the machine
can readily be adjusted or set-up for reproducing the same
part. Such data are also useful for comparative purposes,
when estimating on other work which is similar in size and
shape. The data recorded on page 194 apply to the operations
shown by the diagrams A to E, Fig. 21. As will be seen, a
standard box-tool set to turn to 0.265 inches in diameter is
used for the first roughing cut. This tool is actuated by a
cam having a rise of one inch. As the tool is to turn one-half
of the length of the screw body, or ff inch, the block of the
cam lever is set to the 0.9 division, thus reducing the amount
that the tool travels. For the forming operation, which is

performed by same spindle posi-

a tool in the cross-slide at the
tion, a -fz-inch cam used, and, as the feeding movement of the
is

tool is only % inch, the cam-lever block is set at the 0.8 di-
vision. In a similar manner, the data for the other turning
tools is recorded. Ordinarily, it is easier to make all the neces-
sary calculations beforehand and then adjust the machine
accordingly, than to attempt to set the machine as each cal-
culation is made.
Turning a Trial the machine has been
Piece. After
equipped with the necessary cams, chucks, etc., it is cus-
tomary to put a single bar of stock in one spindle and adjust
each tool, as the head is indexed to the different positions,
 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

so that all the tools have the correct movement in a length-

wise direction. These adjustments are made by means of the
turnbuckles G which are shown in Fig. n, Chapter III. After
all ofthe tools in the end-working spindles, as well as those on
the cross-slides and swinging arms, in case it is necessary to
use the latter, are adjusted to approximately the correct posi-
tion, the five bars of stock should be inserted in the machine

spindles and the final adjustments made.

Order of Operations and General Data for Producing Screw shown at F,

Fig. 21

Regulation of Stock-feeding Movement. The stock is

always fed against a stop which forms a part of the box-tool

"
or other tool in the first spindle or position and the A"
length to which the stock is fed out of the chuck is regulated
by a screw at the rear end of that tool spindle. This screw
istapped into the spindle carrier, and the head of the screw
engages a latch on the tool spindle and prevents the spindle
from moving back farther than is necessary for the length
of stock required. When it is desired to draw the tool spindle
farther back, this latch attached to the rear end of the spindle
is lifted. The turnbuckle for this spindle is adjusted for the
position of the cutting tool independently of the stop-screw
 ADJUSTMENT OF DAVENPORT MACHINE 195

just referred to. The nut at the extreme left-hand end of the
crankshaft should be adjusted to feed the stock about | inch
farther than is represented by the length of the finished piece,
to insure a firm contact of the stock against the stop.
Use of Thread Spindle for Other Operations. When the
work does not require a threading operation and it is desired
to use some other kind of tool in the threading spindle, one of
the change-gears which rotates the threading-spindle driving
shaft can be removed, and a square-head set-screw engaged
with a tooth space of the intermediate gear through which
the threading clutch gears are rotated. By locking the inter-
mediate gear in this way, the clutch gear teeth will act as keys
and prevent the threading spindle from turning around, but
permit it to slide freely, so that it can be used for holding an
end-working tool the same as any of the other spindles.
Independent Feeding Movement. An example of work
done on the Davenport multiple-spindle automatic machine
is shown by the series of diagrams G to K, inclusive, in Fig. 21,

which illustrate the advantages of a separate feed for each of

the turret and cross-slide tools. The operations for the first
spindle position are performed by a forming tool on the cross-
slide and an end-facing tool. The tool-slide advances o.oio
inch for facing the end accurately and smoothly, and the form-
ing tool rough- turns the work, leaving about o.oio inch on the
diameter and width of the groove for finishing. The next suc-
cessive operation is indicated at H. The tool-slide advances
0.040 inch for centering the work, and it has a long dwell at

the end of ^ the feeding movement, thus insuring an accurate

center. A forming tool also turns the part to the required
diameter and the groove to the finished width. A stop-screw
on the toolpost comes against a compensating stop for each
spindle, to insure uniformity of diameters. At the next spindle
position indicated at /, the tool-slide advances jfa i ncn f r
drilling the hole. This drill is revolved rapidly by a drilling
attachment driven by a round belt from the countershaft, so
that the actual cutting speed is the speed of the work plus the
speed of the drill spindle. The tool-slide next advances -jV
196 SETTING-UP SCREW MACHINES

inch for finish-turning a shoulder as at /;

this shoulder must

be very accurate and it was roughed out by the cutting-off

tool at the time that it severed the previously finished part.
For the final operation shown at K, the tool-slide advances

f inch for reaming the hole. As but little metal is removed, the
feed is rapid. When the operation is completed, the reamer is

quickly withdrawn and the cutting-off tool, which has been at

work in the meantime, severs the piece which drops from the
bar.
 CHAPTER VI

ATTACHMENTS FOR AUTOMATIC SCREW MACHINES

THE variety of work for which an automatic screw machine

is applicable may be greatly increased by the addition of
auxiliary attachments. Some of these attachments are de-
signed to do work which could not be done with the ordinary
tool equipment, thus enabling the machine to complete a series
of operations and produce finished parts without a second

operation upon another machine. Other attachments are

designed for automatically feeding separate parts, such as
castings or forgings, to the machine or for transferring pieces

requiring a second operation to an attachment operating in

conjunction with the machine. While screw machines made
by different manufacturers are often equipped with attach-
ments for doing the same class of work, these attachments
usually vary considerably in their design, as they are con-
structed for application to a certain type of machine. Some
of the more common attachments will be described.
Screw Slotting Attachments. The screw slotting attach-
ment is used for milling a screw-driver slot across the head of
a screw, after the latter has been turned and threaded by the
regular mechanism of the machine. One of these attachments
is shown applied to a Brown & Sharpe machine in Fig. i.
This attachment is designed to take screws as they are cut
off by the machine and to slot them automatically, thus elimi-
nating a second operation in another machine and completing
the screw in practically the same time that would be required
to finish it without the slotting operation. The saw which
does the slotting is mounted on a slide and is driven by a round
belt from the overhead works. The arm F which transfers
the screw from the machine spindle to the saw is actuated by
a cam K
through a lever connecting with rockshaft C. The
197
i 98 ATTACHMENTS
"
screws are held in a bushing carried in a floating holder"
located at the end of the transfer arm F. This transfer arm is

swung down so that the bushing is in line with the work in

the main spindle, and the bushing engages the work before it

is severed from the bar of stock. After the screw is cut off,

FACE OF CHUCK

Fig. 1. Front Elevation and Plan of Screw-slotting Attachment for Brown

& Sharpe Screw Machine

the arm swings up to the position shown in the illustration.

The rockshaft C is then fed longitudinally towards the slotting

saw by means of the advancing cam / which imparts motion
through lever E. When the slot in the screw-head has been
cut and arm F drops back, the screw is removed from the bush-
ing by the ejector K\, which is simply a piece of sheet steel
fastened to the attachment. The transfer arm F is accurately
 SLOTTING ATTACHMENTS 199

located with reference to the spindle by set-screw E\, which

engages block F\, whereas the set-screw G\ and block HI
control the position of the arm with reference to the saw.

Slotting and
Slabbing Attachment. The attachment
shown in position on the Cleveland automatic screw machine
in Fig. 2 is used for slotting the heads of screws, slabbing

operations, and similar work. The operation is done while

the turret tool is working, so that no time is lost. The opera-
tion on a screw is as follows After the part has been finished,
:

and is ready to be cut off, the turret advances carrying the

Fig. 2. Slotting and Slabbing Attachment on Cleveland Automatic

screw-slotting conveyor A which takes hold of the screw as

it is severed from the bar. The stock is then fed forward and
the turret tools begin on the next piece at the same time, the
;

conveyor A, carrying the screw that has just been cut off, brings
the head into contact with the slotting saw B. By the time
the turret tool has finished the saw has also completed
its cut,

its operation. The finished part is ejected from the conveyor

by means of a pin C, upon the backward stroke of the turret.
The slotting arm D carrying the saw B
a slight distance
is

back from the face of the chuck hood, so that it clears all the
turret tools, except when the conveyor A, carrying the screw,
comes into line with it.
200 ATTACHMENTS

The saw spindle is driven by a belt from the countershaft.

The drum which carries the chuck opening and closing cams
has, in addition, another cam which operates the slotting
arm D. This cam moves the saw toward the turret when the
conveyor A, held in the turret, advances with the part to be
slotted. The slotting arm is returned to its original or neutral

position by the coil spring shown, after

the roll on arm D
comes out of contact with the operating cam.
To fit up this attachment for slabbing operations, two slab-

bing cutters are mounted on the saw spindle in the same

Fig. 3. Index Drilling Attachment on a Brown & Sharpe Automatic

Screw Machine

manner as the slotting saw B, and the same movement takes

place as in slotting. It is also possible by means of a special

slotting arm D
to cut a groove or slot of any shape or depth

lengthwise of a piece by raising the center of the saw spindle,

so that the work will pass under the milling cutter or saw.
Index Drilling Attachment. The Brown & Sharpe index
drilling attachment shown in Fig. 3 is designed to drill radial

holes in such work as binding posts, capstan screws, studs,

bushings, and similar pieces, which are made in the automatic

screw machines. An
adjustable swinging arm takes the pieces
as they are severed from the bar and transfers them to the

spindle of the drilling attachment where they are securely held

 DRILLING ATTACHMENTS 2OI

in a spring chuck for drilling. The movements of the arm and

mechanism that control the indexing, the operation of the spring
chuck, and the movement of the drill are all governed by cams
located on an auxiliary camshaft. The chain and sprocket
drive for rotating this camshaft is shown encased at the left
of the illustration. The drill spindle B is driven by a small
round belt from the overhead works, which operates around
the idler pulleys M. The drill spindle is operated by cam C,
through lever D. The motion for indexing the work-spindle
of the attachment is obtained from cam F. This indexing

Fig. 4. Cross-drilling Attachment held on Cut-off Tool-slide of

Acme Multiple-spindle Automatic

movement makes it possible to drill several accurately-spaced

holes through the head of a screw or other part. One piece is

drilled by the attachment while another is being made by the

regular mechanism of the machine.

Cross-drilling Attachment. When only a single hole is
to be drilled cross-wise through the work, what is known as a

cross-drilling attachment may be used. This is simpler in con-

struction than the index drilling attachment (shown in Fig. 3)
and is mounted on the cross-slide when applied to a Brown
& Sharpe machine. The spindle is driven by a small belt from
the overhead works, and the feeding movement for the drill
2O2 ATTACHMENTS

is derived from the cross-slide itself. Before cross-drilling, it

is necessary to stop the spindle and hold it rigidly. On Brown &

Sharpe machines, a spindle brake is used.
One of the standard cross-drilling attachments used on the
Acme multiple-spindle machine is shown in Fig. 4. This con-
sists of a cast-iron frame A
which is bolted to the top face of
the cut-off tool-slide and works in the third position, where
the work-spindle can be stopped. The cross-drilling and thread-
ing operations can usually be performed at the same time.
The drive for this attachment is by a flat belt from a special

Fig. 5. Acme Cross-drilling Attachment with Accelerating Movement

overhead countershaft running on the pulley B, which is

fastened to the spindle C that carries the drill. This attach-
ment, by a slight modification in its construction, can be driven
by gears and a universal- joint shaft from the main tool-slide.
Cross-drilling Attachment with Accelerating Movement.
Another Acme cross-drilling attachment, but one having an
accelerating movement for increasing the travel of the drill,
is shown in Fig. 5. The attachment A is similar in construc-
tion to that shown in Fig. 4, except that it is mounted on two
slides B and C. Slide C is fastened to the top face of the cut-off
tool-slide, and slide B fits over the former and is furnished
with a gib to provide for adjustment. This enables the drilling
 DRILLING ATTACHMENTS 203

attachment to be moved longitudinally along the base, facili-

tating adjustments for the drilling of holes at different distances

from the face of the chuck. Attachment A is operated by a
lever D which is fulcrumed to the lower slide C.
A block E provided with hardened adjustable stops F is
fastened to the base in which the cut-off tool-slide works.
This block, by means of its adjustable points, stops the lower

Machinery

Fig. 6. Cross-drilling Attachment with Opposite Spindles

portion of lever D, so that, instead of following the movement

of the cut-off tool-slide when it is fed in, it transmits a move-
ment to the lower arm of the lever and thus accelerates the
travel of the drill-holder. The ratiobetween the arms of
lever D is if to i, thus making
possible to drill a hole clear
it

through a piece. The regular travel of the cross-slide is only

equal to a little over one-half the diameter of the bar, so that,
when it is necessary to drill a hole entirely through the work,
204 ATTACHMENTS

this attachment with accelerated movements can be used to

very good advantage.
Attachment with Opposite Spindles.
Cross-drilling The
Acme cross-drilling attachment shown in Fig. 6 is provided
with opposite spindles and is adapted for drilling cross holes,
and, in addition, counterboring or countersinking from both
sides. It can also be used for drilling parallel holes of the

same or different diameters at a given distance from each

other and from the face of the chuck. The holes can either
be drilled entirely through the work or to any distance desired.
When necessary, the attachment can be provided with an

Fig. 7. Brown & Sharpe Automatic Screw Machine equipped with

Turret Drilling Attachment

accelerating device for increasing its travel. The second

or auxiliary spindle of this attachment is driven by spur or
bevel gears from the regular drill spindle. When driven by
spur gears, the drive is through gear A, shaft B, and gears C
and D. Gear D is keyed to the spindle in which the counter-
sink E (or drill) is held. The bracket F carrying the auxiliary
mechanism is bolted to the front side of the regular attach-
ment used for cross-drilling.
In operation, as the cylinder indexes, the stock comes
between the spindles of the attachment, and the machine is
so cammed that the cut-off tool-slide feeds forward, drills the
first hole, and then pulls back far enough to bring the drill
 BURRING ATTACHMENT 205

held in the opposite spindle into contact with the work. The
slide then feeds forward again to an intermediate position,
before the next indexing operation.
Turret Drilling Attachment. The turret drilling attach-
ment shown applied to a Brown & Sharpe machine in Fig. 7
is used to increase the speed of a drill relative to the work,
without running the work-spindle faster. This is accomplished
by rotating the drill in the opposite direction to the stock.
This attachment is often used when making small studs and

Fig. 8. Rear View of the Burring Attachment applied to Brown &

Sharpe Automatic Screw Machine

a variety of work requiring the use of one or more small drills

which must be run at a much higher speed than is required
for any other tool, in order to obtain an economical cutting

speed. The attachment is driven from the overhead works

by a belt C which rotates a spindle located at right angles to
the spindle of the machine. This spindle, in turn, drives the
drillspindles by means of bevel gears G. The illustration
shows the turret equipped with two drill spindles A and B.
The number may be varied to suit the work.
Burring Attachment. The burring attachment shown in
Fig. 8 applied to a Brown & Sharpe machine carries a single
tool for removing burrs or for performing light operations, such
2o6 ATTACHMENTS

as drilling, counterboring, or facing on the cut-off ends of

pieces before they leave the screw machine. The attach-

ment has a work-spindle C which is driven from the overhead
works by a small belt. The cutting tool is held in this spindle.
A chuck encased at M
attached to a swinging arm picks up
the piece of work as it is severed from the bar and conveys it
first toa device that clamps it securely in the chuck and then
to the tool in the spindle of the attachment. The movements
of the arm are controlled by two cams located on the end of
the camshaft. The small collet chuck located inside of part M

Fig. 9. Tap and Die Revolving Attachment

is opened by the engagement of a small pin which comes into

contact with a stationary rod P. The work is then ejected
from the chuck by means of a small plunger which engages
finger R when the transfer arm drops back preparatory to
receiving another piece.
Tap and Die Revolving Attachment. When a series of
operations requires no other slow movement except the reduc-
tion of speed for a threading operation, the tap and die revolv-

ing attachment shown in Fig. 9 is used in connection with

Brown & Sharpe machines. This attachment provides means
for reducing the speed of the tap and die relative to the work,
when threading, and of increasing the speed when removing a
 REAMING ATTACHMENT 207

tap or die from the threaded part, without altering the speed
of the work-spindle. This is effected by revolving the tap or
die in the same direction as the spindle, but at a slower speed,
the combination of the two speeds giving the desired result.
The attachment is driven by a belt B from the countershaft
through pulley C and bevel gears D. The spring E acts in the
same manner as the spring in an ordinary draw-out die or
tap-holder.
Accelerated Reaming Attachment. For reaming holes
which exceed in depth the travel of the end- working tool-

MacMncry

Fig. 10. Accelerated Reaming Attachment

slide, the accelerated reaming attachment shown in Fig. 10

is used on the Acmemultiple-spindle machine. This attach-
"
ment is held in the fourth" end position in the tool-slide,
and consists of the regular cast-iron collet A which fits in the
hole in the tool-slide. The reamer holder C is a sliding fit in
the steel bushing B, and is furnished with a loose cap in D
which the reamer is held by the set-screw shown. The cap D
is held to the holder C by two shoulder-head screws, the bodies
of -5% inch smaller in diameter than the holes in the
which are
"
cap, thus allowing the cap to float" a slight amount. A
stud E screwed into the shank of the holder C and working
208 ATTACHMENTS

inan elongated slot in the bushing and collet projects

through
from the under side of the collet and works an elongated
in

slot in the lever F. This lever is fulcrumed on a screw which

is located in either holes G
or H, depending upon the excess
amount of travel required, and it serves to accelerate the travel
of the reamer. In order to increase the travel, the screw is
placed in hole H, and, to reduce the travel, the lever is
moved back so that the screw would take the G position.
The bracket / in which the lever is fulcrumed is fastened

Fig. 11. Acme Cross-drilling and Milling Attachment with Spindles

located at Right Angles

to collet A and advances with the end- working tool-slide.

The end of lever F is provided with two hardened screws
rear
rounded on the heads, which come in contact with the dogs
J and K when the device is in operation. These dogs are ad-
justable on the bracket L, fastened to the gib If, which, in
turn, is held to the bed of the machine. In operation, as the
end-working tool-slide advances, the round-headed screw in
the front face of the lever comes in contact with dog /, and,
as the tool-slide continues to advance, this dog acts upon the
fulcrumed lever, drawing out the reamer holder and accelerat-
 MILLING ATTACHMENTS 209

ing its movement. position of dog / on the bracket, and

The
also the location of the screw in holes G or H, determines the
amount of excess movement given to the reamer. When the
tool-slide drops back, dog K returns the reamer holder by means
of lever F to its "back" position.
Drilling and Milling Attachment. A two-spindle drilling
and milling attachment in which the spindles are located at
right angles to each other is shown .in Fig. n applied to an
Acme machine. This attachment is used for drilling a cross hole
and milling a flat on the work. The casting C which carries
the spindles A and B is fastened to the top face of the cut-off
tool-slide, and carries a pulley D which is driven through a
>

flat belt from a special overhead countershaft. Pulley D is

keyed to the top horizontal shaft and drives the vertical mill-
ing spindle through bevel gears E. On the rear end of the top
horizontal shaft is a spur gear F
which, through the inter-
mediate gear G, drives the spur gear H
fastened to the drilling

spindle A. This attachment is adjustable longitudinally on

the base 7, the latter being fastened to the top face of the
cut-off tool-slide. The attachment can be provided with an
accelerating movement, if desired.

Vertical-spindle Milling Attachments. Fig. 12 illustrates

an Acme vertical-spindle slab milling attachment, designed
for carrying two face-milling cutters A and B. These cutters
are held on the vertical spindle C and are separated by a spac-

ing washer of the required thickness. The attachment is held

on the top face of the cut-off tool-slide, and is arranged for
milling two flats on a cold-rolled steel piece, which is turned
out at the rate of fifty-three pieces per hour. The vertical
spindle C is driven by bevel gears (enclosed in the guard D)
and the pulley E, the latter being belted to a special counter-
shaft. It is attachment without employ-
possible to drive this
ing a special countershaft, by connecting it directly through a
telescopic knuckle-joint shaft to the gears driving the thread-
ing spindle.
Another vertical-spindle slabbing attachment somewhat
similar in construction to that just described is shown in
2IO ATTACHMENTS

Fig. 13. In however, two end-milling cutters A

this case,
and B are used. The spindles carrying the end-mills are driven
from a special countershaft belted to pulley C. This pulley

Fig. 12. Acme Slab Milling Attachment

Fig. 13. Acme Slab Milling Attachment equipped with Two

End-mills

is keyed to the shaft D which drives the vertical shaft E

through bevel gears enclosed in guard F. On opposite ends
of shaft E are held gears G and H, which mesh with gears
on the vertical milling spindles. This attachment is fastened
 MILLING ATTACHMENTS 211

to the top face of the cut-off tool-slide and is operated as

previously described.
End-milling or Slotting Attachment. Fig. 14 illustrates
an Acme end-milling or slotting attachment which is held in
the third position and driven by gears. The bevel gear A
receives power from the regular gears that are provided for

Fig. 14. Acme Slotting or Milling Attachment held in Third Posi-

tion and Driven from Gears in Second Position Tool-spindle

driving the tools held in the second position tool-spindle.

The cutter is adjusted for depth by means of a special device
on the rear end of the main tool-slide. This attachment is
held rigidly, being tied to both second and third position
tool-spindles. The work-spindle in the second position is
stopped when the end-milling or slotting attachment is at work.
Independent Cutting-off Attachment. The attachment
shown in Fig. 15 is used on Cleveland automatics for cutting
212 ATTACHMENTS

off the work when the tools on the rear and front of the cross-
slide are used for forming operations. This attachment con-
sists primarily of a swinging arm A
mounted on a stud which
is attached to the spindle head of the The cutting-off
machine.
blade mounted in a holder B, at the forward end of the
is

swinging arm A the holder B is fulcrumed on a bolt C which

;

is provided with a locking nut on the opposite side for clamp-

Fig. 15. Independent Cut-off Attachment on Cleveland Automatic

ing the tool-holder in the desired position. The proper setting

of the cutting-off blade is secured by means of the set-screws
D which operate against a pin driven into the arm. To
make this adjustment, it is necessary to release the nut on
the clamping bolt C. This attachment is operated by the
cam G held on the camshaft F, the cam being adjustably
mounted on the disk H, as illustrated. This cam contacts
with a roll held in arm A and gives it the required move-
ment at the desired time. The roll is carried on an eccen-
tric stud for fine adjustment of the cutting-off blade. The
 SPECIAL ATTACHMENTS 213

blade is clamped in the holder by two clamping bolts as illus-

trated.
Attachment for Forming Squares and Hexagons. An
attachment for automatic screw machines is shown in Fig. 16
which is flat surfaces, such as squares and
used for cutting
hexagons or other polygons, on work produced from a bar,
directly in place, so as to save a second handling of the work
after leaving The attachment, as
the automatic machine.
designed, is
particularly intended to be applied to a four-
spindle automatic screw machine, and provisions are included

Machinery

Fig. 16. Attachment for Milling Squares and Hexagons while Work is
Revolving for Other Machining Operations

for driving a milling cutter of special design, by means' of

which flat surfaces are. cut, and also for feeding this cutter past
the revolving work. It should be understood that the work
revolves while the flat surfaces are cut.
The attachment shown in the illustration is arranged for
cutting a hexagon on the end of one of the bars in the machine,
the cutting tool being the cutter A provided with three teeth.
,

This cutter is placed on a supplementary slide, mounted on

the work-carrying head of the machine, and is fed by means
of a leverage system adjustable to suit the requirements.
When the device is in operation, the work and the cutter re-
volve in the same direction in relation to' their axes, so that
at the cutting point the directions of the surfaces which are
214 ATTACHMENTS

in contact are opposite, but the cutter is geared to revolve at

twice the speed of the work to be provided with the hexagon,
and, as the cutter has three cutting points and revolves very
rapidly, it produces a polygon with six equal sides when it
has traversed the fullflat.width of the
If the cutter had only
two points, a square would be produced. If a cutter having
only one point were used, the gearing being the same, two
flats only would be produced, and the remaining portion of

the circular surface would remain curved. It is clear that

I I FORMING TOOL CROSS-

Machinery

Fig. 17. Arrangement of Worm Robbing Attachment on Automatic Screw

Machine

the same results can be obtained by gearing of other ratios

than 2 to i, provided the number of teeth in the cutter is se-

lected to suit the ratio of revolutions. The sectional view

shows how the drive is transmitted to the cutter from the
main drive of the machine.
When any devices are applied to automatic machines which
in a certain sense belong outside of the original field of the

machine, it is very important to take into consideration

whether these devices require a stoppage of the regular func-
tions of the machine, and thereby rob the machine itself
 SPECIAL ATTACHMENTS 215

of the efficiency of which it is capable, or whether these extra

devices perform their work simultaneously with the
per-
formance of certain of the legitimate functions of the tool.
In the former case, it is often doubtful whether the intro-
duction of such devices is economical. Stopping an auto-
matic machine for such operations as screw slotting, milling,
etc., which prevent the continuous working of the machine,
is sometimes questionable economy. the other hand, On
if the devices are so designed that operations, which of neces-

sity must be performed on the machine, can still be carried

on while the device performs its own functions, then the
introduction of such devices is of distinct advantage. With
the device just described, the work is provided with its flat
surfaces while it still continues its rotary motion, thus per-

mitting other cutting tools to perform their functions without

interference.

Fig. 18. Worm to be Hobbed, and the Hob

Attachment for Robbing Worm and Spiral Gears. An at-

tachment applied to a National-Acme automatic screw machine
for bobbing worm and spiral gears from blanks formed from
bar stock is shown in Fig. 17. The design of the worm is such
that it could not be handled by a circular hob fed longitu-
dinally ; therefore, a drop feed is used. By calculation, it

was found that forty teeth would give a hob of the diameter
that would clear the two high points on the worm blank,
marked A and B in Fig. 18, and this number of teeth on the
216 ATTACHMENTS

hob determines the entire gearing of the attachment. The

worm being of the single- threaded type, and the hob used to
produce it having forty teeth, it follows that the worm must
make forty revolutions to one revolution of the hob. Now
the chucking spindle holding the worm blank must make
forty revolutions to one revolution of the hob, which is driven
by an extra shaft geared to the center spindle of the machine
at the back or pulley end. Having the ratio between the speed
of the chucking spindle and the center spindle, which in this
case is 29 to 36, the shaft B in Fig. 17 must revolve at the same
speed as the chucking spindle. The 40 to i reduction is ob-
tained through the worm on this shaft and the worm-wheel
on the hob spindle. In Fig. 17, D shows the worm-wheel and
C the worm keyed on the
shaft B. On the No. 53
machine fitted up for this
job, a 29-tooth pinion on
the center spindle drives
a 3 6- tooth gear on each
Machinery

Detail of the Feed Cam chucking spindle. There-

Fig. 19.
fore, a 29-tooth pinion is

keyed on the center spindle on the back end of the machine

and drives a 3 6- tooth gear on the shaft B with any idler
between that conveniently meshes with the two gears.
This attachment is so designed that the hob starts hobbing
the worm as soon as the forming tool begins ^to form the blank.
Since the worm C and the worm-wheel D drive the hob at
the required speed, and as their relative positions cannot be
changed without altering the speed of the hob, it is evident
that the center of the worm C must be the center about which
the hob spindle oscillates. The worm can drive the worm-
wheel D keyed on the hob spindle at the same speed in any
position of the hob. The hob spindle is carried in bearings
on an independent plate H which swings back and forth
about the center of C, on the surface of the casting I that is
bolted down on the screw-machine head. A cam E is mounted
on the forming tool cross-slide to raise and lower the hob. An
 SPECIAL ATTACHMENTS 217

arm on the casting H has

roll F that fits in the cam E, and
a
thus the raising of roll F by cam E lowers the hob, and vice versa.
Fig. 19 shows the cam E more clearly. From B to A, the
cam lets the hob drop quickly down to the surface of the
worm, and this drop occurs when the cross-slide of the ma-
chine moves in quickly until the
forming tool starts to cut.
This action of the cross-slide reduces the time required to
feed in by sliding in quickly to the point where the forming
tool begins to cut. The tool then has more time to feed in
and do the forming at a slower feed, thus producing a more
perfectly finished blank. For this reason, the cross-slide was
selected to feed the hob on this attachment, and obtain the
same action for the feed of the hob as for the feed of the form-

ing tool. When the roller F has passed up the sharp incline
By the cross-slide is just beginning to feed in slowly and the

hob isjust touching the blank then the roller starts up the
;

incline A at a slow speed, thus feeding the hob down into

the blank to the required depth at a very slow feed. No
spring or weight is required to lift the hob out of the hobbed
worm, as the cam C performs this function by lifting the hob
high enough to clear the chucking spindle of the machine,
which carries the hobbed worm, allowing it to swing around a
quarter of a revolution to its next position for the drilling
operation.
Not being certain of the accuracy of the scaled dimensions
of positions of the parts of the machine and the outside diameter
of the worm being subject to a change, the cam (Fig. 17) E
was made adjustable. By sliding it in or out by means of the
screw /, various diameters of a o.oQS-inch lead single- threaded
worm may be hobbed, providing that the variation does not
amount to enough to change the spiral angle sufficiently to
interfere with the angle of the teeth cut in the hob. However,
considerable variation in the diameter of the worms to be
hobbed can be taken care of. The face of the hob being flat
and tangent to the worm, there is considerable clearance
between the sides of the teeth on the hob and the sides of the
threads on the worm in back of the cutting surface of the
218 ATTACHMENTS

hob. This clearance increases as the curvature of the worm

is farther from the toothed face of the hob. This isevident,
in that the teeth become narrower at the top, and the space
between becomes wider. The hob spindle is made adjustable
to compensate for the re-grinding of the hob. By loosening
the nuts on the back end of the spindle from the steel thrust

Fig. 20. Tilting Magazine Attachment

collar, the clearance may be taken up by tightening the lock-

nut on the hob end, thus pulling the spindle forward.
To make the generating hob, another hob is required to
cut the teeth, this hob being similar to the one used in hobbing
a worm-wheel. In fact, the relation between these two hobs
is the same as between a worm and worm-wheel. This hob
for producing the teeth in the generating hob used on the
fixture is made to the same dimensions as the worm to be
hobbed. It is thus evident that the generating hob will repro-
duce a worm of the same form of thread as that of the hob that
 MAGAZINE ATTACHMENTS 2I 9

produced the teeth in it. There is, however, a slight exception

in this case, in that the hob takes a drop cut in the worm blank,

thereby leaving a curve on the threaded length of worm with

a radius equal to half the diameter of the hob in other words,

producing a worm somewhat of the Hindley form. No ad-

vantage in this shape of worm is gained, however, as the worm-
wheel driven by the worm is much smaller in diameter than
the generating hob.

Fig. 21. Vertical Hopper Magazine

Magazine Feeding Attachments. Magazines for han-

dling work to be chucked automatically have developed along
many lines, and a great number of ingenious devices have been
designed which are adapted to the various shapes and kinds
of work that are operated upon in automatic machines. The
attachments shown in Figs. 20 to 23, inclusive, have been de-
signed for the Cleveland automatics. What is known as a
"
tilting magazine attachment" is shown in Fig. 20. This
attachment is designed for handling castings, drop-forgings,
22O ATTACHMENTS

and other parts requiring a second operation. The magazine

A is filled from the top, the parts being placed one upon the
other. In the illustration, the magazine is shown tilted down-

ward, so that the conveyor B is in a position to advance and

secure one of these pieces. After a part is removed from the

magazine by the conveyor, the magazine tilts upward about

shaft C, so that it is out of the way of the turret tools ;
the

conveyor is then brought into line with chuck D into which the

Fig. 22. Rotary Magazine Attachment

part is deposited. The tools in the turret and those on the cross-
slide then proceed to machine the part held in the chuck.
(No tools are shown in this particular illustration.) The maga-
zine frame is provided with adjustable strips and bushings to
accommodate parts of different size. The finished pieces are
automatically removed by an ejector inside of the machine
spindle.
Vertical Magazines. A vertical hopper magazine for feed-

ing studs into the rear end of the spindle of a Cleveland auto-
matic machine is shown in Fig. 21. This might be called a
 MAGAZINE ATTACHMENTS 221

"reservoir magazine," as it has a widened upper portion for

carrying a large number of parts. The work feeds by gravity

into bushing A, and it is forced into the spindle by means of
a push-rod B, which is operated from the cam-drum at the
rear of the magazine. There is an agitator, which, by means

Fig. 23. Front View of Rotary Tilting Magazine

of a cam-and-lever mechanism, oscillates the agitator shaft C

which insures feeding the work from the hopper. The magazine
holds from 300 to 1500 pieces, the number depending upon the
diameter, and the entire frame is adjustable to suit any length
within its capacity.
Rotary Magazine Attachment. The rotary attachment
shown in Fig. 22 is intended for irregular-shaped parts which
222 ATTACHMENTS

cannot be fed through a tilting magazine. The pieces are

placed by hand in the bushing C of the magazine. The illus-

tration shows a piece of work A

which has been removed from
one of the bushings C when the turret was in its forward posi-

tion; this part will be placed in the chuck when the turret is
indexed so as to bring the turret into alignment with the
spindle. The magazine is indexed by a dog on the camshaft
B at the rear, this indexing movement occurring before the

conveyor is in position to take another casting from the maga-

zine ;
the latter is locked in position by a spring plunger after
indexing. The work is removed from the chuck by an ejector

after being finished.

Rotary Tilting Magazine. The rotary type of tilting maga-

zine, shown in Fig. 23, is used for second-operation work. The
magazine tilts to the working position, as shown in the illus-
tration, and, after the piece has been removed, it rises to clear
the turret tools. In this respect, it is similar to the tilting

magazine shown 20, but differs from this design in

in Fig.
that the parts to be machined are placed in the bushings A
which are mounted in the links B. This arrangement permits
of handling a greater variety of irregular shaped parts than
was possible with the original form of magazine, where the
parts were laid one upon the other and guided by parallel
bars. The chain composed of the links B is indexed by means
of the lower pair of sprocket wheels C, one of which is pro-
vided with a series of pins that engage an index pawl not
shown in the illustration. This pawl rotates the sprockets
upon the downward tilt of the magazine and brings each link
B in line with the conveyor D in the turret hole ; upon the
upward the pawl drops down and engages the pin follow-
tilt,

ing the one that has acted upon it. The sprocket shaft E
rests in the saddle F on the main supporting arm G, which
serves as a stop and also maintains the required alignment
while the conveyor is removing the part to be machined.
The adjustable stop H
mounted on the main supporting arm
prevents the conveyor straining the magazine while removing
the work from the bushing.
 MAGAZINE ATTACHMENTS 223

The operation shown in Fig. 23 is the machining of cast-

iron bushings having a collar or shoulder at one end. In this

case, the part that is gripped in the chuck is cut off by the in-
dependent cutting-off attachment /. Occasionally, when the
magazine is used for some odd-shaped piece that has surface
enough to grip in the chuck, it is necessary to employ a simple
form of latch held by a spring to keep the piece from falling
out. This statement applies only to second-operation work
and is referred to in order to show that the magazine may be

employed any shaped piece upon which a second

for practically

operation must be performed. Aside from the tools required

for different jobs, the only special equipment necessary is

bushings of the required size.

 CHAPTER VII

DESIGNING SCREW MACHINE CAMS

WHEN an automatic screw machine is equipped with special

cams for controlling the movements of the various tools and
parts of the machine requiring a change of action, whenever a
different class of work is to be produced, the designing of these
cams constitutes an important part of screw machine practice.
As the preceding descriptions of different screw machines
indicate, some types do not require special cams for producing
different parts, but are so arranged that the necessary changes
of feed for the tools, etc., are obtained eitherby adjustable
cams forming a permanent part of the machine or by adjust-
ments which vary the motion of cams that are a part of the
regular equipment. When a machine is designed to use special
cams, the advantages aimed at are the securing of the ideal
conditions as to rates of feed for each operation, and the
minimum time for idle movements; such cams enable the
machine to duplicate readily the same part at any future time,
the cams being marked and preserved for this purpose. /The
following description of the general method of procedure in
designing cams applies especially to the Brown & Sharpe auto-
matic screw machines, although a study of the principles
involved will prove of value in connection with the design of
cams machines made by other manufacturers.
for screw
On theBrown & Sharpe automatic screw machines, three
cams constitute a set. What is known as the "front-slide
cam" operates the front cross-slide, the " back-slide cam"
operates the back cross-slide, and the "lead cam" controls
the movement of the turret slide. The motion for feeding the
stock, revolving the turret, and reversing the spindle is taken
from a rear driving shaft which runs at a constant speed. This
shaft, through suitable change-gears, rotates the shafts upon
224
 GENERAL PROCEDURE 225

which the cross-slide and turret operating cams are mounted,

at a speed suitable for the work to be performed. The dura-
tion of the cycle of operations or the length of time required
to make one piece is positively regulated by means of these

change-gears. When designing cams, it is well to bear these

essential points in mind.
Effect of Cutting Speed on Cam
Design. Before the cams
are laid out, necessary to decide what types of tools are
it is

to be used and the successive order of the operations. Then

the cutting speed for the material to be operated upon should
be determined in order to ascertain the speed of the spindle.
The tool movement that will be necessary in a given time in
order to secure a certain rate of feed per revolution must also
be determined.The rise of each cam lobe is then proportioned
number of revolutions which the spindle and
according to the
work make while the tool controlled by that particular cam
is taking its cut.

When
turning parts from iron or steel, the formed tools will
withstand a much higher speed than a tap or die, which should
be taken advantage of in order to operate the machine as
economically as possible. It is common practice to run the
spindle backwards at a comparatively fast speed for the form-
ing and cutting-off operations, and forward at a somewhat
slower speed for thread cutting and other operations which
can be performed to advantage at slower speeds; however, if
the machine is to be used for a variety of work, or if hollow
mills or box-tools are used principally, the correct speed for
a die or tap can be obtained by means of an attachment which
serves to revolve the die or tap in the same direction as the

spindle, but at one-half the spindle speed. This tap and die
revolving attachment is of especial value where the work
requires no other slow movement except that for threading.
General Method of Designing Cams. As the rise of each
cam lobe is proportioned according to the number of revolutions
made by the spindle while that part of the cam is in use, the
relation between the spindle revolutions and the various opera-
tions is first determined. The total number of revolutions
226 CAM DESIGN

required to complete one piece is found by adding together

the number of revolutions for each cut, the number for each
indexing of the turret, for feeding the stock, etc. an approxi-
;

mate number of revolutions may also be added for clear-

ance. In determining the number of revolutions for each
operation, necessary to decide what the feed should be in
it is

each case. Assuming, for instance, that a feed of 0.006 inch

per revolution would be about right for rough turning, and
that there is a length of 0.630 inch to turn, this operation would
require about 105 revolutions of the spindle. If one-half

second were necessary for indexing the turret, and the spindle
speed is about noo revolutions per minute, approximately
9 revolutions of the spindle would be required for indexing in ;

actual practice, probably 12 or 13 revolutions would be allowed.

In the same way, the number of revolutions for the finishing
cut and also for the succeeding operations would be deter-
mined, the number required for indexing being added between
each operation.
The time required for the complete operation is next de-
termined by dividing the total number of revolutions by
the number of revolutions which the spindle makes per second.
Thus, if the estimated number of revolutions for machining
the workis 406, and the spindle makes 18 revolutions per sec-

ond, the time for completing the piece will equal 406 -*- 18 = 23

seconds, approximately. When the number of seconds for

completing the work has been obtained, the revolutions re-
quired for each operation are converted into hundredths of the
cam circumference, and the different lobes on the cam are
proportioned according to the number of revolutions for each
operation.
If the spindle revolves 18 times per second, and 23 seconds
are required to make one piece, it will revolve 414 times for
each part produced, which agrees closely with the approximate
estimate therefore, if the spindle revolves 414 times for
;

machining each part, or for one revolution of the camshaft,

each y^-0- of the cam periphery represents 414 -r- 100
= 4.14
revolutions of the spindle. If 105 revolutions are required
 GENERAL PROCEDURE 227

for rough-turning, that portion of the cam for operating the

turret, when the rough-turning tool is in position, will extend

over 105-^4.14= 26 spaces, approximately, or -ffo of the
circumference of the cam. This part of the cam circumference
is then laid out so that it will impart the required movement
to the tool.
In thisway, the operation of the turret-slide and the cross-
slides can be worked out in conjunction with one another,
and the proper feeds for each operation can be determined
in advance. One, two, or sometimes three pieces of work
are completed in one revolution of the cam, so that the various
movements of one of the slides in making a particular piece
are laid out as curves around the cam; these curves either

occupy the whole circumference or are repeated once or

twice, according to the number of pieces produced per revolu-
tion.

Laying Out Cams for a Screw. The method of laying out

cams on the No. oo Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine,
for producing the screw shown in Fig. i, will be described.
These screws are to be made from ^--inch soft machinery steel
stock. The tools used and the successive order of operations
are as follows: Rough- turn the body of the screw with a
i.

hollow mill. 2. Finish- turn the

body of the screw with a box-
tool. 3. Cut a thread on the end of the screw. 4. Cut off the
finished screw and at the same time shave under the head and
remove the burr with a forming tool.
For roughing cuts, a properly constructed hollow mill is
recommended. Such a tool will cut easier if the cutting edges
are inclined so that they form a slightly conical shoulder rather
than one which is square. For finishing, the best results are
usually obtained with a box- tool. Such a tool also has the ad-
vantage of a wide range of sizes and it can be equipped with
two or more cutters for turning different diameters.
Speed of the Spindle. The number of revolutions of the

spindle required for the various operations will necessarily

depend upon the kind of work to be done and the amount
of stock to be removed. In this case, two spindle speeds will
228 CAM DESIGN

be employed in order to use a comparatively high speed for

some of the operations. By referring to the spindle speed
chart accompanying the No. oo machine, it will be found that
a speed of 927 revolutions per minute with the spindle running
forward and 1273 revolutions with the spindle running back-
ward may be used to advantage for producing the screw
shown in Fig. i. The slower speed gives a surface speed of
30 feet per minute for cutting the thread and a surface speed
of 53 feet per minute at the outside of the stock 1273 revolu- ;

tions per minute gives a surface speed at the outside of the

Fig. 1. Diagram illustrating Relation between Tool Lengths

and Travel of Turret

stock of 73 feet per minute; therefore, the machine will be

arranged so that the rough-turning, finish-turning, and thread
cutting are done at the slower speed, and backing off the die,
cutting off the finished screw, feeding the stock, etc., at the
higher speed.
Spindle Revolutions for Turning. When different spindle
speeds are used for the forward and backward directions of

rotation, the totalnumber of revolutions for producing the

part should be based on the higher speed. In order to deter-
mine the total number of revolutions, it will be necessary to
find out how many spindle revolutions are required for each
 GENERAL PROCEDURE 229

operation, which, in the case of cutting tools, depends upon the

amount they feed per revolution. As the turning is to be done
at a comparatively slow speed, the feed may be rather coarse,
o.oio inch being selected for roughing and o.on inch for
finishing. Rough- turning a length of 0.625 mcn pl us o.oio
inch for clearance, and with a feed of o.oio inch per revolu-
tion, will require about 63 revolutions (0.635 -f- o.oio
= 63).
The finishing cut with an advance movement of 0.635 mcn
at o.on inch per revolution, plus a dwell equivalent to three
revolutions at the end of the cut for finishing the shoulder,
will require about 61 revolutions. It will be assumed that
both the roughing and the finishing cuts are to be taken in
62 revolutions.
Number of Revolutions for Thread Cutting. To find the
number of revolutions for cutting the thread, determine the
number of threads on the end of the screw by multiplying
the number of threads per inch by the threaded length thus ;

48X0.25= 12. Adding, say, two revolutions for clearance,

14 revolutions will be required for cutting the thread and
14 revolutions for backing the die off of the threaded end.
Revolutions for Cutting off Finished Screw. In deter-
mining the number of revolutions for cutting off the finished
screw, the question of feed is again involved. Cutting-off
tools can be fed from 0.0012 to 0.0017 inch per revolution, but
the feed should be reduced towards the latter part of the cut.
Forming tools can be fed from 0.0002 to o.ooi inch, the amount
largely depending upon the width of the formed part. It will
be assumed that the feed in this case is to be 0.0015 mcn Now -

the total movement of the cutting-off tool equals the radius

of stock, or eV inch + 0.005 i ncn f r clearance + dimension x
(see Fig. 2), which depends upon angle a of the cutting edge.
The reason for inclining the cutting edge is to sever the finished

part without leaving a teat or rough spot in the center of the

screw-head, such as would usually be left by a tool having
a cutting edge parallel with the axis of the work. The dimen-
sion x equals the width y of the blade multiplied by the tangent
of angle a. Fifteen degrees has been proved to be a suitable
230 CAM DESIGN

angle for tools used on steel and iron, whereas, for brass or
bronze, a somewhat greater angle, varying from about 20 to
25 degrees, gives better results. Assuming that the cutting-off
tool is 0.035 mcn wide and the angle of the cutting edge is

15 degrees, then x equals o.oio inch. Therefore, the total

movement of the tool equals g
7
^, or 0.1093 + 0.005 +o.oio
= 0.125 inch approximately. The spindle revolutions required
equal 0.125 -5-
0.0015 =
83 revolutions, approximately. (This
number will be reduced to 81 revolutions in this particular
case, for reasons to be explained later.) While the stock is

being cut off, a forming tool can shave under the head and

Fig. 2. Inclined Edge of Cutting-off Tool

remove the burr, so that additional spindle revolutions are

not required for this part of the work.
Revolutions while Indexing Turret. On the No. oo
Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine, the time required
for indexing the turret is one-half second. With a spindle
speed of 927 revolutions per minute, there will be about 15.5
revolutions per second, or approximately 8 revolutions during
the one-half second, for indexing. It is usually advisable to
add from two to four revolutions to the actual number required
for indexing the turret and feeding the stock; therefore,
10 revolutions should be allowed for indexing at the slower
speed.
Spindle Revolutions based on Fast Speeds. As previously
mentioned, when there is a variation between the forward
and backward spindle speeds, the number of revolutions for
each operation which is considered in designing a cam is based
 GENERAL PROCEDURE 231

upon the In Table I, the various operations for

fast speed.

producing the screw shown in Fig. i, and the corresponding

number of spindle revolutions in each case, are listed in the

"
successive order. The column headed Spindle Revolutions
for Each Operation" shows the actual number of spindle revo-
lutions for making one screw; the next column shows what
the spindle revolutions would be if the spindle ran at 1273
revolutions per minute continually. On all operations for
Table I. Revolutions of Machine Spindle and Hundred ths of Cam
Circumference for Different Operations

*
Actual number of revolutions for making one screw.
t Number of revolutions required if spindle speed were 1273 R. P. M. con-
tinually.

which the slower speed of 927 revolutions per minute is em-

ployed, the spindle revolutions based on the higher speed
of 1273 revolutions per minute are used in proportioning the
cam. For instance, 62 revolutions per minute are actually
required for rough-turning with the hollow mill, but the
hundredths of cam circumference used for this operation is
based on 84 revolutions at the fast speed. The relation
232 CAM DESIGN

between the spindle revolutions at the fast speed and the

actual number at the slower speed corresponds to the relation
between the spindle speeds; thus,

= 1273 X 62
=
927 :
1273 : : 62 : x ;
x 85 revolutions.
927
The reason why 84 revolutions are listed in Table I instead
of 85, and the reason for similar modifications will now be
explained.
Modification of Spindle Revolutions to suit Change-gears.
After the number of spindle revolutions for each operation
have been determined and they have been added together to
obtain the total number, the next thing to consider is the
relation between this total number and the numbers that can
be obtained with the different combinations of change-gears
accompanying the machine. As the total number of revolu-
tions for producing a part does not always equal the number
obtained with the change-gears, it is necessary to modify the
revolutions for the different operations in order to obtain an
exact number for which the change-gears are suited. In this
case, the revolutions listed in Table I were changed slightly
in order to obtain the total of 339, because Table II shows that
this is the number for which the machine should be geared.
For instance, instead of allowing 85 revolutions for rough-
turning and finish-turning, 84 revolutions were allowed the ;

number of revolutions for cutting off was also reduced from

83 to 81, so that a total of 339 was obtained. The effect of
these changes on the action of the tools is, of course, very
slight, the effect being to change the feeding movement of the
tool somewhat. As will be seen by referring to Table II,
the number 339 is found in the column headed by the spindle
speed of 1273 revolutions per minute, and, opposite 339 at the
left-hand side of the table, the change-gears to use are listed.
In this case, there should be a 3o-tooth gear on the driving
shaft and a 48- tooth gear on the worm-shaft. As 339 repre-
sents the total number of revolutions at the fast spindle speed

required to make one piece, 339 21.2 -f-

(the number of revo-
 GENERAL PROCEDURE 233
Table II. Change-gears and Data for Laying Out Cams, No. oo
Brown & Sharpe Automatic Screw Machine

The number of hundredths given is always sufficient for feeding stock, but it is

usually best to add i-ioo for revolving the turret

lutions per second) = 16, which is the number of seconds

required to make a piece.
Proportioning the Cam Circumference. If the spindle

revolves 339 times while making one screw or for one revolu-
tion of the camshaft, each y-J -Q of the cam periphery represents
234 CAM DESIGN

339-7-100=3.39 revolutions of the spindle. Then, if 14

revolutions are required for indexing, the part of the cam cir-

cumference controlling this indexing movement will extend

over 14 -5- 3.39 = approximately 4 spaces, each representing
a hundredth of the cam circumference. Similarly, if 84 revo-
lutions are required for rough-turning, the cam circumference
needed for this operation will equal 84 -f-
3.39
= 25 hundredths,
approximately. In this way, the cam surface is divided in

proportion to the number of spindle revolutions necessary

Fig. 3. Templet used for Laying Out Automatic Screw

Machine Cams

for each operation, and it is advisable to list the results as

shown in the column at the right-hand side of Table I.
The Cam Blanks. The cam blanks used on the Brown &
Sharpe machines are made from solid disks of mild cold-rolled
steel. The blanks cams are 4! inches in diameter for
for lead
throws less than one inch, and 5 inches in diameter for throws
over one inch. The blanks for the cross-slide cams are 4!
inches in diameter. Each cam has a hole J inch in diameter
and ^f inch from the center, which is used for locating the cam
 GENERAL PROCEDURE 235

on its shaft. This hole also serves as a zero point from which
all the divisions are started when laying out the cam.
Laying Out the Cam. Laying out a cam involves, first,

dividing the circumference into spaces which are proportional

to the number of spindle revolutions for each operation, and,

second, in giving each cam division or lobe a curvature, which

willimpart the required motion to the cutting tool controlled
by each division. In order to readily locate these lobes or

68\

Fig. 4. Cam for Controlling Movements of Turret-slide

divisions, the cam circle is divided into one hundred equal

parts, and, after having determined the hundredths of cam

circumference needed for each operation, the division points
are marked off accordingly. For locating these division points,
a bristol-board templet of the same diameter as the cam blank
and divided into one hundred equal spaces, as shown in Fig.
3,
will make it unnecessary to space each cam circle
separately.
The holes in the templet correspond to those in the cam blank
and facilitate setting the
templet in the correct position.
236 CAM DESIGN

Laying Out the Lead Cam. The lead cam for producing
the screw shown in Fig. i is When laying
illustrated in Fig. 4.
out this lead cam, begin at a point on its circumference oppo-
site, the J-inch hole, the zero line being established at this point.

The cam should be laid out to use, as nearly as possible, the

entire circumference. That part of the lead cam which is
not used isdown to a radius r of if inch. The contour
cut
of the lead cam or the shape of its outline is governed by
three factors: i. The circumferential space to be allowed;
2. The movement to be imparted to the cam lever and tool ;

3. The distance that the tool projects from the front side of
the turret. On the No. oo Brown & Sharpe machine, when the
roll on the lever of the lead cam is at the highest part of

the cam, the distance from the front side of the turret to the
chuck is if inch, and the maximum distance between the
chuck and turret is 3 inches, the two positions being indi-
cated in Fig. i by the dotted arcs. In many cases, the tool
projects so far from the turret that- the cam lobe controlling
itsmovement must be laid out so that it does not extend out-
ward to the full diameter of the cam blank. In other words,
the cam lobe is so located with relation to the center of the cam
that the tool in the turret will operate at the required distance
from the chuck.
To determine the radial distance of a cam lobe from the
center of the blank, locate on a center-line the nearest and
farthest positions of the turret with relation to the spindle

chuck, as shown in Fig. i, and also the location of the part to

be produced. Then measure the distance from the outward
cutting edge of the turning tool (in this case, a hollow mill
for the roughing cut), when the tool is pushed back in the turret

against its After adding about | inch to this dimen-

shoulder.
sion to allow for clearance and adjustment of the tool, lay off
the dimension from the point where the tool ends its cut,
towards the representing the forward
line turret position.
As shown in the illustration, the dimension marked "Hollow
Mill" extends about inch beyond the face of the turret when
the latter is in its extreme forward position ; therefore, the
 LAYING OUT LEAD CAM 237

cam lobe for. opera ting this tool should be laid out so that its

highest point is at least | inch from the full diameter of the

cam blank.
Cam Lobe for Roughing Cut. In producing the screw
shown in Fig. i, the stock fed against a stop in the
is first

turret and then the latter is indexed. This indexing, as previ-

ously determined and recorded in Table I, requires 4 hun-

dredths of the cam circumference; beginning then with a
zero line passing through the J-inch pin-hole in the cam blank
and using the templet shown in Fig. 3, four spaces or hundred ths
are laid out on the circumference; a radial line marked 4
should then be drawn through this point. As 25 hundred ths
of the cam circumference is required for the roughing cut,
another radial line is drawn 29 hundredths from the zero line.
The spiral cam lobe for the roughing cut is then laid off be-
tween these two lines, the curve starting on radial line 4 and
ending on line 29. Now it was found by means of Fig. i that,
owing to the length of the hollow mill and its holder, the high-
est part of this cam lobe should not extend to the outer edge
of the cam blank closer than f inch; therefore, the starting
point of the curve at a is a radial distance in from the edge
of the blank, equal to the travel of the tool plus f inch. As
the tool is to have a uniform feeding movement, the cam lobe
is laid off in the form of a spiral, or so that it has a uniform
rise from the cam center. The way in which this curve is
obtained is indicated by the illustration. The space between
the radial lines 4 and 29 is divided into several equal divisions
by additional radial lines. A corresponding number of equally-
spaced divisions are then laid off on line 0.635, representing
the rise of the cam, by means of circular arcs. The points of
intersection between the inner arc and the first radial line,
the next successive arc and the second radial line, etc., lie along
the cam curve, which is drawn through these points.
Withdrawal of Turret for Indexing. With the No. oo
machine, one-half second is required for the indexing move-
ment and, as previously determined, 4 hundredths of the cam
circumference should be employed; therefore, a radial line
238 CAM DESIGN

4 hundredths from line 29 is located and marked 33, which repre-

sents the number of hundredths from the zero position. The
inclination of the "line of drop" b depends upon the speed

at which the cam is to rotate. In this case, 16 seconds are

required to make one screw, so that the cam makes one com-

plete turn in that length of time. On this machine, if a part is

produced within from 6 to 35 seconds, the line of drop may be
tangent to the one-inch hole in the center of the cam blank.
Cams which rotate faster require an easier line of drop or one
which is not so abrupt, while cams which revolve at a compara-
tively slow speed, as, for instance, those for a period of 35
seconds or over, may have a line of drop which is radial.
Templets such as are shown in Fig. 7 are convenient to use for
constructing both the rise and drop on cams. These templets
have several lobes representing the rise and drop for different
cam speeds which are plainly stamped on the templet. After
drawing a line b (Fig. 4) tangent to the one-inch hole, describe
an arc equal to the radius of the cam roll. This arc should be
tangent with line b and located radially so that it connects
with the starting point of the next cam curve.
Cam Lobe for the Finishing Cut. A box-tool is to be
used for the finishing cut, which does not project from the turret
as far as the hollow mill, so that the cam lobe in this case may
extend to the outer edge of the cam blank. As 25 hundredths
of the cam circumference are required, radial line 58 is drawn

(33 + 25
= 58). The feeding movement of the tool occurs be-
tween lines 33 and 57 and then there is a dwell of i hundredth,
which allows the tool to remain stationary for a moment at
the end of its cut, in order to finish the shoulder or under side
of the screw-head. The curve cam lobe
for this part of the

begins at a point 0.635 mcn m fr m the e dg e f the cam blank

on line 33, as this dimension represents the advanced movement
of the tool. The curve between lines 33 and 57 is laid out
the same as for the cam lobe between lines 4 and 29.
Cam Lobe for Threading. The drop for allowing the turret
to withdraw preparatory to indexing is laid off between lines
58 and 62, the same as previously described for the drop
 LAYING OUT LEAD CAM 239

between lines 29 and 33, and then the cam lobe for controlling
the movements of the threading die is constructed. This lobe
is given a rise which is slightly less than the travel of the
die, sothat the latter will be free to follow the pitch of the
thread. In order to allow this freedom of movement, the die-
holder is so constructed that the die is prevented from rotating
with the work, but is free to move in the direction of its axis.
The actual rise of the threading lobe or cam equals the number
of spindle revolutions required for threading, divided by the
number of threads per inch, minus from 10 to 15 per cent
(depending upon the pitch of the thread) to allow the turret
to lag behind the die slightly. In this case, there are 48 threads

per inch and 14 spindle revolutions are needed for the opera-
tion, two being allowed for clearance therefore, the rise not
;

allowing for a reduction equals 14 48 = 0.292 inch. This

-f-

rise is next reduced, say, 15 per cent or to 0.250 inch, and the
lobe is laid out between radial lines 62 and 68, as 6 hundredths
are required for running the die onto the work. The thread-
ing lobe is then given a drop of 0.250 inch, covering 4 hundredths
more of the cam circumference. The exact method of laying
out the curve of a threading lobe will be described later.
The
radial position of this threading lobe must also be de-
termined so that the die movement will be in the required
position relative to the work. The height of the threading
lobe may be determined by the same method previously
described in connection with Fig. i for the hollow mill. The
distance that the face of the die-holder projects beyond the
turret is measured and, after allowing a slight amount for
clearance, this distance is laid offon the center-line from the
point where the thread ends, as indicated by the dimension
marked " Die-holder." If the die-holder projects ij inch from
the turret and -$ inch is allowed for clearance, the dimension
x, or f inch, will represent the radial distance from the outer

edge of the cam blank to the top of the threading lobe.

Unused Part of Lead Cam.
After the threading operation
iscompleted (see I), Table
the cutting-off and forming tools
come into action and the turret is not required until the fin-
240 CAM DESIGN

ished part has been severed and the stock is fed forward against
the stop in the turret for producing a new piece. That part of
the lead cam which is not used should be reduced to a radius
r of ij inch. This concentric part of the cam is connected
with the radial lines 72 and 96 by a suitable drop and rise.
While the lead lever is passing thi$ reduced part of the cam
surface, and the cross-slide tools are at work, the turret is
indexed three times, thus skipping the two holes which do not

Fig. 5.. Rear Cross-slide Cam

contain tools and bringing the stock stop around into align-
ment with the spindle.
Lobe for Stock Stop. The lobe for the stock stop is lo-

cated between the lines 96 and o, since 4 hundredths of the

cam circumference are required, as shown by Table I. This
lobeis a "dwell," which means that it is concentric and holds

the turret stationary while the lead lever is passing over it.
The height of this lobe is determined by measuring the dis-
tance that the stock stop projects from the turret, and laying
off this distance as indicated by the line marked "Stop" in

Fig. i. If the stop projects iiV inch and dimension y is f

 LAYING OUT BACK-SLIDE CAM 24 I

inch, then the concentric surface of the cam lobe should be

| inch in from the outer edge of the blank, as shown in Fig. 4.
After laying out an arc between the zero line and radial
line 4, having a radius equal to the radius of the cam roll, the

lay-out of the cam is completed. As the lead lever is passing

the space between lines o and 4, the turret is indexed to bring
the hollow mill into position for rough-turning the next piece,
and, at the same time, the spindle rotation is reversed and

Fig. 6. Front Cross-slide Cam

reduced to the slower speed used for the turning and thread-
cutting operations.
Laying Out the Back-slide Cam. The back-slide cam,
or the one for operating the rear cross-slide, is illustrated in
Fig. 5. As shown by Table I, the total movement of the cutting-
off toolequals 0.125 inch, which equals the rise of the cam
lobe between the radial lines 72 and 96. The cutting-off tool
starts at line 72 or as soon as the die has been backed off of

the work, as indicated by line 72 of the lead cam (see Fig. 4).
The quick rise a of the back-slide cam is given a radius of
ij inch, drawn from a center one-half inch from the outside,
242 CAM DESIGN

whereas the drop line b is tangent to the one-inch hole in the

center. These two lines a and b are connected to the concen-
tric part of the cam by curves having a radius of J inch which
corresponds to the radius of the cam-lever
roll. As previously
explained, the quick rise and the drop varies for different

speeds and may be laid out directly from a templet similar

to the one shown in Fig. 7, which is used on the Nos. oo and
ooG Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machines. The back-
slide cam lobe ends at line 96, 24 hundredths of the cir-

Fig. 7. Templet for Rise and Drop of Cams used on Nos.

00 and OOG Brown & Sharpe Automatic Screw Machines

cumference being utilized in connection with the cutting-off

operation. The 4 hundredths remaining between lines 96 and
o represent the time allowed for feeding the stock. That part
of the front- and back-slide cams which is not used is laid out
to a radius r of ij inch.

Laying Out the Front-slide Cam. While the cutting-off

tool is at work, a forming tool is used to shave under the head
of the screw and remove the slight burr left by the cutting-off
tool. The movement required for the forming tool is equal
to the difference between the radius of the screw-head and the
radius of the body, plus, say, 0.005 inch for clearance, giving
a total movement of 0.036 inch. Assuming that the feed of
 LAYING OUT FRONT-SLIDE CAM 243

the tool is number of spindle

to be 0.0013 inch, the required
revolutions will equal 0.036 -f- 0.0013 =27.7. As each one
hundredth of the cam circumference is equivalent to 3.39
spindle revolutions, 8 hundredths of the front-slide cam cir-
cumference is utilized (27.7 -r-
3.39
8, approximately).
= The
quick a (Fig. 6) and the drop b are laid off as previously
rise

described in connection with the back-slide cam. The forming

tool begins work at line 72, which corresponds with the point
at which the cutting-off
tool comes into action, 92 X

these two tools operating \

simultaneously. After
A
the forming tool has
been moved inward 0.036
inch, it is allowed a dwell
of one hundredth of the
cam circumference, so
that the tool can remove
the burr caused by the
cutting-off tool when
starting in. The re-
mainder of the cam is
Machinery, N. 7.
made to a radius of ij
since this part is Fig. 8. Method of Constructing Thread
inch,
Lobe on Lead Cam
not used.
Developing Cam Lobe for Threading Operation. When
cutting a thread on the Brown & Sharpe automatic screw
machines, the die is started on the work by the threading

lobe on the lead cam which actuates the turret-slide, and then
the die movement is governed by the lead of the thread, the
turret traveling at a slightly slower rate. If the cam were

laid out to positively control the movement of the threading

die, unsatisfactory results would be obtained, as the die would

be crowded at times, owing to the fact that the spindle speed
and the speed of the driving shaft are not constantly in exactly
the same ratio ; therefore, the cam lobe is laid out so that it
gives the die a positive start when cutting the first two threads,
244 CAM DESIGN

and then the cam is relieved so that the turret-slide lags be-
hind slightly.
Before the thread lobe can be constructed, the length of
the threaded portion, the number of threads per inch, and the
total number of revolutions of the spindle for completing one

piece must be determined. The rise on the cam may then be

found by the following formulas :

From 14 to 24 threads per inch, r = (R -f-

p) X 0.85
From 28 to 48 threads per inch, r = (R -r-
p) X 0.88
From 56 to 80 threads per inch, r = (R -f-
p) X 0.90
in which,

*
R= revolutions required for threading ;

p = number of threads per inch ;

r = rise on cam.

The accompanying tables, "Spindle Revolutions and Cam

Rise for Threading," give the spindle revolutions for thread-
ing various lengths and pitches, and the corresponding rise
for the cam lobe. To illustrate the use of these tables, suppose
that a cam is to be laid out for threading the screw shown
at A, Fig. 8, on a No. oo Brown & Sharpe automatic screw
machine. Assume that the spindle speed is to be 2400 revolu-
tions per minute the number of revolutions to complete one
;

piece, 400 time

; required to make one piece, 10 seconds ;

length of the threaded portion, | inch; pitch of the thread,

^2 inch, or 32 threads per inch. By referring to Table III,
"
under "32 threads per inch" and opposite "f (length of
threaded portion) the number of revolutions required is found
to be 15 and the rise of the cam lobe, 0.413 inch.
To construct the lobe, convert the revolutions into hun- .

dredths ofccam surface, or 15 -f- 400 = 0.0375, or 3! hundredths.

Then draw cam
circle B, as shown in Fig. 8, and lay off
the
on this circle
3! hundredths to advance on the screw and

3! hundredths to withdraw. Locate the top of the lobe an

amount C below the outer cam circle B as required. Bisect
the rise at E, and, with OE
as a radius and a, 6, and c as centers,
draw arcs intersecting each other at d and e. With d as a
Table III. Spindle Revolutions and Cam Rise for Threading
Table IV. Spindle Revolution and Cam Rise for Threading
 ALLOWANCE FOR TOOL CLEARANCE 247

center and radius OE, join points b and a ;

with e as a center
and radius OE, join points c and a. This gives the shape of
the thread lobe.
For convenience in cutting, when a Brown & Sharpe circu-
attachment is available, the cam surface used for
lar milling

threading is divided into minutes. Then, to obtain the lead

(or the number of minutes traversed for each y oW-hich rise)
divide the number of minutes contained in the portion of the
lobe used, by the rise. For example, 0.810 -r- 0.413 = 1.96,
or 2 minutes, approximately.
Allowance for Tool Clearance. In laying out a set of
cams, it is sometimes found necessary to make allowance

FACE OF DIE HOLDER CUT-OFF

TOOL-\

V
JL
J^TOOL POST
FORM TOOL
VX
FACE OF DIE HOLDER

MacMnery,N.Y.

Fig. 9. Diagram illustrating Method of Finding Clearance for Die-holder

for one tool to clear another, the amount of clearance neces-

sary being determined by the diameter or width of tool used
in the turret and the position of the cross-slide tools relative
to the work. When determining the amount of clearance
necessary, the rise and drop on the lead cam is disregarded
and the rises and drops on the front-slide and back-slide
cams are taken into consideration. To determine the rise and
drop to use, make a rough lay-out of the various operations
to be performed and also ascertain the approximate number
of revolutionsto complete one piece. The revolutions are
then converted into seconds. Assume that it is required to
make a brass screw as shown in Fig. 9. This screw is to be
made from J-inch round brass rod, on the No. oo Brown &
248 CAM DESIGN

Sharpe automatic screw machine, using a spindle speed of

2400 revolutions per minute backward and forward. Assume
that it is required to find the amount of clearance necessary
for the die-holder to pass the circular form and cut-off tools.
Draw form tool in position on the screw as shown to the
in the

left, and also an outline of the toolpost. Then lay out the die-
holder in position to start on the screw, as shown by the dotted

Machinery, N.Y.

Fig. 10. Method of Determining Clearance on Cross-slide Cams

lines. a releasing die-holder is used, take the diameter over

If

the heads of the screws in the holder, but, if a "draw-out"

type is used, the diameter of the cap is taken. In this case,
assume that a releasing die-holder is to be used. The die-
holder cannot advance on the screw until the form tool drops
back a distance B, but, as B is the actual distance, it will be
necessary to add an extra amount to insure that the die-holder
can advance without coming in contact with the circular form
 ALLOWANCE FOR TOOL CLEARANCE 249

tool. The extra amount of clearance necessary varies with

the type of tool used. The following dimensions give the
approximate amounts that should be added to the actual
clearance for the type of tools specified :

Extra Amount
Type of Tool of Clearance,
Inch
Drill-holders from | to -fa
Box-tools (with V-supports) from f to
Box-tools (with supporting bushing) from -^ to T\
Button-die holders (draw-out type) from T\ to T\
Button-die holders (releasing type) from | to 5

To find the amount necessary make a diagram

for clearance,
as shown in Fig. 10, laying out the
drop on the front cam as
shown. Then add, say, J inch to dimension B and measure
down from the point where the lobe finishes, scribing an; arc
of a circle through the point thus located, as shown. Then
with a radius equal to the radius of the cam roll, describe a
circle touching the arc drawn and the drop on the cam. Join
the center of the roll with the center of the
circle by a cam
straight line. The clearance is then measured
hundred ths, off in

as shown by dimension H. The starting point of the lobe on

the lead cam for threading, will be at the hundredth line D,
and the intervening space between the lines D and E will be
the amount necessary for clearance.
When the cutting-off operation follows the threading opera-
tion, it will also be necessary to allow for clearance. To find
the amount of clearance necessary for the die-holder to clear
the circular cut-off tool, proceed as follows Make a lay-out :

as shown to the right in Fig. 9, measure the distance C, add

J inch to C, and lay off this dimension from the starting point
A of the rear cam as shown in Fig. 10, drawing an arc of a
circle as before. Then draw a circle the diameter of which is

equal to roll, touching the arc drawn

the diameter of the
and the rise on the cam, and measure off the clearance as H
previously explained. The thread lobe would finish at the
hundredth line F and the cut-off tool start at the line A.
Clearance should also be allowed between the dropping back
of the cut-off tool and the feeding of the stock. To find the
25 CAM DESIGN

amount of clearance necessary add J inch to the largest radius

of the stock used, and proceed as previously explained.
Use of Cam-lever Templets. Cam-lever templets similar
to those shown in Fig. n are used for laying out cams when
very close timing is required, as, for instance, when a tool
is operated by the combined action of the cross-slide and the

turret-slide. templets are used, the center A is pivoted

When
at the center of thecam drawing, by inserting a pin or other
pointed instrument through the small hole provided for that

CENTER OF FULCRUM
OF CROSS-SLIDE
CAM LEVER

CAM LEVER TEMPLETS CAM LEVER TEMPLETS ^T CAM LEVER TEMPLETS

FOR NO3. 1 &.2. B. &S. AUTO. S. FOR NO.O.B.4S.AUTO.S.M. A FOR NO. 00. B. 4S. AUTO. S. M.

Fig. 11. Nos. 00, 0, 1, and 2, Brown & Sharpe Automatic Screw Machine
Cam-lever Templets for Finding the Starting and Finishing Points
of the Lobes for the Cross-slide and Lead Cams

purpose. The main body B of the templet can then be rotated

in any desired direction, so that the two templet arms, repre-
senting the cross-slide cam lever and the lead cam lever which
operates the turret, can be set in whatever position relative
to each othermay be required. These cam-lever templets are
made from sheet celluloid and are transparent, so that marks
on the drawing can easily be seen. The use of a cam-lever
templet will be illustrated by considering the method of find-
ing the starting and finishing points on the lobes of the cross-
slide and lead cams for a chamfering operation.

There are two methods used in laying out a set of cams

when it is necessary to obtain clearances or definite starting
 CAM-LEVER TEMPLETS 251

points for the lead and cross-slide cam lobes. The first one is
to obtain a rough estimate of the total number of revolutions

required to complete one piece, after which the revolutions

are transferred into hundredths of cam circumference, and the
location of the lobes laid out on the cam circles. Then the
"
"rises" and drops" are constructed and the amount of clear-
ance obtained by the cam-lever templets. This method usually
requires considerable experience in this line of work.
Another method is to first find the rise on the cross-slide cam
for chamfering. Then draw a diagram as shown in Fig. 12.

CENTER OF FULCRUM OF CROSS^SLIDE LEVER

Fig. 12. Diagram for Finding the Starting and Finishing Points of the
Lobes of the Cross-slide and Lead Cams forChamfering Operations

First draw circles L and

S, representing the largest diameter
of the lead cam and the largest diameter of the cross-slide cam,

respectively; then draw another circle a distance Hinside R

of the circle S, as being the rise on
shown, the dimension R
the cross-slide cam. In chamfering operations, the tool should
move longitudinally the proper distance into the work before
the cross-slide cam starts to operate. Therefore, the lead-
cam roll should be on the highest point of the lobe before the
cam on the cross-slide, used for feeding in the tool, touches
the tool-holder. In order to accomplish this result, proceed
as follows. Draw a circle G, as shown in Fig. 12, which has a
radius an amount R -f- D -f- yV smaller than that of circle S.
252 CAM DESIGN

The value of D
equal to the distance that the point of the
is

tool extends in from the face of the work when in position for

chamfering. The $ inch added to allows for clearance.D

After these circles have been drawn, the starting and finishing
points of the lobes can be found.
The cam-lever templet is now placed in position, and the
lead-cam roll is located so that itscircumference touches the
lobe on the lead cam and its center coincides with the line
A indicating the completion of the lead-cam rise. Then the
cross-slide lever is swung down so that the circumference of
the roll circle G as shown, and, with a sharp pencil,
touches the
a around the circumference of the roll, which
line is scribed
will determine the quick rise of the cam. The compasses are
then set to the desired radius for the quick rise of the cam, which
is described so that cut the circle #, representing the
it will

start of the rise on the cross-slide cam, and also be tangent to

the line which has been previously marked by scribing around
the cross-slide lever roll. Where the quick rise of the cam
and the circle H meet will be the starting point of the rise
on the cross-slide cam, indicated by the line J3, as shown.
When the starting points have been found, the next thing
is to obtain the finishing points of the lobe. The lead cam
should hold the tool in position until the cross-slide cam has
dropped back an amount equal to the distance which it has
fed the tool into the work. A line F is drawn at any con-
venient position for the finishing point of the lead cam, and the
cam-lever templet is then brought into position so that the
roll of the lead lever touches the circle and the center coin-

cides with the line F as shown. The cross-slide roll is then

swung down until its circumference touches the circle H and

a line is scribed around the circumference of the roll. Where
this line intersects, the circle representing the largest diameter
of the cam will be the finishing point of the lobe, provided the
distance R is not greater than the radius of the roll. If distance

R is greater than this radius, the line representing the drop

should be constructed tangent to the roll circumference, and
where the line representing the drop intersects the outside
 CAM-LEVER TEMPLETS 253

circle will be the finishing point of the lobe, as indicated by

line C. The space from E to C represents from one to two
revolutions for dwell on the cross-slide cam. The advantage
of this method is that the amount of clearance between the
starting and finishing points of the lead and cross-slide cams
is known in hundredths of the cam circle circumference before
the cams are laid out, thus facilitating the operation of laying
out the cams.
Laying Out Cams for Recessing. In Fig. 13 a method is
shown for finding the starting and finishing pointson the

CENTER OF FULCRUM OF LEAD LEVER

Fig. 13.Diagram for Finding the Starting and Finishing Points on the
Lobes of the Cross-slide and Lead Cams for Recessing Operations

lobes of the cross-slide and lead cams for recessing. To deter-

mine these points, the cam-lever templets are used. The
starting point, indicated by line A, and the circle represent-
ing the dwell on the lead cam are first laid out. A circle is
then drawn, the radius of which is a distance greater than K
the circle representing the dwell on the lead cam. (Distance
K is equal to the length of the recessing cut.) Before begin-
ning to lay out the cam, a maximum cam diameter should be
decided upon which will suit the length of the tool-holder used
in the turret. A circle passing through the starting point of
the rise of the cross-slide cam, as well as a circle representing
the dwell on the cross-slide cam, should also be drawn, the
254 CAM DESIGN

between these two circles being the rise R.

difference in radii
Now the cam-lever templets are placed in position on the
drawing, and the lead roll brought down so that it touches the
lead cam, center coinciding with line A. A circle
its is next M
drawn, having a radius L +
yV mcn l ess than that of the circle
passing through the starting point of the rise of the cross-
slide cam. L equals the distance from the outer face of the
work to the inner edge of the recessing tool when the latter is
in the starting position. The cross-slide roll is then swung
down until its circumference touches the circle M, as shown,
and a line is drawn around the circumference of the roll. The

FULCRUM OF RECESSING HOLDER/

POINT OF APPLICATION OF CAM

kl E H
H h~ c i I

Machinery, N. y.

Fig. 14. Diagram for Finding Rise on Cross-slide Cam for Recessing
and Chamfering Operations

quick rise line of the cam is then constructed tangent to the

roll, and where this line intersects the circle previously drawn,
which determines the beginning of the slow feeding-in rise of
the cross-slide cam, is the starting point of the slower rise of
the cross-slide cam, as shown at B. The line C, which repre-
sents the finishing point of the rise on the cross-slide cam for

feeding the tool inward, is then laid off and the cross-slide roll
swung into position. The lead roll is then swung down until
it touches the circle representing the dwell on the lead cam.
The starting point of the rise on the lead cam, located on line
Dj is slightly in advance of the finishing point on the cross-
slide cam.
The finishing points of the lobes are next located. Any line,
as Gj is taken at a convenient location, and the cam-lever
 CAM FOR RECESSING AND CHAMFERING 255

templets are then used. The lead roll is first brought into
position as shown, and then the cross-slide roll is swung down
from the outside diameter of the cam a distance equal to

R, and the drop laid off as before mentioned in regard to cham-

fering operations. The finishing point of the cross-slide lobe

would then be on the line E. The space from C to E on the
cross-slide cam would be for dwell, while the space from D
to G on the lead cam would be the rise. The space from F
to G is for dwell on the lead cam, which represents about one
or two revolutions.
Rise on Cross-slide Cam
Recessing and Chamfering.
for

When using a swing tool for recessing, the rise on the cam
should be greater than the distance which the tool is fed into
the work. To illustrate the method of finding the rise on the
cam, refer to Fig. 14, where
A = distance from center of fulcrum to center of the recessing
tool;
B= distance from center of fulcrum to point of application
of cam or center of screw at end of swinging member;
C= diameter of recessing tool ;

D= diameter of drilled hole in the work ;

E= diameter of recessed hole ;

r = travel of recessing tool =

E-C
;

R= rise on the cam.

Then R:r::B:A. As a practical example, let r equal
0.040 inch; B, i\ inches; A, i| inch; then

0.040 X 2j = .

R= - 0.080 inch.
if

Cam Rise for Drilling. There are three general conditions

which govern the amount required for drilling: i.
of rise

When the drill does not pass through the work and a center-
ing tool is not used. 2. When the drill does not pass through
the work and a centering tool is used. 3. When the drill passes
through the work and a centering tool is used. There is also
another condition, viz., when the drill passes through the work
256 CAM DESIGN

and a centering tool is not used; but, as this is not a com-

mendable method, it is not here considered.
The rise on the cam for drilling, as governed by the previous
conditions, is as follows :

1. R = g + e+ o.oio inch;
2. R = g a + o.oio inch ;

3. R= h + k a+ o.oio inch ;

"TO DEPENDING
1C
ON DEPTH OF HOLE AND \J
DIAMETER OF DRILL

Fig. 15. Method of Laying Out Cams for Deep-hole Drilling

where R= rise on cam for drilling ;

g
= depth of hole to be drilled ;

e = length of point on the drill ;

h = overall length of the work ;

k = thickness of the cut-off tool ;

a = distance from the face of the work to a place in

the centered end where the outer edges of the
begin to cut.
drill

The values of a for centering tools having 90- and 100-

degree-point angles are as follows :

For 90 degrees, a = (d c) X 0.5 inch ;

For 100 degrees, a = (d c) X 0.43 inch ;

where d = diameter of centering hole ;

c diameter of drill.
 CAM FOR DEEP-HOLE DRILLING 257

Designing Cams for Deep-hole Drilling. When drilling

deep holes, the drill should be withdrawn clear of the drilled
hole, after penetrating to a depth not exceeding two and one-
half times the drill diameter, so that the chips can be removed
from the flutes and the drill cooled and lubricated. To ac-

complish this, the lead cam is laid out as shown in Fig. 15. To
explain the method used for laying out the cam, assume that
a hole f inch in diameter and f inch long is to be drilled in a
piece of brass rod. This will require three lobes on the cam,
as it will be necessary to drop the drill back twice in producing
the hole. The rises for the various lobes can be found with
the aid of the following formulas :

Rise on first lobe = i\ X D+ 0.005 ^ ncn J

Rise on second lobe = 2| X D+ 0.003 inch ;

Rise on third lobe = 2 X D+ 0.003 inch ;

where D = diameter of drill in inches.

The amount for each successive rise should be decreased in

about the same proportion, and the feed on the drill should
also be decreased slightly for each additional lobe when cutting
machine and tool steel but, when cutting brass, the feed can
;

generally be uniform for each lobe. The rise on the various

lobes would then be as follows :

Rise on first lobe =

X J + 0.005 = 2f -349 inch ;

Rise on second lobe 2 =

X J + 0.003 = 0.300 inch ;

Rise on third lobe =2 X f + 0.003 = 0.253 inch.

The depth to which the drill can be fed into the work before
withdrawing can sometimes be increased, especially when a
turret drilling attachment is used and the drill is greater than

J inch in diameter. The space on the cam surface necessary

for dropping the drill back is generally equal to the space

necessary for revolving the turret. It is, therefore, advisable

to use more than one drill when there is a sufficient number
of emptyholes in the turret, as it will not be necessary to

resharpen the drills so frequently, and they will also be kept

cooler.
 CHAPTER VIII

OPERATIONS ON SINGLE- AND MULTIPLE-SPINDLE

SCREW MACHINES

THE operations ordinarily performed in automatic screw

machines involve plain cylindrical turning, taper turning,
forming of irregular surfaces, drilling, counterboring, reaming,
cutting annular grooves or recesses in holes, thread cutting,
and knurling. The number and kind of cutting tools used on
the machines depend, of course, upon the nature of the work ;

that is, its size and the form and location of the surfaces which
must be acted upon by the tools. The turning of simple parts,
such as ordinary screws, pins, etc., from a bar of stock can be
done by using the regular tool equipment commonly em-
ployed on all screw machines, whereas more difficult work
might necessitate the use of special tools and, in some cases,
attachments for extending the range of the machine. Before
a machine of this type is equipped for a machining operation,
it is essential to consider the bestmethod of arranging the
various tools, as well as the different types of tools available,
so that the successive operations may be performed to the
best advantage as to economy of production and the degree
of finish and accuracy required. To what extent standard
tools may be used should also be determined, and whether or
not special tool equipment will increase the rate of production
sufficiently to warrant their expense.
A general idea of the tool equipment used for different opera-
tions and also the classes of work for which automatic screw
machines are used may be obtained by studying the examples
described in this chapter. Some of these examples illustrate
the use of comparatively simple tool equipment, whereas others

represent operations for which special tools and ingenious at-

tachments are required.
258
 POINTING END OF WORK 2 59

Before reducing the diameter of the work by means of a

box-tool or other external cutting tool of a similar type, it is
necessary to chamfer the end of the work to permit starting
the box-tool cutter on a light cut, until the supports are in
position to steady the work. Pointing or chamfering the end
of the work also facilitates the setting of a hollow mill concen-
tric with the work.
One method of pointing the end of the work is shown at A
in Fig. i. The circular cut-off tool has an angular projection
on its face next to the chuck, which points the bar before it

URCULAR CUT-OFF
TOOL

at 3 fe
,CIRCULAR FORM
TOOL
J
Fig. 1. Methods of Preparing Work for Turning

fed out for the next piece. This method is

is
generally used
when the work is not very long, and when it runs practically
true. When it is necessary to cut a thread on a piece, the
beveled end of the bar is made small enough to facilitate
the starting of the die. It is sometimes impossible to
point
the bar with the cut-off tool, and, in this case, the bar is
usually
pointed by a combination centering and pointing tool as shown
at B. This tool can be used when the bar does not project
more than three and one-half times its diameter from the
face of the chuck, and also when the bar is unfinished or of

irregular shape. The tool a is used for centering the work,

thus preparing it for drilling a hole, and the tool b is used for
pointing the end of the bar.
260 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

Another condition is shown at C. Here the form tool pre-

"
cedes the box-tool, necking" the bar at a. If the face b of

the circular tool were left square and not chamfered, as shown,
a thin ring would break offbefore all the material had been
removed, as illustrated at Ca, Fig. 2, Chapter IV.
Turning Concentric with Unturned Surface. When it is
necessary to turn down a portion of a long cylindrical piece
of cold-drawn steel or other material which has a finished

surface, and have the part turned concentric with that which
has not been reduced, it is usually good practice to weaken
the bar with the circular cut-off tool as shown at D, Fig. i.
For this class of work, a supporting bushing held in the box-
tool should precede the turning tool, so that the part turned
will be concentric with the finished body of the work. Before
turning, the bar is pointed with the circular cut-off tool as
shown at A.
The diameter a of the neck should be small enough to allow
the bar to be straightened with the box-tool support, so that
it will run true. In the majority of cases, the neck a may be
made from 0.3 to 0.5 times 5, but the length c of the work,
the depth of the chip removed, and the feed used, will govern
largely the diameter of the neck. The material being turned
will also affect this diameter but in most cases this
slightly,
latter condition can be disregarded. Rods which have short
bends in them should not be used, as it will be found impos-
sible to produce a good surface on the part which is turned.

The spring collet should also run perfectly true, if good results

are to be expected.
Examples of Forming Operations. According to a common
rule, two and one-half times the smallest diameter of the
work is the maximum width advised for forming that is, the ;

width of the form tool cutter a for forming the screw at A in

Fig. 2 should not exceed two and one-half times the diameter
of the threaded body b. This means that, when a piece is too

long to form, it must be reduced by an end- working tool,

such as a hollow mill or a box-tool.
This rule, however, is subject to variations. By actual test
 FORMING OPERATIONS 261

ithas been found that screws and other parts made from
machine and tool steel can be formed with a form tool the
width of which is four times the smallest diameter of the part
to be formed. This does not mean a piece of the shape shown
at B in Fig. 2, where the smallest diameter c is on the end of

Fig. 2. Examples of Forming Tool Operations

the piece, but it applies to pieces similar to those shown at

A, C, and D, where the smallest diameter of the work is next

to the spindle. Again, it would be very easy to form with a
tool of a width equal to four times the smallest diameter, if
that diameter were not very small. Two examples of this

,-CIRCULAR FORM
^ TOOL FORM TOOL
^-CIRCULAR

CIRCULAR CUT-OFF

CIRCULAR CUT-OFF^

Machinery. N. Y.

Fig. 3. Method of Applying the Circular Forming and Cutting-off Tools

class of forming are given, and can safely be used as a guide

for doing work of a similar character.
The first test was the forming of a f -inch piece of screw stock
with a tool ~IQ inch wide, down to ^ inch in diameter. In
this case, the width is four times the smallest diameter.
This test was performed on a No. 2 Brown & Sharpe automatic
262 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

screw machine and the surface speed of the stock averaged

about from 80 to 85 feet per minute, with a feed of o.ooi inch
per revolution. This forming was successfully done without
any of the pieces breaking off. The second test was made on
a piece of |-inch iron wire, which was formed to a diameter
of -IQ inch, the form tool in this case being i inch wide. This
test was made on a |-inch Cleveland automatic screw machine.
The maximum surface speed of the stock was 90 feet per min-
ute and was calculated as nearly as possible that the chip
it

averaged from 0.0004 to 0.0008 inch thick. Therefore, the use

of a hollow mill or box-tool can sometimes be avoided and
circular form and cut-off tools used instead. The two methods
of forming the piece shown at A and B in Fig. 3 on the No. 2
Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine, and the following
order of operations, show clearly the advantage that the form-
ing method has over the box-tool or hollow-mill method of
turning. With the method shown at A, two roughing box-
tools are used for reducing the diameter of the stem 6, and,
as the stem was also required to be smooth, a finishing box-tool
was used, as can be seen in the following order of operations.
The feed also had to be fine, to avoid a large teat, as the cut-off
tool forming such a round head would cause the piece to break
off before it had been entirely cut off.

Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Feed stock to stop 29 2
Revolve turret 29 2
First roughing box-tool o.soo-inch rise at o.oos-inch feed. . 100 8
Revolve turret 29 2
Second roughing box-tool o.5oo-inch rise at o.oo5-inch feed 100 8
Revolve turret 29 2

Finishing box-tool o^oo-inch rise at o.oo5-inch feed 100 8

Revolve turret ^
29 2
Form o.5io-inch rise at o.ooi5-inch feed 340 29
Cut-off o.332-inch rise at o.ooo9-inch feed 383 33
Revolve turret twice while cutting off (58) (5)
Total number of revolutions to make one piece 1168 100

The spindle speed used was 549 revolutions per minute, so

that the time to make one piece was 135 seconds, gross product
in ten hours, 266 pieces. The new method of making this piece
is shown at B in Fig. 3. The form tool travels the same dis-
 FORMING OPERATIONS 263

tance as when using the method shown at A, but a much finer

feed is employed on account of the greater width of the form

tool. No time is lost, however, as one piece is being cut off

at the same time that another piece is being formed. It might

be well to mention that no trouble was experienced by feeding

Fig. 4. Cams for Making the Piece shown in Fig. 3 by the Method
shown at B

the stem out against the stop that ; is, the stem b did not bend
or become distorted in any way.
By comparing the following order of operations with those

previously given, it will be noticed that there is considerable

increase in production, and also that the work is handled
more expeditiously.
Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Feed stock to stop 16 3
Cut-off 0.33 2-inch rise at o.oooy-inch feed 503 97
Form 0.5 lo-inch rise at o.ooi-inch feed (503) (97)
Revolve turret five times (go)
Total number of revolutions to make one piece 519
264 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

The speed of the spindle was 519 revolutions per minute,

giving a maximum surface speed of 84 feet per minute. The
time required to make one piece was 60 seconds, giving a gross
product of 600 pieces in ten hours. This is a considerable
increase as compared with the 266 pieces obtained by the
"
method shown at A, and the gain is not made by hogging"
out the work, because the feeds are finer and the work is better.
The cams used for the operation shown at B in Fig. 3 are
shown in Fig. 4. The cut-off and form cams start at o hun-
dredths and finish at 97 hundredths on the cam circle. The

'Machinery

Fig. 5. Piece to be Made Arrangement of the Circular Tools

form cam is shown by the dotted lines and the cut-off by long
dashes and the lead cam by a full line.
;

Another piece on which the production was increased con-

siderably is shown at E in Fig. 2. This is a thumb-screw made
from i -inch machine steel on a f-inch Cleveland automatic
screw machine, which had been changed to take i-inch stock.
This piece was first made on a Cleveland automatic having a
single-acting cross-slide, that is, the front and back tools were
mounted on the same slide and could not be operated inde-
pendently. The order of operations for making this screw by
this method is as follows :

Revo- Sec-
Order of Operations lutions onds
Feed stock to stop 30 6
Form 275 55
Knurl from turret IOO 20
Thread on and off 40 8
Cut-off 300 60
Total number of revolutions to make one piece .
745 149
 RECESSING 265

This order of operations gave a gross product of 240 pieces

in ten hours. To it was
increase the production of this piece,
transferred to a Cleveland machine which had a double inde-
pendent cross-slide, thus enabling the cut-off and form tool
to be operated at the same time. A cross-slide knurling tool
was also used on the cross-slide, obviating the necessity of
putting it in the turret. The order of operations for this piece
isas follows, and it can be seen that a considerable increase
was the result of this change.
Revo- Sec-
Order of Operations lutions onds
Feed stock to stop 30 6
Cut-off 300 60
Knurl, attached to cut-off tool
Form, while cutting off (275) (55)
Thread on and off 40 8_
Total number of revolutions to make one piece 370 74

The gross product by this method was 486 pieces in ten

hours, or over twice that of the previous method.
A Recessing Operation. The piece shown in Fig. 5 gave
considerable trouble before was made successfully on the
it

automatic screw machine. This piece was made from machine

steel | inch in diameter, in a No. o Brown & Sharpe automatic
screw machine. In considering the speed, it was found that
forforming the stock could run at about 80 feet per minute,
and at 30 feet per minute for thread cutting. Therefore, the
spindle speeds required are 611 and 603 revolutions per minute,
respectively, but, by referring to the table, it will be found
that the nearest spindle speed 663 revolutions per minute.
is

The recessing is performed with a Brown & Sharpe standard

swing tool, which is the tool usually selected for this class of
work. The recessing cutter is first fed at right angles to the
spindle by the cross-slide, after which it is fed forward by the
turret. The feeds given in the following were found to be
sufficiently light, and the tools stood up well without continual
sharpening.
The method of setting the circular tools on the machine is
shown to the right in Fig. 5. The circular form tool A is lo-
cated on the back-slide, and the cut-off tool B, on the front-
 266 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

slide. The form tool operates while the hole being drilled;is

this is practicable, because the smallest diameter to be formed

is0.245 inch, while the diameter of the drilled hole is 0.161
inch. The surface speed of the drill is only 28 feet per minute,
as the machine spindle cannot be run faster on account of

threading. Some operators prefer a high-speed drilling attach-

ment for this kind of work. The order of operations for making
this piece is as follows :

Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Feed stock to stop 13 3
Form o.i 28-inch rise at o.ooi-inch feed (128) (29)
Revolve turret 13 3
Center o.ogo-inch rise at o.oo5-inch feed 18 4
Revolve the turret 13 3
Drill o.5i2-inch rise at o.oo4-inch feed 128 '29
Revolve the turret 13
*

3
Recess o.o5o-inch rise at o.oo28-inch with rear cross-slide . . 18 4
Recess from turret o.25o-inch rise at o.oo5i-inch feed. ... 49 n
Drop back rear cross-slide 9 2
Revolve turret 13 3
Thread in 9 2
Thread out 9 2
Cut-off o.274-inch rise at o.oo2-inch feed 137 31
Revolve turret twice (26) (6)
Total number of revolutions to make one piece 442 100

With this lay-out, a piece is made every 40 seconds, which

means a gross production of 900 pieces in ten hours. The
cams for this piece are shown in Fig. 6 and consist as usual
of the lead, front-slide, and back-slide cams. It will be noticed
that the rear-slide cam has a lobe of from 45 to 60 on the cam
circle. The use of this portion is as follows At 45 the recess-
:

ing tool is brought into place by the lead cam, the rear-slide
cam moves forward 0.050 inch, feeding the recessing tool in
to take the depth of chip required. Then at from 49 to 60
the form cam has a dwell while the recessing tool moves for-
ward; the allowance from 60 to 62 is made to withdraw the
back slide before withdrawing the swing tool.
Drilling and Counterboring from Cross-slide. Hand screw
machine operations are frequently performed on work partly
made in the automatic machines, because in order to complete
the work in the automatic machine it would require seven
tools, which exceeds the number of holes in the turret of a
 DRILLING AND COUNTERBORING 267

Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine. At A, in Fig. 7,

is shown a piece of work knurled on one end, which was made
in a No. 2 Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine. Unless
a combination counterbore is used, the list of turret tools

required will be a stop, center, drill, reamer, two counterbores,

and a knurl.
The method used in holding the extra counterbore is shown

CUT OFF
0.274

FRONT.
REAR
Machinery

Fig. 6. Cams used in Making the Piece shown in Fig. 5

at A in Fig. 8. The counterbore is held in a holder placed

on the cross-slide, and when the counterbore is in line with
the hole in the work fed forward by means of the stop
it is

in the turretcoming against the rear end a of the counterbore.

The counterbore is made a good sliding fit in the hole in the
boss, and is prevented from turning by the headless screw b.
A pin driven into the shank of the counterbore and a helical
spring assist in keeping the counterbore in the "back" position.
268 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

The order of operations for producing the piece shown at A

in Fig. 7 is as follows :

Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Clearance 19.6 2
Feed stock to stop 19.6 2
Revolve turret 19.6 2
Center o.i 25-inch rise at o.oo63-inch feed 19.6 2
Revolve turret 29.4 3
Drill o.5oo-inch rise at o.oo56-inch feed 88.2 9
Revolve turret 29.4 3
Ream o.5oo-inch rise at o.oo72-inch feed 137.2 14
Revolve turret 29.4 3
Counterbore o.iso-inch rise at o.ooi4-inch feed 107.8 n
Revolve turret 29.4 3
Knurl on o.3oo-inch rise at o.oio2-inch feed 29.4 3
Knurl off o.3OO-inch rise at o.oi 53-inch feed 19.6 2
Revolve turret 29.4 3
Advance front slide and dwell 88.2 9
Counterbore from cross-slide o.i 25-inch rise at 0.002 i-inch
feed (58.8) (6)
Clearance (19.6) (2)
Cut-off o.477-inch rise at o.ooi67-inch feed 284.2 ^9
Total 980.0 100

The cams producing the piece shown at A in Fig. 7 are

for
shown Fig. 9, where the various functions of the lobes
in
are clearly indicated. The most interesting lobe on this set
of is the lobe on the cross-slide cam from 63 to 71, which
cams
brings the special Counterbore shown at A in Fig. 8 in line
with the hole in the work. The stop in the turret used for
feeding in this counterbore, and which is also used for gaging
the stock to length, is operated by the lobe from 63 to 69 on
the lead cam. It will be noticed that this lobe is much lower
than the lobe from2 to 4 gaging the stock to length, the reason

being that the counterbore projects much further from the

chuck than does the stock when fed out.
Another simple method of holding an extra tool on the cross-
slide is illustrated at B in Fig. 8. Here the holder is made
so that it will take either a drill or a counterbore, which is held
in itby means of a headless screw. The tool is rotated by
means of the grooved pulley c, which fastened to the spindle
is

d as shown. This pulley is driven from the overhead works

by a round belt, which is left sufficiently slack to allow the
front cross-slide to advance to a position in line with the work.
 DRILLING AND COUNTERBORING 269

The drill is fed forward by a stop held in the turret, and is

withdrawn by the coil spring e.

Other operations performed with drills and counterbores
held on the cross-slide are shown in Fig. 7 at Bj C, D, and E,

0.30 u_

Machinery

Fig. 7. Samples of Work operated on by Counterbores and Drills held on

the Cross-slide

respectively. At C isshown a piece made with an eccentric

hole. This is easily produced by means of a drill held in a
holder fastened to the cross-slide. It is necessary to lock the

spindle when the hole is being drilled. A drill-holder similar

WASHER

Machinery

Fig. 8. Holders for Carrying Drills and Counterbores on the Cross-slide

in construction to that shown at B in Fig. 8 is used. The

piece shown at C is made with holes having different degrees
of eccentricity; otherwise the pieces made with an eccentric
hole are of the same size and shape. It is interesting to com-
pare this method of drilling with the old method, which con-
270 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

sisted in holding the stock in an eccentric chuck or in drilling

each piece in a drill jig. The method last mentioned is ex-
pensive, and the eccentric chuck method is very destructive
to the cut-off tools, owing to the pounding of the stock against

the cutting edge.

At B is shown how wrench slots were produced in a special
nut. The holes were first drilled, after which the shank was

11

CAM OUTLINES 59
LEAD
FRON
REAR Machinery

Fig. 9. Cams used in Producing the Piece shown at A in Fig. 7

turned down by means of a box-tool, leaving only one-half

of the drilled holes in each side. To produce this piece, the

cross-slide cam moves the drilland holder forward part way,

then dwells while the first hole is being drilled, by means of
a stop in the turret forcing the drill into the work. After the
first hole is drilled, the cam advances into position for the

second hole, when the same operation is repeated. At D is

shown a washer provided with two holes which were also drilled
 MAKING WATCH PARTS 271

in this At E is shown a piece which requires a differ-

manner.
ent movement. The lead cam is not used at all, and the groove
a is cut by a special tool held on the cross-slide. After the
machine spindle is locked in position by means of the brake,

one side and is fed across by the cross-slide

this tool starts at
cam. These special operations give little trouble, especially
on brass work, the material from which the parts described
were made.
Making Watch Parts in the Screw Machine. Watch-
making by automatic machinery is essentially an American
development. Previous to the inauguration of the industry

Machinery

Fig. 10. Blank for Watch Pinion Fig. 11. Blank for Watch Wheel
made by Forming from Tool- Staff made by Turning from
steel Stock Tool-steel Stock

in Waltham, Mass., Switzerland held the lead in the manufac-

ture of watches on a large scale. The hand processes there
followed are the result of long experience and careful study,
and the work is highly organized so far as the division of labor
is concerned, separate workmen specializing on single opera-
tions, which they repeat day after day. Swiss watches are
not handmade in the sense in which we apply that term to
custom-made footwear, for instance. Lathes, presses, gear-
and pinion-cutters, and other power-operated machines are
used in the various operations required. These tools have,
however, been largely operated by hand in the same way that
ordinary engine lathes are operated, as distinguished from the
mechanically-controlled movements of the automatic gear-
cutter or screw machine.
In American watchmaking practice the automatic principle
has been developed to an extent that is little short of mar-
272 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

velous, the parts not only having complicated operations

performed on them in single machines, but even being trans-
ferred from one machine to another automatically, through a

long series of operations. The various manufacturers of watches

FEED STOCK

OF TURRET IN
BACKWARD POSITION

1ST OPERATION
POINT WITH POINTING TOOL-
IK FLOATING HOLDER

2ND OPERATION
FORM WITH FRONT AND
BACK SLIDE TOOLS '

SUPPORT WHILE FORMING

WITH TELESCOPIC SUPPORT
'IN TURRET

3RD OPERATION
CUT OFF WITH ANGULAR
CUTTING-OFF TOOL

Machinery

Fig. 12. Tools used and Order of Operations followed in Making the Pinion
Blank shown in Fig. 10

in this country have, as a rule, each developed their own

machinery, although the automatic screw machines made by
the Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co. have been invading this highly
specialized field of watchmaking. These machines have also
met with considerable favor in the Swiss watchmaking field,

committed though it is by years of precedent to the use of

 MAKING WATCH PARTS 273

the hand-operated machine. The particular work for which

this tool has been applied in the turning of the larger pinion
is

blanks and staffs (the slender shafts or spindles on which

gears and pinions are mounted). These parts have to be made

with a high degree of accuracy, both as to their dimensions
and as to their concentricity, or the trueness with which they
run on centers.
Tools and Operations for Making a Pinion Blank. The
part shown in Fig. 10 is one of the larger pinion blanks used
in a Swiss watch. In making it by the old-fashioned methods,
a blank cut off and formed at each end with the cone points
is

shown, which are supported in female centers in the lathe,

where successive cuts are taken to bring it to the required
dimensions, the same as would be done for much larger work
in the engine lathe. This operation is practically duplicated
in the automatic screw machine, so far as turning on centers
is concerned.
The order of operations and the tools used for each of them

may be followed from Fig. 12. The first operation is the feed-
ing of the stock. No stop is used for the stock to feed against,
the feeding mechanism being accurate enough to always leave
a few thousandths of stock for the first operation, which is
that of pointing the end of the bar to form the outer cone-
shaped pivot point of the work. This is done by a tool mounted
in a "floating" holder, which may be firmly clamped in the
proper position for forming an accurately pointed pivot each
time the machine is set up. With this tool, the accurate align-
ment of the turret with the axis of the spindle is not abso-
lutely necessary; in fact, no alignment accurate enough for
this purpose could be permanently maintained. This piece
of work is short and stiff enough so that it can be turned en-

tirely by circular forming tools mounted in the cross-slide.

These forming tools are shown work in the second operation
at
in Fig. 12. The one in the front cross-slide turns the two
diameters forward of the largest diameter on the work, while
the rear cross-slide turns the two diameters on the other side
of the collar, and rough-turns the protecting end of the stock
274 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

for the cone point of the next part to be made. While these
operations are in progress, the outer end of the work is sup-
ported in a delicate female center, in a spring plunger held in
the turret. It was stated that this part is practically turned
on centers. The significance of this statement will be under-
stood by studying the second operation, and the succeeding
or third operation. Since the outer end of the work is sup-

ported by the center while the forming is in progress, the di-

ameters thus turned must be true with that center. In the
third operation, the center
at the other end of the work
WORK is formed. The forming of
this center is shown in Fig.

13. The blade follows a

LINEOF TRAVEL diagonal line of travel, so
OF THE TOOL
that the center is turned to
the right angle. Face a is
beveled so that it clears the
work entirely, and the point
Machinery
isquite sharp. The cutting
Fig. 13. The Cone Point Turning and
action is thus entirely on the
Cutting-off Operation
face of the stock, and the
work not subject to any pressure whatsoever, but remains
is

attached to the stock until the tool has progressed so far that
itseparates and falls off by its own weight, leaving the point so
sharp as to be for all practical purposes a perfect one. The
outside diameter of the piece is left stock size. This large
diameter has the pinion teeth cut in it and runs true enough
for all practical purposes.

Cone-point Turning and Cutting-off Tool. The construc-

tion of the point turning tool is shown in Fig. 14. The cutting-
off blade B
is held in a slot in tool-slide C and rests on adjust-

ing screw D
and pin E. It is clamped in position by screw
F. By adjusting screw D, the blade rocked about pivot E
is

to bring the point higher or lower as may be required to accu-

rately center it with the axis of the work. Slide C is gibbed
to a dovetail guide on slide carrier G. This member is pivoted
 MAKING WATCH PARTS 275

to the body of the tool H about the axis of bolt /, and is clamped
by screw K in the proper location to guide the slide C in form-

ing the desired angle for the pivot of the work.

Tool-slide C has attached to it a rack which meshes with
the 32-pitch pinion L, pivoted to the under side of G. Pinion
L meshes with a similar pinion M
pivoted in a hole in the body
,

SECTION ON LINE X-X

TOP VIEW
WITH TOOL-HOLDER REMOVED

ADJUSTMENT OF BLADE
IN TOOL-HOLDER

FRONT VIEW SIDE ELEVATION

WITH TOOL-HOLDER REMOVED WITH TOOL-HOLDER REMOVED Machinery

Fig. 14. Construction of Cone Point Turning and Cutting-off Tool

of the toolabout the center of bolt /, so that the correct rela-

tionsbetween them are preserved whatever the angular ad-
justment of G on H. Pinion M
is lengthened and at its lower

extremity meshes with rack teeth cut in the side of plunger N.

This is best seen in the section on line xx. This plunger, as may
be seen in the side elevation, has at its front end a projection

extending upward bearing against a plunger in a hole above

it, which is pressed outward by a spring. By this means, N

is normally kept at the outer end of its movement, being
limited in this direction by the seating of screw in the recess P
276 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

I
FACE OF TURRET IN
BACKWARD POSITION

1ST OPERATION
POINT WfTH BOX POINTING
TOOL

2ND OPERATION
TURN LARGE SHOULDER A
USING SWING TOOL
WITH TELESCOPIC
SUPPORT

3RD OPERATION
TURN INTERMEDIATE
SHOULDER B
TOOL USED IS A DUPLICATE
OF TOOL USED FOR
2ND OPERATION

4TH OPERATION
TURN SMALL DIAMETER C
TOOL USED IS A DUPLICATE
OF TOOL USED FOR
2ND OPERATION

6TH OPERATION
FORM WITH BACK SLIDE TOOL
FORM WITH FRONT SLIDE TOOL
SUPPORT WHILE FORMING
WITH TELESCOPIC SUPPORT
IN TURRET

6TH OPERATION
CUT OFF WITH ANGULAR
CUTTING OFF TOOL

Machinery
 MAKING WATCH PARTS 277

provided forit in the body H of the tool. In this position, the

withdrawn so that the blade clears the work.
tool-slide is
The front end of N is provided with knurled screw Q and
lock-nut R. These are so located as to be in line with a pusher
or raising plate attached to the front cross-slide of the machine,
when the turret has brought the tool to the proper position
for cutting off. The cutting off is effected by the movement
of the cross-slide. The pusher bears on screw Q, presses plunger
N inward, revolving pinions M arid L, which, in turn, acting
on the rack attached to the tool-slide, move cutter B inward,
severing the work from the bar and forming the pivot point,
as shown in Fig. 13. The length of the inward travel of the
tool is adjusted by screw Q and lock-nut R. The swiveling
adjustment of the pusher plate is not needed for this job.
Cams for Making Pinion Blank. At A, B, and C in Fig.
1 6 are shown the cams by which the feeding movements of

the machine are effected for performing the operations shown

in Fig. 12. As isknown, the Brown & Sharpe automatic
well
screw machine has a front and a back cross-slide and a turret-
slide, each controlled by its own separate plate cam. In Fig.
1 6 the various radial lines are figured to show their distance

from the starting point o, in hundred ths of a circle. The

various acting surfaces of the cams are marked to indicate
the operations performed by them. The material used for
this pinion blank is The spindle revolves 1320
tool steel.
revolutions per minute, giving a surface speed to the work
of about 58 feet per minute, which is suitable for the material
used with the heavy flow of oil directed on the cutting edges
of the tools. It takes 770 revolutions to make a piece, so that
each hundredth of a revolution of the cam represents 7.7
revolutions of the spindle. Knowing this, the various feeds
can be readily figured out. On the back-slide cam, which takes
the wider of the two forming cuts, a finer finishing feed is used
between positions 60 and 72^ than for the first portion of the
forming between 20 and 60. This is done to produce the
finer finish which the finer feed gives. It will also be noticed
that in all forming operations, such as those performed by the
278 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE
 MAKING WATCH PARTS 279

two and by the turret-slide in pointing the work

cross-slides,
"
in the operation, the cams are provided with
first dwells,"
or resting places where the periphery of the cam is, for a short

space, a portion of the circumference of a circle, so that the

slide isallowed to rest at this point while the chip runs out.
This produces a smooth final finish. The net production is
900 per day, allowing time for sharpening tools, etc.
Tools and Operations for Making a Watch Staff. The
part shown in Fig. n
has to be handled somewhat differently
from the one just considered. It is much longer and more
slender, and cannot be formed by cross-slide tools. The order
of operations is indicated in Fig. 15. The stock, having been
fed to length, is pointed by the turret tool shown in the first

operation. In this tool the stock is supported by a bushing

while the end is being pointed, the work being too slender to
support itself, as in Fig. 12. In the second operation, shoulder
A is turned. This is done by a swing tool. The pointed end
issupported in a female center, a turning cut is taken over the
shoulder of the finished diameter required, the cutting blade
is it is not dragged over the work on the
released so that

return, and then the turret is revolved for the next opera-
tion. Operations 3 and 4 are also performed by the same
kind of a tool and in the same way, shoulders B and C being
each finished in turn. It will be noticed that the smallest
diameter is finished last. If shoulder C were turned first to
its finished size, it would not be stiff enough to support the
succeeding cuts A and B, with assurance that they would be
true with the cone-pointed end.
In the fifth operation, the work is supported in a female
center while formed tools in the front and rear cross-slides

square up the shoulders already turned, and remove the burrs

caused by the turning tools. The front cross-slide tool forms
the small diameter to the left of the collar and squares up the
sides of the collar itself. As will be seen from a study of the
cams D, E, and F, Fig. 16, the front cross-slide tool does not
begin to cut until the one in the rear has completed its work.
The stock is too slender to permit of too much work being done
280 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

on it In the sixth operation, the same angular cutting-

at once.
shown in Fig. 14 is used for severing the work from
off tool as

the bar and forming the cone point at the same time. It will
be seen that in the operations just described, as in the previous
case, the various diameters will be as concentric with the pointed
centers of the work as if they had been turned on them.

Machinery

Fig. 17. Swing Tool used for Operations on Part Shown in Fig. 15

Operation of the Swing Tool. The swing tool used in

Operations 3, 4, and 5 in Fig. 15 is shown in Fig. 17. To the
body T (about stud U) the tool-holder
of the device is pivoted

V, carrying blade W, which is adjusted vertically and clamped

by the square-headed screws shown. In a hole drilled into
the body of the tool is contained a plunger Z pressed outward
by a spring. The opening of this hole is closed by a screw,
as shown. A pin X driven into the side of tool-holder V pro-
jects through a side hole into T, and bears on the face of
plunger Z. By this means, the spring keeps V swung outward,
the movement being limited
by the bearing of Z on the head-
less set-screw. Abutment screw F,
in part V, is in position to
bear against the pusher or raising plate carried by the cross-
slide.

In turning shoulders A, B, and C (Fig. 15), the movements

 MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES 281

of the front cross-slideand turret-slide cams are so arranged

that the swing tool brought up to the work the cross-slide
is ;

is next moved in to set the tool W

to the diameter desired, as
determined by the adjustment of screw F; then the swing
tool fed forward the proper distance for the shoulder. The
is

is next withdrawn, allowing tool

front cross-slide to swing W
outward under the influence of the spring and plunger Z.
The turret-slide then retreats, drawing the blade out of the
way without allowing it to drag on the work. The swivel
adjustment on the raising plate allows either straight or taper
turning to be done, as required.
The Cam Equipment. The cams, shown at D, E, and F
in Fig. 1 6, for making the part shown in Fig. n appear to be
somewhat complicated, but the operations may be easily
followed. The various lobes of the three cams are marked for
the operations for which they are intended. The abbrevia-
"
tion "I. T." means "index turret," and the term dwell"
indicates a concentric portion of the cam, where the slides
are at rest. In making this piece, the spindle revolves at
2400 revolutions per minute. The stock
0.063 inch in di-
is

ameter, which gives a surface speed of about 40 feet per min-

ute. The material is tool steel. The net production for these

pieces was 1500 per day. The total revolutions to make one
piece is 840, so that each hundredth on the periphery of the
cams represents 8.4 revolutions.
Examples of Work on Cleveland Automatic. The suc-
cessive operations for produqing the parts shown in Fig. 18,
on the Cleveland automatic, will be described. The special
chrome-nickel steel sleeve shown at A requires drilling, form-
ing, recessing, and tapping. A 3^-inch model A machine
with a No. 4 spindle drive is used. As shown in Fig. 19, the
operations are in the following order :

1. Gage the stock to length by a gage stop A in the first

hole in the turret.
2. Index the turret and rough-turn the large diameter
with cutter a, using an overhanging turning attachment B,
and at the same time drill a large hole full depth, using a drill
282 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

and split C in the second hole in the turret; time of

holder
operations, 3 minutes 35 seconds.
3. Index the turret and finish- turn the large diameter with
the second cutter b held in a turning attachment, and at the
same time counterbore a large hole, using a counterbore and
holder D held in the third hole in the turret. As no tools
are in the the front side, forming tools E and F can
way on
be brought into operation to face the end and to form the rear

fftf
A CHROME NICKE'L STEEL

Machinery C.R. STEEL

Fig. 18. Examples of Work done on Cleveland Automatic

diameters, using flat forming tools and a toolpost, and an

open-side toolpost on the front of the cross-slide. The time
for these operations is 4 minutes 30 seconds.
4. Index the turret and drill a small hole, using a drill and
splif holder G in the fourth hole in the turret. Time of opera-
tion is 2minutes 15 seconds.
5. Index the turret, recess, using a recessing tool and holder
H in the fifth hole in the turret. The operating cam for
effecting a movement of the recessing tool is held on the
front of the cross-slide. Time of operation is i minute 25
seconds.
6. Index the turret and bring the tap-holder I and tap held
 MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES

3RD FINISH TURN, COUNTERBORE,

6TH AND 7TH TAP AND CUT-OFF

Fig. 19. Tool Equipment and Operations for Making a Chrome-nickel Steel Sleeve
"
on a Model A" Cleveland Automatic
284 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

in the sixth hole into operation. The time for threading this

piece is i minute 45 seconds.

7. Cut off,using the cut-off blade / held in a universal
cut-off toolpost on the rear of the cross-slide. Time for opera-
tion is i minute 30 seconds.
The total time for the entire operations enumerated, includ-

ing the idle motions of the machine, is 15 minutes. When the

tools have been set in their proper relation to each other, and
the feed-regulating cams have been so adjusted as to give the

proper feeds for the various tools, the position of the various
cams is noted and recorded on a chart. All the tools used are
also recorded on this chart, so that the machine can easily
and quickly be equipped and adjusted for reproducing this
same part, if necessary, at any future time.
Another comparatively simple piece of work to produce
on the Cleveland automatic is shown at B in Fig. 18. The
successive operations are shown in Fig. 20, the machine being
a 3^-inch Model A, using the No. i drive :

1. Feed the stock to stop A, which is held in the first hole

in the turret.
2. Index the turret and a hole full depth, using a drill-
drill

holder B in the second hole in the turret. Time for operation,

50 seconds.
3. Index the turret and finish- turn the outside diameter
with an overhanging turning attachment D, carrying two
cutting tools tool a for roughing and tool b for finish-turning.
At the same time, counterbore the hole, using a counterbore
held in holder E in the third hole in the turret, and form and
face with tools F and G which are held on the front part of
the cross-slide, using a post with flat cutters and spacing blocks
to locate them the correct distance apart. Time for the opera-

tion, 3 minutes 55 seconds.

4. Index the turret and finish-turn with the second cutter
b inan overhanging turning attachment D, and ream the hole,
using a reamer and floating holder H
carried in the fourth
hole in the turret. The time for these two operations is 18
seconds.
 MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES

1ST GAGE STOCK TO LENGTH

2ND DRILL HOLE B V

n_A

3RD FINISH TURN, COUNTERBORE LARGE HOLE,

FORM AND FACE

4TH AND STH FINISH TURN, REAM AND CUT-OFF

Machinery

Fig. 20. Tools for Making a Clutch Case on a "Model A" 3^-inch
Cleveland Automatic

5. Index the turret and cut off with a universal cut-off,

tool blade / and post held on the rear of the cross-slide. Time,
32 seconds.
The total time, including the idle motions for chucking,
286 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

advancing, and withdrawing the turret and indexing, is 5

minutes 35 seconds. The arrangement of the forming and
cutting-ofT tools is shown in Fig. 23. All the data obtained
from the setting-up of this job are recorded on the operation
sheet, as well as any particular features necessary to turn
out this job more effectively. All the tools and attachments
are noted under the various headings on the sheet, as well
as the size of the pulleys, number of pins in the regulating drum,
and other points regarding the proper setting-up of the machine.
In producing the twin gear blank shown at C in Fig. 18,
the greatest amount of work is done from the cross-slide. The
drilling depth is considerable, so that the best way to lay out
this job would be to use two drills, one going in part way and
the other the remainder of the distance. The operations on
a 3|-inch Model A machine with a No. i drive are as follows :
1. Gage the stock to length by a stop A (Fig. 21) held in
the first hole in the turret.
Index the turret and turn part way with a tool a in an
2.

overhanging turning attachment B carrying two turning tools,

and part way, using a high-speed drill held in holder C
drill

in the second hole in the turret. Time for the two operations,

40 seconds.
3. Index the turret and finish- turn, using the second cutter
b in an overhanging turning attachment B, and drill full depth,

using a high-speed drill-holder D held in the third hole in the

turret. At the same time, advance tools E and F held on the
front of the cross-slide and start forming the rear diameters.
Also take a cut on the front face, using tool F and an open-side
toolpost on the front of the cross-slide. Time for operations,
i minute 55 seconds.
4. Index the turret and ream a hole, using a reamer held
in a high-speed drill-holder G in the fourth hole in the turret.
The use of two on a hole of this depth avoids the necessity
drills

of using a boring tool, and the reamer in this case can be held
in a rigid instead of a floating holder. At the same time that
the hole is being reamed, three cutting blades H, held on the
rear of the cross-slide and separated by flat spacing blocks,
 MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES 287

Fig. 21. Successive Operations for Producing the Twin Gear Blank
Shown at C in Fig. 18

are brought into action. The grooving blade nearest the chuck
is made considerably wider than the requirements of the work
demand, and is used for roughing the front end of the next

piece. Time for operations, 3 minutes 40 seconds.

288 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

2ND TURN SMALL END-BOX-MILL

Machinery

Fig. 22. Operations for Producing the Stanchion Bolt shown at D in Fig. 18

5. Index the turret, and counterbore with a tool held in

holder I in the fifth hole in the turret. Time for operation,
i minute.
6. Cut off with blade /,
using an independent cut-off
attachment shown in Fig. 24, and index the turret twice. Time
for operation, 35 seconds. Total time, 7 minutes 50 seconds.
This is an example where there was considerable forming

to be done from the cross-slide, which could not be handled

 MISCELLANEOUS EXAMPLES 289

efficiently with only one set of tools, that is, using only one
end of the cross-slide for forming tools; consequently, both
ends of the cross-slide, as shown in Fig. 24, are utilized and
the work is then cut off by the independent cut-off attachment

shown. For the operation of this attachment a special cam

disk A is held on the rear shaft carrying a cam B. This is
adjustably mounted in the T-slot groove cut in the side of the
disk and can be set in any desired position. This cam comes
in contact with a roll carried in the rear end of the fulcrumed
arm of the attachment, raising it up and consequently depress-

ing the front end and advancing the cutting-off tool toward
the center of the work.
The stanchion bolt D, Fig. 18, brings up a point in the

operation of the Cleveland automatic that worthy of

is special
attention; that is, the handling of long forming operations,

especially on steel parts. This can be done much more effi-

ciently by means of a long flat forming tool than by a circular

forming tool. There are two reasons for this: i. The flat

forming tool gives much better side clearance than the cir-

cular tool. 2. The flat forming tool can be held much more

rigidly and heavier cuts can be taken with it. It is also much

cheaper to make. The only other point of interest about this

job the use of a self-opening die-holder. The use of this
is

type of die reduces the time necessary for threading, as the die
does not need to be backed off, but is opened as soon as the
thread is completed, and the turret can be drawn back on the
fast speed.

Referring to Fig. 22, it will be seen that the operations are

done in the following order, a 2 f -inch Model A machine
equipped with a No. i spindle drive being used :

1. Gage the stock to length with a gage stop A held in the

first hole in the turret.
2. Index the turret and turn down the stem with a box- tool
B held in the second hole in the turret. Time for this operation,
i minute 30 seconds.
3. Index the turret and form an irregular shape, using a
flat forming tool C held on the front of the cross-slide support ;
2 go SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

the work at the same time with a roller steadyrest held in D

the third hole in the turret, and engaging the stem of the
work. Time for this operation is 3 minutes 20 seconds.
4. Index the turret and thread, using a self-opening die-
head E in the fifth hole in the turret. Time for operation is

35 seconds.
5. Cut off, using a circular cut-off tool F held on the rear
of the cross-slide. Time, 45 seconds.
The total time, including all the idle movements, is 6 minutes
15 seconds. The arrangement of the tools heldon the cross-
The flat forming tool C
slide is clearly indicated in Fig. 25.
is mounted on a wedge A for vertical adjustment. The form-
ing tool is held down by the cap-screws and the wedge is ad-
justed by a set-screw D. Another set-screw E backs up the
forming tool, supporting it much more rigidly. The cut-off
tool is held on the rear forming slide and is turned upside
down so that the spindle need not be reversed, the cutting off

being done with the stock running in the forward direction.

Operations on Acme Multiple-spindle Machine. The
successive order of the operations in producing a long set-
screw in an Acme
multiple-spindle automatic is shown in
Fig. 26. This set-screw is made from a square wrought-iron
bar. The threaded portion is 5! inches long, the length over-

all, 63; | inches. The

longest single operation consists in turning
down the
body diameter to the required size. The spindle
speed at which to rotate the work should first be determined.
Taking the diameter of the stock across the flats as the basis
of our calculations, and deciding on a surface speed of 100
feet per minute, it will be found that the desired spindle speed
should be 611 revolutions per minute. The nearest available
spindle speed, in this case, is 635 revolutions per minute, which
gives a surface speed of about 104 surface feet per minute.
The next step is to determine the number of revolutions
necessary for the box-tool to travel up half the length of the
screw 2 1 inches. With a feed of 0.0045 inch per revolu-
tion of the work, the number of revolutions required to make
this cut is about 640. As the spindle makes 635 revolutions
 USE OF MULTIPLE-SPINDLE TYPE 2QI

Machinery

Fig. 23. Diagram showing Arrangement of Cross-slide Tools for Forming

and Cutting off Piece shown at B in Fig. 18

Machinery

Fig. 24. Arrangement of Cross-slide Tools for the Forming and Cutting-off
Operations on the Part shown at C in Fig. 18

Machinery

Fig. 25. Arrangement of Cross-slide Forming and Cutting-off Tools used

in Connection with Operations shown in Fig. 22
292 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

per minute, the time, in seconds, to turn half the body is

60~ 640
~
X ~ = 60.47 seconds. Adding to this the time for the
635 i

idle movements of the machine gives 60.47 + 2.4

= 62.87, or,
approximately, 63 seconds. This gives a product of 57 pieces
per hour, but, upon referring to the table of change-gears,
it will be found that gears to give this product are not ob-

tainable. Therefore, it is necessary to either increase the

product to 59 and increase the feed of the tools accordingly,
or else decrease the product to 51 pieces per hour with a cor-

responding decrease in feed.

The tool equipment used in making this set-screw is illus-

trated in Fig. 27. The operations start in the first position,

where the first box-tool A comes into position, turns up half
the length of the body 2| inches and points the end of
the screw. At the same time that the box-tool is in operation
on the work, the form tool comes in from the side and turns
down the neck also rough-forming the top of the head. As
the cylinder is indexed into the second position, the second
box-tool B comes into operation and finish-turns the body.
The cylinder is again indexed to the third position, where a self-
opening die C cuts the thread. After threading, the cylinder
is again indexed and the piece cut off with a straight-blade

cut-off tool D. These various operations have been described

separately, but in actual performance all tools are at work on
different bars at thesame time.
Making Knurled Thumb-nuts. The knurled thumb-nut
shown at A in Fig. 29 represents an example in which the
forming is the longest single operation, and is the time to make
one piece. This knurled nut is made from a 2 -inch bar of round
brass rod in a No. 56 Acme multiple-spindle automatic screw
machine. The first step in determining the time to make this
piece is to obtain the correct speed at which to rotate the work.
Rod brass can be worked at from 150 to 200 surface feet per
minute, and, by calculation, it will be found that a spindle
speed of 290 revolutions per minute will give 150 feet surface
speed. The next step is to determine the proper feed at which
 USE OF MULTIPLE-SPINDLE TYPE 293

to operate the form tool. Now the conditions under which

this thumb-nut is made are ideal, as far as a heavy feed is con-

cerned, so that the form tool can easily be operated at 0.005

inch per revolution. By dividing the travel of the form tool
or 0.635 inch (allowing o.oio inch to approach the work)

1ST POSITION

~~~L FORM, TURN WITH BOX-TOOL

U" .
J
'"I. ? HALF WAY AND POINT

2ND POSITION

FINISH TURN WITH BOX-TOOL

SRD POSITION

THREAD

4TH POSITION

CUT-OFF

Fig. 26. Successive Operations for Making a Long Square-headed

Set-screw

by 0.005, it will be found that it will require 127 revolutions of

the spindle to complete the forming operation.
As where the longest single operation is per-
this is a case

formed from the form tool-slide, it will be necessary to calcu-

late the time required in seconds to complete the idle move-
ments of the machine. This (For
is found to be 4.6 seconds.
information regarding the method of calculating the time for
294 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

idle movements, see Chapter V.) Then the time in seconds

to complete the forming operation equals 26.27 seconds. Add-

ing the time for the idle movements will give 26.27 4.6
= 30.87 +
seconds. Assume that it takes 30 seconds to make one piece ;

then the rate of production will be 120 per hour. The nearest

production to this for which change-gears are obtainable is

122 pieces; and, by using the change-gears to obtain this

production, the feed of the tools is increased slightly, which,

in this case, could be done with satisfactory results.
In making this thumb-nut, the rough-forming is done in
the first position and the hole drilled the proper depth
to

with drill A (see Fig. 28). In the second position, the head of
the nut knurled with knurl B, and the hole counterbored
is

to a square bottom, both operations being done by tools held

in the end- working tool-slide. The hole is tapped with tap C
and the head beveled and grooved in the third position,
the grooving being done with a shaving tool D. In the fourth
position, the completed nut is cut off from the bar with cut-off
tool E.

Making a Part Requiring Cross-drilling. The brass knob

shown at B in Fig. 29 is a difficult piece on which to determine
the longest operation at a glance. It is evident, however,
that the drilling of the large hole in the end will not require
much time, so that the longest operation lies between the
forming and cross-drilling cuts. The depth of form cut is
0.195 inch and, with a feed of 0.002 inch per revolution, it

will require 98 revolutions of the spindle to complete this

operation.
The attachment is held on the cut-off tool-
cross-drilling
slide, as shown in Fig. 30, and its travel is governed by the
feed given to the cut-off tool. As the cross-hole is deeper than
half the diameter of the stock to be severed by the cut-off

tool, it is necessary to use an accelerating cross-drilling attach-

ment. This will increase the rate of travel of the attachment

in relation to the cut-off tool-slide in a ratio of if to i. The
travel of the cross-drill is equal to the depth of the hole ^
inch plus the length of point on the drill and the height of
Fig. 27. Tool Equipment for Producing the Set-screw shown in Fig. 26 on Acme
Multiple-spindle Automatic Screw Machine

Fig. 28. Tool Equipment for Producing a Brass Thumb-nut

296 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

the arc removed from the ball by drilling a hole in it. This
is equal to 0.750 inch.
With a feed for the cut-off tool of 0.003 inch per revolution,
the feed of the drill in relation to the rotation of the spindle
is 0.003 X 1.75
= 0.0052 inch. Then the number of revolu-
tions of the spindle equivalent to the time required to drill
the cross-hole is 143. If this work is done on an Acme No. 54
machine and the speed is 520 revolutions per minute, it will

require 16.5 seconds to drill the cross-hole. Adding the time

for the idle movements i .88 gives a product of one piece
in 18.38 seconds, or 195 pieces per hour. Upon referring to
the table, it will be found that the nearest production to this

for which gears are provided is 190 pieces.

Operation Requiring Use of Milling Attachment. The
"
cold-rolled steel bushing shown in Fig. 31 has flats" milled
on the flange by means of an attachment similar to the one
shown in Fig. 13, Chapter VI, which is mounted on the cross-
slide. The end-milling cutters are brought in at the same
"
time as the cut-off tool and work in the third" position, the
cut-off tool severing the completed piece from the bar in the
"fourth" position. (Instead of using two end-milling cutters
from the side, this operation might be done as well with a
pair of saws working from the end.) It is evident from a close
study of this piece, the operations for which are shown in Fig. 32,
that the longest single cut lies between the milling and form-
ing operations. Taking the forming cut first, it will be found
that the distance the forming tool must travel is IQ inch. No
allowance need be made for the tool to
approach the work,
as the diameter by
is a
finished
shaving tool. The length of
the forming tool is about ij inch, and the smallest diameter,
i inch, so that the feed should not exceed 0.002 inch. This
rate of feed will require 93 revolutions. As the slab milling
attachment is carried on the top face of the cut-off tool-slide,
it can easily be seen that the feed given to the milling cutters
will be governed by the feed used for cutting off. As the
distance that the milling cutters must travel is greatly in excess
of the travel of the cut-off tool, an accelerating device is used
 USE OF MULTIPLE-SPINDLE TYPE 297

Machinery

Fig. 29. (A) Successive Operations on Brass Thumb-nut. (B) Operations

on Brass Knob

on the milling attachment. This increases the travel of the

milling slide over the travel of the cut-off slide in a ratio of
if to i.

With a feed for the cut-off tool of 0.0025 i ncri P er revolution,

the feed or rate of advance of the milling cutters in relation
298 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

to the revolutions of the spindle will be 0.0025 1.75

= 0.0043 X
inch. Then dividing this amount into the travel of the slide
(j| plus the radius of the milling cutters, which are J inch in
diameter, plus 0.020 inch for clearance) gives 1.082 inch travel.
This is equivalent to 247 revolutions of the spindle.
This piece can be most economically produced on a No. 54
machine, and, with a surface speed of about 95 feet per minute,

Fig. 30. Example on the "Acme

of Cross-drilling :

Multiple-spindle
Automatic Screw Machine

a spindle speed of 260 revolutions per minute is obtained. The

time required to complete the milling operation was found to
be equivalent to 247 revolutions of the spindle, or 57 seconds.
Adding the time movements (1.88 second) gives
for the idle

approximately 59 seconds to complete one piece, which is

equivalent to a product of 61 pieces per hour. The nearest
gears to the product required are those for 58.5 pieces; thus
the rate of production would be decreased to this amount.
 USE OF MULTIPLE-SPINDLE TYPE 299

Division between Two Tools.

of Cuts The threaded
bushing shown at A, Fig. 33, is made from cold-rolled steel

bar, 2 1% inches in diameter. The forming cut is rather heavy,

so that the production on this piece can be considerably in-
creased by dividing the forming cut between two forming
tools. The first forming tool is used for breaking down only
while the second forming tool is used to finish the piece to the
desired shape. The greatest reduction in diameter on this
piece is yf mcn making a rough-forming
j
travel of 0.440 inch

necessary. Now the finish-forming tool has to travel prac-

L
COLD-ROLLED STEEL

Fig. 31. Bushing that is made as indicated in Fig 32

tically the same distance as the rough-forming tool, but, while

it does not remove as much material, it is operated by the
same slide as the roughing tool; hence, both roughing and
finishing cuts consume the same amount of time and are the

longest operations.
Turning now to the drilling operation, it will be found that
a hole yf inch in diameter and 2\ inches deep has to be drilled.
This can be divided between two drills, as shown at the first
and second spindle positions, so that the travel of the main tool-
slide for drilling will be i| +A inch, or a total of 1.406 inch.
The drills can be operated successfully in this material at a

feed of o.oio inch per revolution, so that 140 revolutions will

be required to complete the drilling operation. Figuring on
a feed of 0.0015 inch for the rough-forming operation, and a
rise of 0.445 inch (0.005 mcn being allowed to approach the
work), it requires 296 revolutions of the spindle.
300 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

The tool equipment used for making the piece shown in Fig.

33 is shown* in Fig. 34. The first forming tool A is held in the

regular tool-holder, working in the first position, while the

second or finish-forming tool B is held in a special holder,
attached to the top face of the forming slide. This holder is

provided with an overhanging arm in which a set-screw C

is located, to enable the forming tool to be held rigidly in place.
In making a double tool-holder of the type illustrated, it is
essential that it be rigidly clamped to the tool-slide and have

\
1ST
OSITION

STRADDLE MILL

SHAVE, FINISH-DRILL LARGE REAM AND CUT OFF

HOLE AND FACE
Machinery

Fig. 32. Successive Operations on Steel Bushing shown in Fig. 31

as much bearing surface as is consistent with the space avail-

able. As a general rule, it is advisable, when a holder is of the
built-up type, to have the stock rotating toward the form tool
instead of away from it. This enables a much heavier cut to
be taken without chatter, as the thrust is directed against the
tool-slide instead of from it, the latter action tending to lift
the tool. In this case, however, the holder is supported by
the top bracket, thus overcoming the tendency of the tool
to rise.This job also presents another interesting feature in
the double or telescopic die-holder D. This die-holder, which
isdescribed in Chapter IV (see Fig. 38), can be used for cutting
 USE OF MULTIPLE-SPINDLE TYPE 301

ROUGH-FORM AND DRILL

LARGE HOLE HALF WAY

FINISH-FORM AND FINISH-DRILL FINISH-FORM AND FINISH-DRILL

LARGE HOLE

CUT DOUBLE THREAD

DRILL SMALL HOLE, SHAVE
ALL OVER AND FACE

Machinery

Fig. 33. Examples of Work done on Multiple- spin die Machine

threads of two different diameters and unequal pitches, owing

to its construction. The outer member of the die-holder is
spring controlled in its action, so that it can lead
out in ad-
vance of the other part of the holder, thus enabling threads of
different pitches to be cut.
Another example of work which can be produced to better

advantage, by dividing the forming cuts between two tools,

302 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

is shown at B, Fig. 33. Both forming tools are required to

take long, heavy cuts, so that rigidity is absolutely neces-
sary. In order to keep the feed up to a point where a good
production is possible, the arrangement shown in Fig. 35 was
adopted. This consists in placing the first forming tool in the
fourth position instead of in the first,, as usual, and cutting off
the completed piece in the third position. It is evident that
the cut-off tool does not need to be held nearly so rigidly as
a form tool, and can be held on an extension bracket. This
arrangement allows the rough-forming to be done in the fourth
position (where the stock is fed out), and the finish-forming in
the first position. If the stock were fed out in the first posi-
tion, the rough-forming would have to start at this point,
which would not be advisable, as the wide formed surface
could not be machined with an extension tool. The arrange-
ment shown is commendable, in that it obviates
in Fig. 35
allflimsy construction, and enables the work to be produced
much more rapidly.
The operations are as follows In the fourth position the
:

diameter is rough-formed, and the large hole drilled

part way
with drill A . In the first position, the forming cut is finished,
and the large hole is drilled to the required
drill B. depth with
In the second position, the small hole is drill F drilled with
and the diameter finished all over by a shaving tool D\ the
end is also faced with a cutter held in the holder E which is
attached to the holder G carrying the drill F. In the third
position, the hole is counterbored and taper-reamed, and the
work is cut off.
Cold-rolled steel, as a rule, can be worked at from 90 to no
surface feet per minute. It is found by calculation that a

spindle speed of 100 revolutions will be about the desired speed

at which to rotate the work. The rough-forming tool will
stand a very much
heavier feed than the finish-forming tool,
and, as both tools have to travel the same distance, it is evi-
dent that the finish-forming operation will be the one on which
it will be necessary to base our calculations. The form tool
is made up of two sections and the smallest diameter formed
Fig. 34. Tool Equipment for Producing the Steel Part shown at A in Fig. 33 on
"Acme " Machine

Fig. 35. Arrangement of Tools for Operations illustrated at B in Fig. 33

304 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

is iJ- inch. Therefore, it would be inadvisable to use a feed

exceeding 0.0015 inch per revolution of the work. Figuring
on a travel of 0.350 inch for the finish-forming tool, at the rate
of 0.0015 inch feed per revolution, 233 revolutions will be
required to complete this operation. As the forming cut is the

longest single operation, we find from this the time to make

one piece. Thespindle speed used is 100 revolutions per min-
ute, and the revolutions required for forming are 233, which
isequivalent to 2 minutes 18 seconds adding the time required
;

for the idle movements 4.6 seconds a total of 2 minutes

23 seconds, approximately, will be required to complete one
piece, or 26 pieces per hour.
Assembling Parts in Screw Machine. The assembling of
parts in the automatic screw machines is a practice which is

not widely followed, but represents an interesting develop-

ment. The examples to be described include not only the
assembling operations, but also the making of the parts to be
assembled from the same bar at the same chucking. This not
only decreases the cost of making the parts, but also eliminates
the necessity of handling them a second time.
Machining and Assembling a Bolt and Nut. In Fig. 36
is shown a small brass bolt and nut which a jobbing shop had
been making for several years, each part being made on a sepa-
rate machine. The assembling was done by hand, and consisted
of screwing the nuts on the bolts. These parts are now made
in a No. o Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine at the
same chucking, and assembled without rehandling.
The most interesting feature of the present method is the
indexing of the turret twelve times during one revolution of
the cams; that is, the turret makes two complete revolu-
tions while the cams make one the necessity for this will be
;

explained later. The machine spindle is reversed three times.

The additional revolving of the turret and reversing of the
spindle are accomplished by the use of extra tripping dogs.
The method of applying the circular tools and the assem-
bling tool is shown in Fig. 36. The form tool A forms the
body of the bolt and cuts off the nut, and B is the tool which
 ASSEMBLING IN SCREW MACHINE 305

cuts off the bolt. This latter tool is mounted on the front
cross-slide. This lay-out requires but one feeding of the
stock for both pieces. The turret tool, which is a carrier for
the nut, comes forward just before the nut is cut off, and
the spring chuck C closes over it. (The stock at this point
is running backward.)The clutch finger allows the carrier D
C to revolve in the holder E, thus preventing the nut from

turning in the spring chuck and wearing off the corners.

When the nut is inserted in the chuck C, and has been cut off,
the spindle is reversed to run forward, the clutch finger pre-

venting the carrier from turning. This clutch also acts while
the nut being screwed on the bolt. The clutch is more
is

clearly shown in the sectional view to the right. The order of

operations -is as follows:
Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Feed stock to stop 18 3
Revolve turret 18 3
Drill o.i 78-inch rise at o.oo34-inch feed v . .
53 9
Revolve turret 18 3
Tap in 12 2
Tap out 12 2
Cut off 145-inch rise at o.ooi 7-inch feed
o. 83 14
Revolve turret twice and bring carrier forward (36) (6)
Form with tool on rear slide o.i3o-inch rise at o.ooo85-inch
feed: 159 27
Back away form tool to clear threading die 12 2
Revolve turret five times (90) (15)
Thread on 17 3
Thread off 17 3
Revolve turret 17 3
Thread on nut 12 2
Reverse spindle and withdraw turret 12 2
Cut o.237-inch rise at o.ooig-inch feed
off bolt 124 21
Revolve turret twice (36) (6)
Clearance 6 i

Total revolutions 590 100

With aspindle speed of 1474 revolutions per minute, this

lay-out gives a gross production of 1500 pieces in ten hours,
or 1350 pieces net. The time required to make and assemble
both pieces is 24 seconds. After the stock is fed out to a length
make both pieces, the end is drilled and tapped
sufficient to
which is then inserted in the carrier and cut off.
for the nut,
The problem which now arises is to index the turret a sufficient
number of times to bring the carrier into position to screw the
306 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

nut on the finished bolt, as soon as the latter has been threaded.
This is by indexing the turret twice
successfully accomplished
while cutting the nut, and five times while forming the bolt.
off

The most interesting part of the job is the laying out of the
cams. The usual set of three cams is shown in Fig. 37, the
cam being shown as a solid line. It will be
outline of the lead
noticed that the lobe for centering is omitted from the lead
cam. This is done because of the shallow depth of the hole

Machinery

Fig. 36. Method of Applying the Circular Tools; the Carrier or Assembling
Tool, and Nut and Bolt to be made and Assembled

to be drilled, and also because the work is not required to be

very accurate.
The lobe which operates the carrier when gripping the nut
is shown from 28 to 36 on the lead cam, Careful calculations
are necessary to determine the exact position of this lobe, so
that the carrier will grip the nut before it is cut off. The
method used to determine the position of this lobe is as fol-
lows: During the time from 22 to 28, which is equal to 36
revolutions of the spindle, the cut-off tool has advanced at the
rate of 0.0019 inch per revolution, or 36 0.0019
= 0.0684 mcn
X -

The diameter of the stock across the corners is 0.432 inch, and
the diameter of the drilled hole is 0.125 inch. Then the thick-
ness of the wall on each side of the hole when the carrier ad-

= 0.432 (0.0684 X 2) 0.125 =

vances on the work 0.085

inch, which is great enough to prevent the nut from breaking

off when the carrier closes over it.
 ASSEMBLING IN SCREW MACHINE 307

The hook-shaped lobe from 74 to 76 threads the nut on

the bolt, and the sudden drop pulls the carrier off the nut.
The spindle is then reversed, so that it will be rotating in the
correct direction to cut off the finished piece. The portion of
the cam surfaces from 99 to o allows the cut-off tool to drop
back and clear the stock before it is fed out for the next piece.

RILL THE NUT

0.237CUT OFF BOLT /

FRONT SLIDE / //
(R.T. TWICE) / / /

36
RM 0.130 BACK SLIDE
(R.T. 5 TIMES)

Machinery

Fig. 37. Cams used for Making and Assembling Nuts and Bolts

Assembling by Means of Spinning Tool. An assembling

operation which is a little more difficult than that previously
described shown at A, Fig. 38. This operation was accom-
is

plished in a No. 2 Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine

and consists in making and assembling the socket joint a and
grooved roller b. When in use, this grooved roller rides between
two tracks as shown at A, and the ball part rotates freely in
the socket joint a. The work was not required to be held to
308 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

very close limits, and the milling and drilling, as shown at B,

were done in separate operations.
In setting-up the machine for making the pieces a and b,
the stock is first fed out by hand to the length shown at A,
Fig. 39, where the bar is faced off, and the grooved roller

ADE FROM % SCREW STOCK

Fig. 38. Pieces to be Made and Assembled

formed the stock

;
is then fed out to the length shown at B
where the grooved roller is cut off. When in this position,
the slotting arm descends, carrying the pick-up shown at C in

Fig. 40, which grips the grooved pulley, and after it is cut
off lifts it out of the way ready to be brought back, when it

Machinery.N.Y.

Fig. 39. Positions of the Stock for the Various Operations

is to be assembled in the socket joint. While the stock is

in the position shown at B (Fig. 39), the hole is drilled and
reamed. The reamer, shown at A in Fig. 40, is so shaped
that it makes a correct seat for
the ball on the grooved roller.
The tapered part a (Fig. 39) of the socket joint is formed
with a box-tool after the hole has been drilled and reamed.
 ASSEMBLING IN SCREW MACHINE 309

When this operation is finished, the slotting arm is brought

down, carrying the grooved roller, and the spring stop B,
Fig. 40, which is held in the turret, and forces the roller into
the socket joint. The spring stop remains stationary in this
position, as does the pick-up, while the spinning tool b, shown
in Fig. 39, which is held rigidly to the rear cross-slide, is ad-
vanced and turns the nose of the joint over the ball, thus as-
sembling the two parts. When this is accomplished, the spring
stop is dropped back and the stock fed out against it. The
stock is now in the position as shown at C, where the completed

joint is cut off and the next roller formed to shape, as shown
by the dotted outline, which would leave the stock in the same
position as at A. The operations for making and assembling
these two pieces are as follows :

Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Feed stock to stop 23 3
Cut off 0.3 75-inch rise at 0.002 i-inch feed 177 23
Cut off and form o.o4o-inch rise at o.ooi 2-inch feed 32 4
Clearance to bring down slotting arm while cutting off piece,
take hold of piece and return slotting arm 7 i
Center o.2oo-inch rise at 0.0051 -inch feed 39 5
Revolve turret 23 3
Turn with box- tool 0.3 75-inch rise at o.oo6-inch feed 62 8
Revolve turret 23 3
Drill o.387-inch rise at o.oo46-inch feed 85 n
Revolve turret 23 3
Ream o.387-inch rise at o.oo82-inch feed 47 6
Revolve turret and bring down slotting arm with piece 23 3
Push in piece with holder B, held in slotting arm (Fig. 40) ... (23) (3)
Spin over end with spinning tool held on rear slide 0.125-
inch rise at o.oo54-inch feed 23 3
Withdraw holder and feed stock to stop 31 4
Cut off and form o.27o-inch rise at o.oo2-inch feed 131 17
Revolve turret 23 3
Total revolutions 772 100

With a spindle speed of 421 revolutions per minute, it

requires no seconds to make one piece, which gives a gross
production of 327 pieces in ten hours. The cams for making
and assembling the pieces a and 6, Fig. 38, are shown in Fig.
41, where the lobes for performing the various operations are
clearly outlined.
Assembling a Roller on its Bearing. Another operation
requiring assembling is shown in Fig. 42. A No. 2 Brown &
3 io SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

Sharpe automatic screw machine was used. This part is made

up of a stud a, on which turns the roller b, held in place by the
washer c, the latter being pressed on the stud. The part is
shown disassembled at B. There are two unusual operations
to be performed. The first is to ream a large hole behind a
small one, and the second is to cut off three times, requiring
the stock to be fed out three times for the completion of each
assembled part.
In operation, the stock is first fed out to the length shown
at A
in Fig. 43, where the hole is centered, drilled, and the
washer shown in section at a is reamed to 0.375 inch in

COIL SPRINQ

TOOL STEEL SPRING TEMPERED

Machinery, N.Y.

Fig. 40. Reamer, Assembling Tool, and Pick-up

diameter. The remainder

of the hole, which is in that part
of the stock thatform the roller, is bored with a
will

recessing tool to 0.380 inch. Meanwhile the circular form

tool b has turned the hub c to 0.377 inch in diameter, and
also formed the groove in the roller. The form tool leaves
sufficient stock around the bottom of the hole to hold the
parts together.
Before cutting off the washer, the special tool shown at B
comes forward and enters f inch into the hole. The pilot of
this tool is slotted and spring-tempered, so that it will take
hold of the washer when it is cut off. When the washer is
separated from the bar, the cut-off tool drops back and the
stock is fed forward sufficiently to allow the roller to be cut
off. The pilot tool has now entered the hole of the roller as
seen at B, which also shows the relative position of the washer.
 ASSEMBLING IN SCREW MACHINE 311

This pilot tool is also used as the stop, the stock being fed

against the face d.

The pilot, holding both the roller and the washer, now
moves forward until the end comes in contact with the stud
at e, when the turret still advances sufficiently to push the
onto the stud, and also to press the washer onto the end,
roller

thus holding the roller in place. In the meantime, the pi-

lot has been held against the end of the stud by the coil
spring /. The work is now fed forward to the over-all length,
and cut off as shown at C. Provision is made for the slight
burr which is left around the edge of the hole when the roller
is cut off, by cutting a groove g in the stud, as shown at A.
The outside diameter of the washer is turned with a box-tool,
which obviates the necessity of using an extremely wide form-

ing tool. The order of operations is as follows :

Revo- Hun-
Order of Operations lutions dredths
Feed stock to stop 27 2
Revolve the turret 34 i\
Turn and center with box-tool o.i45-inch rise at 0.0054-
inch feed 27 2
Form o.35o-inch rise at o.ooi-inch feed (350) (25)
Revolve the turret 41 3
Drill o.56i-inch rise at o.oo45-inch feed 125 9
Revolve the turret 42 3
Ream o.i45-inch rise at o.oo52-inch feed 28 2
Revolve the turret 41 3
Recess front cross-slide cam, o.on-inch rise at o.ooi-inch
feed 14 i
Recess lead cam, o.26o-inch rise at o.oo74-inch feed 35 2\
Revolve the turret 42 3
Cut off the washer o.36o-inch rise at o.oo2-inch feed 180 13
Take hold of washer with pilot
Clearance 14 i
Feed stock against pilot holder 27 2
Cut off roller o.554-inch rise at o.oo2-inch feed 277 20
Clearance 28 2
Push on roller and washer o.375-inch rise 42 3
Revolve the turret 42 3
Feed stock to stop 28 2
Cut off finished piece 0.5 54-inch rise at o.oo2-inch feed 277 20
Clearance 14 i

Total ^385 loo

With aspindle speed of 277 revolutions per minute, it

requires 300 seconds to complete one assembled part, which
gives a gross output of 120 pieces in ten hours. In this case,
312 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

REVOLVE TURRET
4 DESCEND SLOTTING
ARM WHM.E CUTTING
OFF

Machinery. N.Y.

Fig. 41. Cams used for Making and Assembling a Grooved Roller and
Socket Joint

PRESS FIT
:I; _
'
LOOSE FIT

Machinery

Fig. 42. The Assembled Part and its Details

Machinery

Fig. 43. Positions of Stock for the Various Operations

 ASSEMBLING IN SCREW MACHINE 313

a combination box-tool and center tool was necessary, as the

turret was filled with tools. Referring to the lay-out of the
cams shown in Fig. 44, it will be seen that there are a number
of short lobes on the lead cam. These lobes, when made
accurately, will work just as well as the longer ones, because
the cam is turning very slowly. The front-slide cam from 26^

LEAD
FRONT
REAR
Machinery

Fig. 44. Lay-out of the Cams for Machining and Assembling Operations

to 27^ feeds the recessing tool in at right angles to the spindle,

and from 27^ to 30 is a dwell, while the .recessing tool is fed
forward by the lead cam. The front slide drops back a little

ahead of 30, so as to release the recessing tool, before it is

withdrawn by the turret. From 33 to 46, the front cam ac-

tuates the cut-off tool, separating the washer from the bar,
and, after dropping back enough at 46 to allow the roller to be
fed out, it again advances and cuts off the roller. After again
314 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

feeding the stock, the finished part is cut off by the lobe from
79 to 99-
The dwell on the lead cam which follows the recessing lobe

keeps the spring pilot in the hole of the washer while it is being
cut off. From 47 to 49, the stock is fed forward preparatory
to cutting off the roller. The rise from 71 to 74, which pushes
and washer onto the stud, was not made when the
the. roller

job was first set up, as it was a case of cut-and-try, in order

to obtain the proper advance. The shape of the curve shown
in the illustration was finally arrived at and was successful.
When the stock is fed (77 to 79 on the cam), it reaches the
length shown at C in Fig. 43, and when it is again fed (o to 2
on the cam), it reaches the length shown at A. The weight
of the piece causes it to drop before the cut-off tool has reached
point 99, so that no interference occurs when revolving from
one stop to the other.
It might be well to give the reason why one stop could not
be used for these last two feeding movements of the stock,
thus allowing space in the turret for a centering tool instead of
using the combination box-tool and center. The reason this
could not be done is that the difference in the length between
the two feeding movements is so great that the cam from

77 to 79 would have to be cut very much lower than it is from

o to 2 and, in rising from the low to the higher point of the
,

cam, the stop in the turret would strike the work before it was
cut off of course, cam space could be allowed to prevent this,
;

but it would mean lost time.

Thread Rolling in the Screw Machine. The formation of
threads by rolling is effected by hardened rolls or dies having
threads or ridges which roll grooves into the blank and raise
enough material above the surface of the blank to form a thread.
When threads are rolled in the automatic screw machine,
the tool used is in the form of a disk having a threaded

periphery and mounted so as to revolve freely when forced

against the blank to be threaded. Thread rolling is done in
automatic screw machines, when a thread is required behind
a shoulder where it would be impossible to cut it with a die.
 THREAD ROLLING 315

In this way, a second operation on the work is obviated. The

roll used for forming the thread should be large enough in

diameter to turn freely on the pin on which it is mounted.

The thread on the roll should be the opposite hand to that
which to be produced on the work
is that is, if the thread
;

required on the work is to be right-hand, then the roll should

be left-hand, and vice versa. For rolling a right-hand thread,
the work should revolve in the same direction as when a thread
is Whenever practicable, the roll should pass
cut in the lathe.
under the work. The roll-holder should have a vertical adjust-
ment so that the roll can be set to the proper height.
Thread rolling in automatic screw machine practice is gen-
erally only applied to brass and similar materials, owing to
the difficulty of securing a roll that will withstand the severe
service incident to rolling threads in harder metals. Thread
rolls for steel work, however, have given fairly good results,
when made of chrome-nickel steel containing from 0.15 to
0.20 per cent of carbon. Thread rolls for brass and similar
materials should be made from 3-per cent nickel steel contain-
ing about o.i 2 per cent of carbon. The heat- treatment recom-
mended is as follows Carburize six hours in straight coarse
:

bone (not bone dust), heating to a temperature of 1600 de-

grees F., and allow the rolls to cool in the pots. Then heat to
1600 degrees F. and quench in oil. Reheat to 1400 degrees F.
and quench in water, after which draw the temper to 400
degrees F. in oil. The
following information applies to the
rolling of threads in brass and other soft materials, and is
largely based upon experiments made by the Brown & Sharpe
Mfg. Co. .

Obtaining the Blank Diameter. As a rule, the diameter

of the blank for brass should be approximately equal to the

pitch diameter. When rolling a U. S. standard thread, the

diameter of the blank should be slightly less than the pitch
diameter of the thread, because of the impracticability of using
a thread roll with a flat top. If the threads on the roll are not
made sharp at the top, considerably more pressure will be
required to force the roll into the work, and it will not produce
316 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

as smooth and perfect a thread. Therefore, all thread rolls,

whether for forming a sharp V or a U. S. standard thread, are
made with a sharp V, top and bottom. It is not necessary
to make the bottom of the thread on the roll sharp, but there
would be no advantage in having it flat, as the outside di-
ameter of the screw is governed by the diameter of the blank.
The shape of the thread produced by a thread roll, when the
U. S. standard form is required, is shown in Fig. 46 (central
illustration). The pitch diameter B
the same as the pitch is

diameter of the U. S. standard form, Fig. 45. The root di-

ameter C, however, is less than the root diameter A of the U. S.

Figs. 45, 46, and 47. Dimensions involved in Calculating Blank Diam-
eters for Thread Rolling

standard thread. The approximate diameter of the blank

can be found by the following formula, in which D = diameter
of the blank B = pitch diameter of the screw F = depth
; ;

of U. S. standard thread = 0.6495 P

'

D= B- i F.
Thepitch diameter B
= d F, in which d = nominal ex-
ternal diameter of the screw.
When rolling a thread
having a sharp V-form, the pitch
diameter Fig. 47,
,
can be used as the approximate diameter
of the blank. The pitch diameter for a V-thread is found by
the formula : E= d H, in which H= 0.866 p. The cor-
rect diameter of the blank, in any case, must be determined
by experiments, owing to variations in the hardness of differ-
ent materials. a simple matter, however, in the automatic
It is

screw machine, to reduce or increase the diameter of the blank

so as to obtain a screw of the required diameter.
 THREAD ROLLING 317

Size of the Thread Roll. The best results are obtained by

using a thread roll with a single thread, but, when the piece
to be rolled is less than f inch in diameter, it is necessary to
make the roll with a multiple thread, because the diameter
of the roll must then be made twice the diameter of the blank.
The Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co. has found that the pitch di-
ameter of the roll should not be an exact multiple of the pitch
diameter of the finished piece, but slightly less. The pitch
diameter of the roll for a U. S. standard thread can be found
by the following formula, in which K= pitch diameter of roll ;

N= approximate between pitch diameter of roll and

ratio

pitch diameter of piece to be threaded D = outside diameter ;

of blank G =
; depth of thread :

K = NX(D-G).
For a sharp V-thread, the root, pitch, and outside diameters
of the roll are found by the following formulas, in which
DI = pitch diameter of thread roll ;
D =
2 root diameter of
thread roll D$ = outside diameter
;
of thread roll ;
N= ap-
proximate between pitch diameter of roll and pitch
ratio
diameter of piece to be threaded E = pitch diameter of thread
;

or diameter of blank H = depth of thread = 0.866 p

;
:

D = NX(E-^H);
1 D^D.-H; D = D,+
3 H.
The thread rolls used by the National-Acme Mfg. Co. are
made from ij to 2j inches in diameter and sometimes larger,

multiple threads being used when the work is smaller than

the outside diameter of the thread Assuming that
roll.
"
DI = outside diameter of thread roll ;
n = number of starts"
or threads on the roll ;
d = outside diameter of part to be
threaded (diameter after completion of thread) ;
G= depth
of thread then ;
:

Di=nX(d- 1.25 G).

When making a thread roll, the outside diameter is turned
to the size required, and the end should be beveled to an angle
of 45 degrees (as shown to the right in Fig. 48), to prevent
the thread at the end from chipping or breaking out. Thread
rolls are
usually lapped after hardening, in order to obtain a
smooth finish on the threads. This may be done by mounting
 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

the roll on an arbor and rotating it while the threads are

lapped, by using a piece of hard wood charged with some fine

abrasive and oil.

Preparation of Work for Thread Rolling. In most cases,
that part of the work on which a thread is to be rolled can be
turned by a formed tool. The thread to be rolled is usually
at the rear of a shoulder and, in such cases, it is desirable
to use a formed tool of such a shape that it will cut an annular

groove next to the shoulder, as shown at A in the view to the

left of Fig. 48.The diameter at B should also be reduced at
the point where the work is to be cut off from the bar of stock.
The angle a should be 45 degrees, and the distance C equal

-+\P p-PITCH
H G -H

Fig. 48. Preparing a Part for Thread Rolling Thread Roll with a
Double Thread

to at least half the single depth of the thread, so that the part
B will be slightly smaller than the root diameter of the threaded
part. The distance E should be made equal to C and dimen-
sion Fequal to at least the pitch of the thread.
Application of Thread Roll to Work. Thread rolls, like
knurls, are presented to the work either radially or tangen-
tially. The method of holding and applying the roll is gov-
erned, in many cases, by the relation that the thread rolling

operation bears other machining operations.

to The de-
sign of the holder for the thread roll is also governed to some
extent by the type of screw machine for which the holder is

intended. Several types of holders adapted to different con-

ditions and different designs of machines will be described.
 THREAD ROLLING 319

Thread Roll Applied to Top Side of Work. The holder

shown in Fig. 49 is intended for a Brown & Sharpe machine.
It is attached to the cross-slide and operates tangentially on
the top side of the work. When no other tool is operating at
the same time as the thread roll and there are no chips to
interfere with the thread rolling operation, the roll can be
held more rigidly than by passing it under the work instead
of over it. When the roll is fed over the work, there is a ten-

THREAD ROLL-HOLDER

THREAD ROLL

CIRCULAR CUT-OFF TOOL

Machinery

Fig. 49. Application of Thread Roll to Top Side of Work

dency to raise the cross-slide, whereas, when the roll operates

on the under side of the work, the pressure is downward and,
consequently, the holder is more rigidly supported. The
thread roll shown in Fig. 49 rotates on a pin and is inserted
in a slot cut in the end of the holder. The roll should closely
fitboth the pin and the slot in the holder, because any lost
motion would result in marring the thread. The set-screw
at the rear of the holder is used for setting the the proper
roll to

depth. The cutting-off tool is located back of the thread roll

3 20 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

so that the work will be severed from the bar before the roll

returns. The roll should be moved in to within about o.oio

inch from the work on the quick rise of the cam, and then be
fed in until the roll is directly over the center of the work, at
a feed which usually varies from about 0.002 to 0.004 inch per
revolution of the work. The roll should then be moved past
the work rapidly, thus bringing the cutting-off tool into

position.
Thread Roll Applied to Under Side of Work. The thread-
roll holder shown in Fig. 50 is attached to the cross-slide, and

the roll is so located that it passes beneath the work when

CIRCULAR CUT-OFF TOOL

CROSS-SLIDE
Machinery, Jf.Y.

Fig. 50. Holder used when the Thread Roll is passed under the Work

forming a thread. The set-screw A bears against the cross-

slide and is used for adjusting the roll to the proper depth as

well as for supporting the holder. This type of holder may be

used when no other tool is operating on the work at the same
time and there are no chips to interfere with the thread rolling
operation. The cutting-off tool located back of the roll

severs the work after the thread is finished, so that the roll
does not come into contact with the thread on its return
movement.
Swing Tool for Thread Rolling. When the thread roll
cannot be carried on the cross-slide of a Brown & Sharpe
machine, a swing type of tool, similar to the design shown in
 THREAD ROLLING 3 2I

Fig. 51, is employed. For instance, if it were necessary to

feed in the cut-off or form tool more than once on the same
piece, a swing holder should be used in preference to the cross-
slide type. The swing holder operates upon the same prin-
ciple as an ordinary swing tool for turning. There is a swinging
arm which carries the roll and which is moved inward, for
bringing the roll into contact with the work, by means of a
raising plate attached to the cross-slide which engages the set-
screw located at the end of the swinging arm. The shank
of the holder is inserted in a hole in the turret. If the length

of the work exceeds about 2\ times its diameter, the

Fig. 51. Swing Holder for Thread Rolling

swing-roll holder should be equipped with a support. A

hole is drilled through the shank of the holder and a set-
screw is provided for holding the supporting member. The
method of applying this support is governed by the shape of
the work.
Cleveland Thread-rolling Attachment. The thread-rolling
attachment shown in Fig. 52 is similar in construction to the
independent cut-off attachment used on the Cleveland auto-
matic, except that the roll holder and thread roll replace the
cut-off blade and holder. The thread roll A rotates on a pin
B, and arm C is pivoted at the center and operated by a cam
attached to a disk on the camshaft seen at the rear. This cam
322 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

may be adjusted according to requirements. The roller at

the rear end of arm C, which engages the cam, ismounted on
an eccentric stud so that fine adjustments may be obtained for
the thread roll.

Acme Thread-roll Holder. A type of thread-roll holder

commonly on the Acme multiple-spindle automatic
used
screw machine is shown in Fig. 53. The thread roll is
presented radially to the work and slightly off center, so
as to permit the tool to spring away a certain amount to

Fig. 52. Thread-rolling Attachment Applied to Cleveland Automatic

follow the curvature of the stock. This makes it unneces-

sary to set the tool absolutely correct in regard to position
for depth of thread. The spring of the tool should not be
excessive, but just enough to relieve the strain which would
be imposed on the tool if it were in a central position. Fig.
54 illustrates how a thread roll and holder of similar form is
applied to the work on an Acme machine. The thread roll is
held in a side-working slide in the third position and, in
this particular case, a shaving tool operates in the second

position.
 CUTTING HELICAL GEARS 323

Cutting Helical Gears in Screw Machine. The ribbon

spools of a certain typewriter are rotated by a system of shafts
and gearing, which includes a pair of small spiral or helical
gears. These gears formerly were cut on small hand-operated
gear-cutting machines of special design, which performed the
operation in the same way that helical gears are cut in a milling
machine that is, the blank was fed forward and rotated at the
;

same time under a revolving formed cutter. It was then

returned to the starting position again, indexed and fed for-
ward for a second cut and so on until all the teeth were
formed. The tools and operations employed for doing this
work on a Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machine will be

Machinery

Thread Roll used on Acme Multiple-spindle Automatic

'

Fig. 53.

described. The effectiveness, rapidity, and comparative sim-

plicity of the mechanism indicate the versatility of the auto-
matic screw machine.
Helical Gear Generating Tool. The tool used for generat-
ing the teeth of the helical gears is shown in Fig. 55. When this
tool comes into action, the blank has been formed in the ma-
shown at C in Fig. 56. The hole has been drilled and
chine as
reamed and the outside diameter formed to the required
dimensions. When the tool is brought up to the work, the
three-cornered driving center G enters the drilled hole, and is
thereby caused to revolve with the blank. As it is screwed
firmly into the long driving gear H
(Fig. 55) the latter is also
set in motion in unison with the spindle of the machine. Gear
H has helical teeth cut on it engaging mating teeth in helical
gear /, which is mounted on a short horizontal shaft having
324 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

spur gear K
keyed to it at the rear end. This gear, through
a large idler L, drives gear M, which is keyed to the cutter
spindle S. Cutter N
mounted on the spindle has the form of
a helical gear properly cut to mesh with the gear to be formed.
It is made of hardened tool steel and is ground on one face,
which face is set as shown in the end view, so that it is in the

plane of the axis of the work. By means of the train of gear-

ing just described, cutter N

may be caused to revolve in uni-
son with the work as if it were in mesh with the latter after
the teeth have been cut.

Fig. 54. Shaving Tool and Thread Roll on an "Acme" Multiple-

spindle Automatic

Driving center G and the front bearing

. of gear H are sup-

ported in a sliding bushing seated in the body P of the

tool. Aplunger Q shank of the tool is pressed by a
in the

long and stiff spring against the end of the bearing of gear H.
This serves to keep G pressed into the hole in the work. As
the tool advances over the work, center G and gear H are
forced back with relation to the holder, remaining stationary
so far as endwise movement is concerned with relation to the
work. The thrust between Q and the end of H is taken by a
hardened ball-pivot bearing as shown, so that there is little
friction. The extended lip on the bushing is simply for the

purpose of providing the long keyway shown, which engages

 CUTTING HELICAL GEARS 325

a pin in the body P to prevent from turning. When the

tool is not in contact with the work, screw R limits the outward
movement of G, H, and produced by spring plunger Q.
Operation of Cutting the Teeth. Consider now that there
is a gear blank in the machine with the teeth all cut, but not

Machinery

Fig. 55. Tool for Generating Teeth of Helical Gears in Automatic Screw
Machine

yet severed from the bar, and suppose the cutter to be meshed N
with it as shown at D in Fig. 56. Suppose further that the
spindle of the machine has been stopped. If now the turret-
slide be moved forward or back from the position shown, so
that the generating tool is moving forward or back over the
326 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

work, center G and gear H

remain stationary with reference to
the work, but move back and forth with relation to the tool-
holder. This axial movement of gear H
will evidently rotate

helical gear /, which, through the train of spur gears K, L,

and M will rotate the cutter N. The ratio of this train of gear-

ing is such that the rotary movement given to by the longi-N

tudinal movement of the tool-holder in either direction keeps

CENTERING
AND
FACING
_ CUTTING
THE TEETH

COUNTER-
BORING

REMOVING
BURRS WITH
FORM TOOL

CUTTING OFF

Machinery

Fig. 56. Successive Operations on Helical or Spiral Gears produced in

Automatic Screw Machine

itexactly in step with the teeth of the work. Thus the move-
ment of the turret-slide rolls the cutter on the work just as
if mounted perfectly free on its axis and were
the cutter were
rolledby the teeth of the work, instead of through the train
of gearing described.
Consider further, with the cutter and the work set in the
relation shown in Fig. 56, that the turret-slide of the machine
is fixed in position, but that the spindle and the work is ro-
tated. The rotation of the gear revolves the three-cornered
 CUTTING HELICAL GEARS 327

driving center G, which, in turn, transmits itsmotion to gear

H (Fig. 55) and thence to gears /, K, L, M, and cutter N.
The ratio of this train of gearing is again such that the rotary
movement thus given the cutter is in the proper ratio to keep
the latter in step with the teeth cut in the work, so that the
work and cutter revolve together as if they were a pair of heli-
cal gears driving each other, with no connection through the
train of gearing.
It has thus been shown that the cutter
be kept in step
will

with the work, if the tool is moved axially back and forth
over the work while the latter is stationary. It has also been
shown that the cutter keep in mesh with the work, while
will
the latter is revolving and the turret-slide and the tool are

stationary. Since the cutter and work are kept in step under
these two conditions separately, they are still in step when the
two movements are combined. This tool and its arrange-
ment of gearing can thus be moved back and forth over the
revolving work without throwing the teeth in the cutter and
the teeth in the work out of step with each other, assuming
that the tool is not moved back so far that driving center G
loses its contactwith the work, as the proper meshing of the
cutter depends upon the driving connection between G and the
blank. If G is ever moved back out of contact with the blank,
this connection is broken, and, when the cutter is again moved

forward onto the work, it will probably be found out of step.

The action of cutter N will be readily understood, now that

the method of driving has been explained. The face, which

isin the plane xx of the axis of the work, as shown in the end

view, is the cutting edge. As the tool is forced onto the work,
this revolving cutting edge, having the exact shape of the helical
gear which is to engage with the work, cuts teeth of that exact
shape on the blank as it is gradually forced over it. The opera-
tion is an example of the molding-generating principle, the
cutter N molding the proper surface to mesh with its own
teeth.
Details of Generating Tool. The shank of the tool is made
very long, as this permits the use of a spring for plunger Q
328 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

which is long enough so that its pressure will not be materially

greater when the cutter is pushed clear over the work at the

completion of the cut, than when center G first enters the hole
in the work. If the pressure should materially increase, there
would be danger that G
might be pressed further into the
edge G and
of the hole, thus disturbing the axial relation of
the blank, and, consequently, throwing the cutter and the work
out of step with each other by that amount. The use of the
long spring prevents such trouble.
The 5 is mounted in bronze-bushed bearings
cutter spindle
in front and back plates T and U, which are clamped together
and to the body P of the tool by studs and nuts V. These
studs, as shown in the sectional view, pass through elongated
slots in the body, so that the cutter spindle may be adjusted
for a larger or smaller diameter of work by means of set-screws
W, the adjustment being locked by nuts V. This adjust-
ment would, of course, disturb somewhat the correct meshing
of gears L and M. Gear L is, therefore, mounted on a stud X
which floats in an enlarged hole in the body, and so may be
adjusted by means of suitable set-screws which bring it into
proper mesh with both M
and K. The shaft on which the
latter is mounted is also carried in a sliding block F, by means
of which gears / and H can be moved into closer or freer
mesh. After the cutter has been set to the proper diameter for
the work, the whole system of gearing may thus be adjusted
to mesh properly. It is advisable to have as little backlash
as possible between the cutter and the driving center to pre-
vent the former from jumping or chattering when first begin-
ning the cut. When there is much backlash, the ends of the
teeth where the cut begins are not formed to quite the proper

shape. While there is no great harm in this in the case of

a helical gear, in which the contact takes place in the center of
the face, it gives a poor appearance to the work, and so should
be avoided.
The thrust of the revolving work, pressing down on the
cutter when the tool is in action, is taken by a ball bearing
at Z. This is the only point where there would be any great
 CUTTING HELICAL GEARS 329

danger of excessive friction, so that the probability of G

slipping in the work, due to too great a resistance in the
mechanism it has to drive, is obviated. As previously ex-
plained, the cutting edge of the cutter must be in the plane of
the center-line of the work. In the tool shown, no special pro-
vision is made for maintaining this condition. As the face of
the cutter is sharpened, it is necessary to pack it out with

filling washers. In later designs, adjustments are provided

for bringing the cutting point on a line with the center.
Order of Operations in Making the Gears. The first

operation after feeding the stock is centering and facing, as

shown at A, Fig. 56. This done with a tool held in the

is

turret. The turret is next revolved two holes, and the drill
isbrought into action. Then the turret is revolved again and
the hole is reamed. The reamer is mounted in a "floating
holder" which enables the reamer to be centered accurately,
so that it will cut to size and take off an equal amount with
all of its teeth. While the drilling and reaming are going on,
the blank is being formed by a circular form tool mounted in
the front cross-slide, as shown at B and C. The operation of
cutting the teeth at D has already been described. At the ,

hole is count erbored. This counterboring incidentally re-

moves the marks made by the sharp corners of driving center
G. At F, the completed piece is severed from the bar. While
the counterboring is in progress, and during the first part of
the cutting-off operation, the front form tool, as shown at E
and F, is again brought down to clean off the burrs produced
by the gear-cutting tool. The gear proper has a face width of

0.187 ncn and

i a diameter of 0.421 inch. The material is brass,
and the time for making one gear complete, 22 seconds.
Measuring Screw Machine Chips. It is the practice of
some screw machine operators to measure the thickness of the
chips in order to determine the feeds of the tools. This prac-
tice is misleading because of the tendency of the metal to

compress in one direction and swell and stretch in the other,

when separated from the bar by the cutter. In order to ob-
tain data on the difference between the feed of the cutter and
330 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

the thickness of the chips, some tests were made on a Brown &
Sharpe automatic screw machine. A cam, the exact size
and travel of which was known, was placed on the machine,
and the machine was geared to rotate the cam at a given speed.
The exact speed of the spindle was also determined, and in
this way the exact feed of the cutter was known.
These tests showed that a form tool, J inch wide, having a
feed of o.oo i inch per revolution, cut a chip which measured

0.0025 inch when cutting brass, while a form tool f inch wide,
with a feed of 0.0015 inch per revolution, cut a continuous
chip 0.005 mcri thick. A cut-off tool f inch wide, cutting brass
and fed o.ooi inch per revolution, produced chips from 0.0015
to 0.002 inch thick. The proportions between the feed and the

chip for the turret tools were slightly greater than for the
cross-slide tools that is, the chip expanded slightly more. The
;

tests for steel indicated a smaller expansion than for brass.

Often a cam designer is criticized by the operators for providing
excessive feeds, when this is not really the case, the apparent
error being due to the erroneous method used by the operators
in measuring the feed. The error that would result in the
of cams, if the draftsman worked to data obtained by
design
measuring the chips is, however, apparent.
Speeds and Feeds. The following information on the
speeds and feeds for automatic screw machine operation is
intended only as a general guide, since both the feed and speed
are often affected considerably by the nature of the operations,
variations in cutting qualities of tools made from different
kinds of steel, and differences in degree of hardness of material
of the same general class. The type and general condition of
the machine that is used may also be important factors.
The feeds and speeds given in the accompanying table are
not intended to represent either the minimum or maximum
in any case, but the average range of feeds and speeds used
on machines of ordinary size. In referring to this table, it is

important to bear in mind that the rate of feed per revolution

isoften affected considerably by the speed, some automatic
screw machines being naturally adapted for comparatively
 SPEEDS AND FEEDS 331

Ordinary Ranges of Speeds and Feeds for Automatic Screw Machines

high speeds and fine feeds, whereas other machines rotate the
work more slowly, but are capable of heavier feeds. The feed
for box-tools not only varies for different materials, but should
332 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

be selected with reference to the thickness of the chip or the

depth of the cut. The feed for forming tools should be varied
in accordance with the width of the tool and the diameter of
the smallest part to be formed. In general, a tool from about
3
J to y e inch wide is adapted to the coarsest feed. For tools
that are either very much narrower or wider, the feed should
be reduced accordingly. The effect which the tool width and
the minimum diameter have upon the feed account for the
wide range of feeds given in the table for forming tools.
The following general information on feeds and speeds is
given by the Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co. The feeds and speeds
referred to are merely intended as a general guide, and, in order
to obtain satisfactory results, it is necessary to use an ample

supply of good cutting oil or cooling lubricant, such as lard

oil.

Speeds and Feeds for Brass. For brass of ordinary

quality, the machine can run at its fastest speed. In the case
of a No. oo machine, the maximum spindle speed is 2400
revolutions per minute, and the largest diameter that can be
turned is -IQ inch, so that the maximum surface speed is 197
feet per minute. On
the Nos. o and 2 machines, the maxi-

mum and 275 feet per minute, respectively.

speeds are 294
Hollow mills when used on brass can be given a feeding move-
ment of from 0.006 to 0.015 inch per revolution, the amount
depending upon the depth of the cut. The feed of box-tools
about o.oio inch per revolution,
for finishing brass should be

and, for cutting-off tools, from 0.0015 to 0.002 inch per revolu-
tion, the feed being reduced as the tool reaches the center of
the work. Forming tools are usually fed from 0.0008 to 0.0015
inch per revolution, although the feeding movement is reduced
to 0.0005 inch, in some cases. Drills varying from J to J inch
in diameter can be fed from 0.003 to 0.006 inch per revolution ;

for smaller drills, the feeds are reduced from 0.003 to 0.0015
inch.

Speeds and Feeds for Gun Screw Iron. Gun screw iron,
when using a fine feed, can be given a speed of from 80 to 90
feet per minute for either hollow mills, box-tools, cutting-off
 SPEEDS AND FEEDS 333

tools, or forming tools. Hollow mills for roughing can be fed

from 0.004 to 0.012 inch per revolution. Box-tools for finish-
ing, when taking a finishing cut of average depth, which is
about o.oio inch, can be fed from o.oio to 0.012 inch per
revolution, but the feed should be reduced, if the tool is to be
used for facing shoulders or for similar operations. Cutting-
off tools can be fed from 0.0012 to 0.0017 inch per revolution.

For forming tools, the feed usually varies from 0.0002 to o.ooi
inch, the amount depending upon the width and finished size
of the work. Drills should be fed about one-third lower than
for brass, and, when deep holes, the feed should be
drilling
reduced towards the bottom. Dies and taps, when operating
on gun screw iron, should not have a cutting speed exceeding
30 feet per minute.
Speeds and Feeds for Machine Steel and Drill Rod. Soft
machine steel can be cut off and formed at a speed of about
80 feet per minute, but, for threading operations, this should
be reduced to from 20 to 30 feet per minute. The feed per
revolution can usually be about the same as for iron. It is
often necessary to run bronze at about the same speed as
machine steel. Drill rod is often operated at speeds varying
from 50 to 60 feet per minute, but only when using very fine
feeds. The feed usually ranges from 0.003 to 0.007 incn per
revolution. For threading drill rod, the speed should not
exceed 15 or 20 feet per minute.
It is the practice of the Brown & Sharpe Mfg. Co. to use
fast speeds and fine feeds for most operations, although the
relation of the feed and speed is often varied to suit different
classes of work. The speeds and feeds referred to in the fore-

going are intended for carbon steel tools. When using high-
speed steel, these speeds can be increased approximately 50
per cent for mild steel and from 30 to 35 per cent for drill
rod, assuming that the same feeds are used.
Feed for Thread Rolling. When rolling threads, the
feed is varied in accordance with the diameter of the blank to
be threaded and the number of threads per inch. The type
of holder used also affects the feed. If the roll is held in a holder
334 SCREW MACHINE PRACTICE

attached to the cross-slide and is presented either tangen-

tially or radially to the work, it can be
fed at a faster rate than
if it is held in a swing tool, because, in the former case, it is
held more rigidly. The feeds for thread rolling may vary from
0.0005 to o.oio inch per revolution, and, in some cases, coarser
feeds are employed. When using a cross-slide type of roll-
holder, the following feeds would prove satisfactory on a Brown
& Sharpe machine For 80 threads per inch and a blank di-
:

ameter of J inch, o.oo6-inch feed for a blank diameter of

;

\ inch, o.oo8-inch feed for a blank diameter

;
of i inch, .010-

inch feed. For 40 threads per inch and a blank diameter of

f r a blank diameter of \ inch, 0.005-
\ inch, 0.003 -inch f ee(i >

inch feed for a blank diameter of i inch, o.ooy-inch feed.

;

For 24 threads per inch and a blank diameter of J inch, 0.0005-

inch feed; for a blank diameter of | inch, o.oo25-inch feed;
for a blank diameter of i inch, o.oo45-inch feed. When using
a holder of the swing type, these feeding movements should be
reduced about 25 or 30 per cent.
Feeds for Drilling. When selecting the feeds for drills,
the diameter of the drill should be considered. For instance,
when drilling brass, a drill -jV inch in diameter should be given
a feed of about 0.0018 inch per revolution; if the drill di-
ameter were \ inch, the feed should be increased to approxi-
mately 0.003 or 0.004 i ncn ^ the drill diameter were \ inch,
;

the feed should be from 0.005 to 0.007 mcn and, if the drill ;

diameter were \ inch, should be from 0.007 to o.oio inch

it

per revolution, and, for larger sizes, still coarser feeds could
be employed.
When using Brown & Sharpe automatic screw machines,
the best results are generally obtained by employing light
feeds for drills and rather high peripheral velocities. High-
speed steel drills are preferable for drilling Norway iron, machine
steel, tool steel, etc., but ordinary carbon steel drills are suit-

able for brass and similar materials, when the cutting speeds
do not exceed those given in the table. When the cutting
speed is relatively low, the feed can be increased accordingly,
but it is more satisfactory in general practice to use a fine feed
 SPEEDS AND FEEDS 335

and a high speed, as a straighter hole can be produced by this

method.
Counterboring and Reaming Feeds. The surface speed
for counterboring should be slightly less than the speed for

drilling. The feed depends upon the type of counterbore used,

as well as the material being cut and the depth of the cut.
When using a counterbore having three cutting edges, the feed
for brass usually varies from about 0.003 to 0.008 inch per

revolution, the amount depending upon the diameter of the

counterbore and the depth of the cut. For machine steel,
the feed would be somewhat less, ranging from about 0.002 to
0.006 inch per revolution. The feed used for reaming depends
not only upon the diameter of the reamer and the material
being reamed, but also upon the allowance left for the reaming
operation, and varies widely, as shown by the table. In gen-
eral, the allowances should be as follows Diameter of hole,
:

| inch, allowance, 0.005 i ncn >

diameter of hole, J inch, allow-
ance, 0.007 inch; diameter of hole, ^ inch, allowance, o.oio
inch; diameter of hole, i inch, allowance, 0.016 inch.
 INDEX
ACCELERATING type of reaming Attachment for self-opening dies, 137

attachment, 207 for drilling, 200

Accelerating type of cross-drilling at- for forming squares and hexagons,
tachment, 202 213
Acme accelerating reaming attachment, for milling, 209

207 for screw slotting, 197

Acme cross-drilling attachment, 202 magazine feeding, 219
Acme milling attachments, 209 Automatic, application of term, 2
Acme multiple-spindle automatic, 39 Automatic screw machines, adjust-
adjustment of, 170 ment, 148
camshaft, 44 advantages of single- and multiple-
camshaft speed-changing mechanism, spindle designs, 8
45 4
classification,
feeding stock through spindle, 51 development of multiple-spindle type,
general description, 39 6
indexing mechanism, 49 development of single-spindle type, 5
mechanism for threading, 52 general features, 3
operation of cross-slides, 48 multiple-spindle designs, 39
operation of spindle chuck, 50 single-spindle designs, n
operations on, 290
speed of main driving shaft, 47 BACK-SLIDE cam, method of lay-
spindle-driving mechanism, 43 ing out, 241
standard tool positions, 41 Boring and recessing tools, 125
Acme over-cut box-tools, 98 Box-tool cutters, cutting angles, i T i

Acme thread-rolling tool, 322 holding and adjusting, 106

Adjustment of automatic screw ma- methods of applying, 104
chines, 148 radialand tangential positions for,
Allowances for reaming, 125 104
Allowances for shaving cuts, 130, 131 size of steel, 113
Aluminum, use of roller supports in Box-tools, 94
turning, 109 over-cut type, 98
Angle of centering tool, 115 spring-releasing type, 99
Angles, cutting, for box-tool cutters, setting, on Acme machine, 178
in taper turning, 101
Application of automatic screw ma- Box-tool work supports, 108
chines, general, 7 holding and adjusting, 109
Assembling parts in automatic screw position relative to cutter, 112
machine, 304 Brass, speeds and feeds for, 332
Attachment, for hobbing worm and Brown & Sharpe burring attachment,
spiral gears, 215 205
338 INDEX
Brown & Sharpe cross-drilling attach- Change-gears, table of No. oo Brown &
ment, 201 Sharpe machine, 233
Brown & Sharpe index drilling attach- Chicago screw machine, general de-
ment, 200 scription, 35
Brown & Sharpe screw machines, deflec- camshaft and main cam, 36
tor for chips, 18 chuck feeding mechanism, 36
general method of setting up, 158 feeding movements for tools, 38
general description, n method of cutting threads, 37

operation of cross-slide, 15 operation of cross-slides, 37

operation of turret-slide, 16 turret mechanism, 36
reversal of spindle for threading, 18 Chips, measurement of, to determine

sample record of cam and tool equip- feed, 329

ment, 159 Circular forming and cutting-off tools,

spindle speed changes, 18 holder for, 88

stock-feeding and chuck-operating setting, 149

mechanism, 15 Circular forming tools, methods of

Brown & Sharpe screw slotting attach- applying, 85, 89
ment, 197 Clearance for circular tools, 90
Brown & Sharpe tap and die revolving Clearance for tools in laying out cams,
attachment, 206 247
Brown & Sharpe taper-turning tool, 102 Cleveland automatic, adjustment of,
Brown & Sharpe turret .drilling attach- 161

ment, 205 chuck-operating mechanism, 22

Burring attachment, 205 examples of work on, 281
feed-regulating drum, 29
blanks, Brown & Sharpe, general description, 20
234 operation of cross-slide, 28
Cam circumference, proportioning, 233 spindle-driving mechanism, 22
Cam design, allowance for tool clear- stock-feeding mechanism, 25
ance, 247 turret and turret-slide, 26
effect of cutting speed on, 225 variable feeding mechanism, 28

general procedure, 225 Cleveland independent cutting-off at-

lobe for thread cutting, 243 tachment, 211
rise for drilling,
255 Cleveland magazine feeding attach-
Cams for making a screw, 227 ments, 219
Cams for recessing, laying out, 253 Cleveland silent die-holder, 135
Cams for screw machines, designing, 224 Cleveland slotting and slabbing attach-
Cams, function of lead, front-slide ment, 199
and back-slide, on B. & S. Machine, Cleveland thread-rolling attachment,
224 321
Cam-lever templets, use of, 250 Compensating stops for multiple-spindle
Cast iron, use of roller supports in machines, 60
turning, 109 Cone-point turning in screw machine,
Centering and facing tools, 114 274
Centering-tool holder, 115 Counterbores, amount of taper for, 120

Centering tool, included angle of point, holders, 123

"5 location of cutting edge, 120

Centering tools and drills, setting, 154 reasons for defective operation, 119
 INDEX 339

Counterbores and reamers, setting, 154 Dies for screw machine work, 132
Counterboring and drilling from cross- Drill-holder, high-speed, 118
slide, 266 Drill-holders for screw machines, 118

Counterboring and reaming feeds, 335 Drilling and Counterboring from cross-

Counterboring tools, 119, 122 slide, 266

Cross-drilling attachment, 201 Drilling and milling attachment, Acme,
Cross-drilling attachment of opposed 209
spindle type, 204 Drilling attachment, cross-, 201
Cross-drilling, example of work requir- index, 200
ing, 294 Drilling, feeds for, 334
Cutters for box-tools, 104 laying out cams for, 255
cutting angles, in Drill rod, speeds and feeds for, 333
holding and adjusting, 106 Drills and centering tools, setting, 154
position relative to work supports, Drills, flat, 122
112 for screw machine work, 116
size of steel, 113

Cutting-off and forming tools, rake of, END-MILLING or slotting attach-

93 ment, 211
setting on Acme machine, 177 facing and centering tools, 114
Cutting-off attachment, Cleveland, 211
Cutting-off tool-holder, universal, 91 pEED, determining, by measuring
Cutting-off tools, 92 chips, 329
inclination of cutting edge, 229 for thread rolling, 333
thickness of blade, 93 Feeding attachments, magazine, 219
Feeds and speeds, 330
DAVENPORT multiple-spindle auto- for different tools and materials, 331

matic, 55 Feeds, for Counterboring and reaming,

cam equipment for, 192 335
compensating stops, 60 for drilling, 334
cross-slides and swinging arms, 58 Flat forming tool-holders, 90

driving mechanism for camshaft, 58 Flutes, number in taps, 139

general description, 55 Forming and cutting-off tools, rake of,

indexing the spindle head, 60 93
method of cutting thread, 62 setting, on Acme machine, 177
method of driving spindles, 55 Forming operations, examples of, 260
operation of tool spindles, 56 Forming tools, methods of applying,
sample record of operations, 193 85,89
setting-up, 189 tool-holders for flat, 90

speeds and feeds recommended, 63 Front-slide cam, method of laying out,

Deep-hole drilling, designing cam for, 242

257 gears, helical or spiral, cutting in
Die- and tap-holder, telescopic, 136 screw machine, 323
Die and tap revolving attachment, 206
Die-holders, 133 (~^UN screw iron, speeds and feeds for,
Cleveland silent type, 135 332
releasing, 134 Gridley multiple-spindle automatic, 71
Dies and taps, setting, 155 camshaft and cams, 74
Dies, attachment for self -opening, 137 feeding movements, 73
340 INDEX

Gridley multiple-spindle automatic, Knurl teeth, angles for different mate-

general description, 71 rials, 145
idle movements, 73 calculating depth of, 145
method of cutting threads, 76

tool-slide, 73 LEAD CAM, function of, on Brown

Gridley single-spindle automatic, ap- & Sharpe machine, 224
plication of motor drive, 35 method of laying out, for Brown &
arrangement of cams, 33 Sharpe machine, 236
arrangement of turret, 30
general description, 30 MACHINE steel, speeds and feeds

operation of forming and cutting-off for, 333

tools, 33 Magazine feeding attachments, 219
Milling attachments,Acme, 209
Multiple- and single-spindle designs,
fjAYDEN multiple-spindle auto-
relative advantages, 8
matic, 64
Multiple-spindle screw machine de-
adjustable cams for tool spindles and
68 velopment, 6
cross-slides,
Multiple-spindle screw machines, 39
chuck-closing mechanism, 66
general description, 64
BRITAIN multiple-spindle
operation of master cam, 66
screw machine, 76
thread cutting operations, 71
indexing mechanism, 80
time required for making one piece,
spindle construction, 78
69
thread cutting mechanism, 82
Helical gears, cutting in screw machine,
tool slide, 79
323
Non-releasing type of die-holder, 133
Hexagon and square forming attach-
ment, 213
OPERATIONS on screw machines,
Holders, for centering tools, 115
for circular forming and miscellaneous, 258
cutting-off
88 pointing end of work, 259
tools,
for counterbores, 123
for flat forming tools, 90
PRODUCTION rate, calculating for

for reamers, 127

Acme machine, 172
Hollow mills, 113
Hollow mills or box-tools, setting, 153
RAISING block for swing tools,
128
Hollow roughing mill, 98
methods of setting on Brown &
Sharpe machines, 157
INDEX drilling attachment, 200 Reamer holders, 127
Reamers and counterbores, setting, 154
KNURL-HOLDER, double type for Reamers for screw machine work, 125
cross-slide, 143 Reamers, taper of, 125
opening and closing type, 143 Reaming allowances, 125
Knurling tools, 140 Reaming and counterboring feeds, 335
Knurls, concave, 145 Reaming attachment, accelerated, 207
different methods of applying, 144 Recessing and boring tools, 125
spiral, 146 Recessing, laying out cams for, 253
straight, 145 Recessing operation, 265
 INDEX 341

Recessing swing tools, 129 Spring screw threading dies, making,

Record cam and tool equipment on
of 132
Brown & Sharpe machine, 159 Square and hexagon forming attach-
Record of operations on Davenport ment, 213
machine, 193 Steadyrest of roller type, 1 13
Releasing die-holder, 134 Steel for box-tool cutters, size of, 113
Roller supports for box-tools, 95, 96, Steel for box-tool supports, 109

109, in Stop for stock, setting, 152

Rolling threads in screw machine, 314 Supports, work, for box- tools, 108
Roller type of steadyrest, 113 holding and adjusting, 109
Rotary magazine attachment, 221 Swing tools, for turning, 128
methods of setting raising block for
gCREW MACHINE, adjustment, operating, 157
148 raising block for, 128
cams, designing, 224 recessing, 129
classification, 4 setting, 156

development, 5
general features, 3 TAP- and die-holder, telescopic, 136 .

multiple-spindle designs, 39 Tap and die revolving attachment, 206

operations, miscellaneous, 258 Taps and dies, setting, 155

origin of term, i Taps, chamfer for different pitches, 139

relative advantages of single- and cutters for fluting, 139

multiple-spindle designs, 8 for automatic screw machines, 138

single-spindle designs, n for Norway iron and machine steel,
use of, for machining and assem- 140
bling, 304 number of flutes for, 139
Screw slotting attachments, 197 width of lands, 139
Setting-up automatic screw machines, Telescopic die- and tap-holder, 136
148 Templet for dividing cam circumfer-
Shaving operation, allowances for, 130, ence, 238
131 Templet for laying out screw machine
Shaving tools for screw machines, 130 cams, 235
Single- and multiple-spindle designs, Templets, use of cam-lever type, 250
relative advantages, 8 Thread cutting, development of cam
Single-spindle screw machine develop- lobe for, 243

ment, 5 dies for screw machines, 132

Slab milling attachments, 209 number of revolutions for, 229

Slotting and slabbing attachment, 199 on Acme machine, 181

Speeds and feeds, 330 on Davenport multiple-spindle auto-
for different tools and materials, 331 matic, 192
Spiral gear-hobbing attachment, 215 on Gridley multiple-spindle auto-
Spiral gears, cutting in screw machine, matic, 76
323 on Hayden multiple-spindle auto-
Spiral knurls, determining lead of teeth, matic, 71
147 on New Britain multiple-spindle
determining number of teeth around automatic, 82
circumference, 146 reversal of spindle for, in B. & S.

Spring-releasing box-tools, 99 machine, 18

342 INDEX

Threading-die holders, 133 Tilting magazine attachment, 219

Threading dies, methods of making rotary type of, 222
spring screw type, 132 Tool clearance, allowance for, in cam
Thread rolling, Acme type of holder design, 247
for, 322 Tool equipment for screw machines, 84

attachment, Cleveland, 321 Tool-holders for boring and recessing

by means of swing tool, 320 tools, 125

calculating blank diameter, 315 Tool-holder, universal cutting-off, 91

Cleveland attachment for, 321 Turret drilling attachment, 205
feeds for, 333
holder for passing roll over work, 319
holder for passing roll under work,
UNIVERSAL cross-slide knurling
tool, 141
320 Universal cutting-off tool-holder, 91
inclination of thread on roll, 315
in screw machines, 314
preparation of work for, 318
VERTICAL magazine feeding attach-
ment, 220
shape of thread on roll, 316
size of thread roll, 317
steel for thread rolls applied to steel, parts, making, in screw
3i5 machine, 271
Thread roll, size of, 317 Worm gear bobbing attachment, 215
RETURN CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT
202 Main Library

ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS

Renewals and Recharges may be made 4 days prior to the due date.
Books may be Renewed by calling 642-3405.

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY

FORM NO. DD6, BERKELEY, CA 94720
GENERAL LIBRARY -U.C. BERKELEY

392309

/4-*r Ces^

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY